SSA5085A
SSA5083A
Spectrum Analyzer
User Manual
EN02A

SSA5000A Series User ManualContents
1

Copyright and Declaration ............................................................................................ 1

2

Important Safety Information ........................................................................................ 2
2.1

General Safety Summary ....................................................................................... 2

2.2

Safety Terms and Symbols ..................................................................................... 4

2.3

Working Environment.............................................................................................. 5

2.4

Cooling Requirements ............................................................................................ 6

2.5

Power and Grounding Requirements ..................................................................... 6

2.6

Cleaning .................................................................................................................. 7

2.7

Abnormal Conditions .............................................................................................. 7

2.8

Safety Compliance .................................................................................................. 8

Informations ............................................................................................................................ 9
Exigence de Sécurité......................................................................................................... 9
Termes et symboles de sécurité...................................................................................... 11
Environnement de travail ................................................................................................. 12
Exigences de refroidissement ......................................................................................... 14
Connexions d'alimentation et de terre ............................................................................. 14
Nettoyage......................................................................................................................... 15
Conditions anormales ...................................................................................................... 15
Conformité en matière de sécurité.................................................................................. 16
3

Quick Start .................................................................................................................... 17
3.1

General Inspection ................................................................................................ 17

3.2

Preparing for Use .................................................................................................. 18
3.2.1

Appearance and Dimension ......................................................................... 18

3.2.2

Connect to AC Power Supply ....................................................................... 18

3.3

Front Panel ........................................................................................................... 19

3.4

Rear Panel ............................................................................................................ 20

int.siglent.com

I

SSA5000A Series User Manual

3.5

User Interface ....................................................................................................... 22

3.6

Touch screen and mouse operation ..................................................................... 23

3.7

Keyboard operation .............................................................................................. 23

3.8

Using Built-in Help ................................................................................................ 23

3.9

Firmware Operation .............................................................................................. 24
Check System Information ........................................................................... 24

3.9.2

Load Option .................................................................................................. 24

3.9.3

Firmware Upgrade ........................................................................................ 24

3.10

Remote Control ..................................................................................................... 25

3.11

Service and Support ............................................................................................. 25

4Mode & Measurement .................................................................................................. 26

5Spectrum Analyzer Mode ............................................................................................ 29
5.1

5.2

5.3

II

3.9.1

Frequency & Span ................................................................................................ 29
5.1.1

Frequency & Span ........................................................................................ 29

5.1.2

X Axis Scale.................................................................................................. 31

5.1.3

Freq Offset .................................................................................................... 31

5.1.4

Freq Step ...................................................................................................... 31

5.1.5

Signal Track .................................................................................................. 32

5.1.6

Auto Tune ..................................................................................................... 33

BW ........................................................................................................................ 34
5.2.1

Resolution Bandwidth................................................................................... 34

5.2.2

Video Bandwidth........................................................................................... 35

5.2.3

V/R Ratio ...................................................................................................... 35

5.2.4

Filter Type ..................................................................................................... 36

Sweep ................................................................................................................... 37
5.3.1

Sweep Type .................................................................................................. 37

5.3.2

Sweep Type Rules........................................................................................ 37

5.3.3

Sweep Points................................................................................................ 38

5.3.4

Sweep Time & Sweep Time Rules ............................................................... 38
int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.3.5

Sweep Time Estimate................................................................................... 39

5.3.6

Sweep/Measure............................................................................................ 40

5.4

Amplitude .............................................................................................................. 41
5.4.1

Ref Level ...................................................................................................... 41

5.4.2

Attenuator ..................................................................................................... 41

5.4.3

RF Preamp ................................................................................................... 42

5.4.4

Y Axis Unit .................................................................................................... 42

5.4.5

Y Axis Scale Type ......................................................................................... 43

5.4.6

Ref Offset...................................................................................................... 44

5.5

Trigger ................................................................................................................... 45
5.5.1

Trigger Source .............................................................................................. 45

5.5.2

Trigger Level ................................................................................................. 46

5.5.3

Trigger Slope ................................................................................................ 46

5.5.4

Trigger Delay ................................................................................................ 46

5.5.5

Zero Span Trigger Delay Compensation (external trigger only) .................. 47

5.5.6

Period (periodic trigger only) ........................................................................ 47

5.5.7

Offset Time ................................................................................................... 48

5.5.8

Reset Time Offset Display ............................................................................ 48

5.5.9

Sync Source (periodic trigger only) .............................................................. 49

5.5.10Gate Source ............................................................................................... 49

5.5.11Gate ............................................................................................................ 50

5.6

Trace ..................................................................................................................... 54
5.6.1

Select Trace.................................................................................................. 54

5.6.2

Trace Type .................................................................................................... 55

5.6.3

Trace State ................................................................................................... 56

5.6.4

Detect ........................................................................................................... 56

5.6.5

Math .............................................................................................................. 58

5.6.6

Normalize ..................................................................................................... 59

5.6.7

Trace Function .............................................................................................. 60

5.7
int.siglent.com

Marker & Peak ...................................................................................................... 62
III

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.8

5.9

IV

5.7.1

Select Marker ............................................................................................... 62

5.7.2

Select Trace.................................................................................................. 62

5.7.3

Marker Type .................................................................................................. 62

5.7.4

Marker Postion ............................................................................................. 64

5.7.5

Relative To .................................................................................................... 65

5.7.6

Readout Type ............................................................................................... 65

5.7.7

Marker Couple .............................................................................................. 66

5.7.8

Marker Lines ................................................................................................. 67

5.7.9

Marker Table ................................................................................................. 67

5.7.10Marker -> .................................................................................................... 67

5.7.11Marker Fn.................................................................................................... 70

5.7.12

Peak Search ............................................................................................... 72

Limit....................................................................................................................... 77
5.8.1

Slect Limit ..................................................................................................... 77

5.8.2

Limit State ..................................................................................................... 77

5.8.3

Limit Margin .................................................................................................. 77

5.8.4

Limit Type ..................................................................................................... 78

5.8.5

Limit Edit ....................................................................................................... 78

5.8.6

Limit Test....................................................................................................... 81

5.8.7

Setup ............................................................................................................ 82

Meas & Meas Setup ............................................................................................. 83
5.9.1

Swept SA ...................................................................................................... 83

5.9.2

Channel Power ............................................................................................. 88

5.9.3

ACPR ............................................................................................................ 90

5.9.4

OBW ............................................................................................................. 93

5.9.5

T-Power ........................................................................................................ 96

5.9.6

TOI ................................................................................................................ 98

5.9.7

Spectrum Monitor ....................................................................................... 100

5.9.8

CNR ............................................................................................................ 102

5.9.9

Harmonics .................................................................................................. 104
int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

6

5.9.10

IQ Acquisition............................................................................................ 106

5.9.11CCDF ........................................................................................................ 112

Real-Time Spectrum Analyzer Mode ........................................................................ 117
6.1

Frequency & SPAN ............................................................................................. 117
6.1.1

Frequency & Span ...................................................................................... 117

6.1.2

Freq Offset .................................................................................................. 118

6.1.3

Freq Step .................................................................................................... 118

6.2

BW ...................................................................................................................... 120

6.3

Sweep ................................................................................................................. 122
6.3.1

Acquisition Time ......................................................................................... 122

6.3.2

Sweep ......................................................................................................... 122

6.4

Amplitude ............................................................................................................ 124
6.4.1

Ref Level .................................................................................................... 124

6.4.2

Attenuator ................................................................................................... 124

6.4.3

RF Preamp ................................................................................................. 125

6.4.4

Scale ........................................................................................................... 125

6.4.5

Unit ............................................................................................................. 126

6.5

Trigger ................................................................................................................. 127
6.5.1

Free Run ..................................................................................................... 127

6.5.2

PvT ............................................................................................................. 127

6.5.3

External....................................................................................................... 128

6.5.4

FMT ............................................................................................................ 129

6.6

Trace ................................................................................................................... 131
6.6.1

Select Trace................................................................................................ 131

6.6.2

Trace Type .................................................................................................. 131

6.6.3

Trace State ................................................................................................. 132

6.6.4

Detect ......................................................................................................... 132

6.7

Marker & Peak .................................................................................................... 134
6.7.1

int.siglent.com

Select Marker ............................................................................................. 134
VSSA5000A Series User Manual

6.8

7

Select Trace................................................................................................ 135

6.7.3

Marker Type ................................................................................................ 135

6.7.4

Relative To .................................................................................................. 137

6.7.5

Peak->CF ................................................................................................... 137

6.7.6

Update Peak/Maximum Peak ..................................................................... 137

6.7.7

Minimum Peak ............................................................................................ 137

6.7.8

Left Peak .................................................................................................... 138

6.7.9

Right Peak .................................................................................................. 138

6.7.10Peak Peak ................................................................................................ 138

6.7.11Countinuous Peak .................................................................................... 138

6.7.12Marker to .................................................................................................. 139

Meas & Meas setup ............................................................................................ 140
6.8.1

Density ........................................................................................................ 140

6.8.2

Spectrogram ............................................................................................... 141

6.8.3

Spectrum + Spectrogram ........................................................................... 142

6.8.4

PvT ............................................................................................................. 143

6.8.5

Meas setup ................................................................................................. 143

Modulation Analyzer Mode ........................................................................................ 150
7.1

7.2

VI

6.7.2

Digital Modulation Analysis (DMA) ..................................................................... 150
7.1.1

Settings ....................................................................................................... 150

7.1.2

Demod ........................................................................................................ 152

7.1.3

Filter ............................................................................................................ 155

7.1.4

Burst/sync Search ...................................................................................... 156

7.1.5

BERT .......................................................................................................... 159

Analog Modulation Analysis (AMA) .................................................................... 160
7.2.1

Demod Type ............................................................................................... 161

7.2.2

IFBW ........................................................................................................... 161

7.2.3

EqLPF ......................................................................................................... 161

7.2.4

Average ...................................................................................................... 162
int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

7.3

Freq ..................................................................................................................... 163
7.3.1

Freq & Span ............................................................................................... 163

7.3.2

CF Step....................................................................................................... 163

7.4

BW ...................................................................................................................... 164
7.4.1

EQBW ......................................................................................................... 164

7.4.2

Window ....................................................................................................... 164

7.5

Sweep ................................................................................................................. 165
7.5.1

7.6

Measure/Sweep Control (Single/Continue/Restart) ................................... 165

Trigger ................................................................................................................. 166
7.6.1

Trigger Source ............................................................................................ 166

7.6.2

Trigger Level ............................................................................................... 167

7.6.3

Trigger Slope .............................................................................................. 167

7.6.4

Trigger Delay .............................................................................................. 167

7.6.5

Zero Span Trigger Delay Compensation (External Trigger ) ..................... 168

7.6.6

Period (Period) ........................................................................................... 168

7.6.7

Offset Time(Period) .................................................................................... 168

7.6.8

Reset Offset Display (Period) ..................................................................... 169

7.6.9

Sync Source (Period) ................................................................................. 169

7.6.10Auto Trigger .............................................................................................. 170

7.6.11

Hold Off ..................................................................................................... 170

7.7

Ampt .................................................................................................................... 172
7.7.1

Attenuator & RF Preamp ............................................................................ 172

7.7.2

Ref Level & Scale ....................................................................................... 172

7.8

Trace ................................................................................................................... 174
7.8.1

Select Trace................................................................................................ 174

7.8.2

Layout ......................................................................................................... 174

7.8.3

Trace Display and Layout（DMA） ........................................................... 174

7.8.4

Trace Display and Layout（AMA） ........................................................... 175

7.8.5

Select Trace................................................................................................ 175

7.8.6

Num of Traces ............................................................................................ 175

int.siglent.com

VIISSA5000A Series User Manual

7.9

8

7.8.7

Data ............................................................................................................ 175

7.8.8

Format ........................................................................................................ 176

7.8.9

Eye Length ................................................................................................. 177

7.8.10

Symbol Table ............................................................................................ 177

Marker ................................................................................................................. 178
7.9.1

Select Marker & Select Trace ..................................................................... 178

7.9.2

Marker Type ................................................................................................ 178

7.9.3

Marker X ..................................................................................................... 179

7.9.4

Reset Delta ................................................................................................. 180

7.9.5

Relative To .................................................................................................. 180

7.9.6

Marker Couple ............................................................................................ 180

EMI Measurement Mode ............................................................................................ 181
8.1

8.2

8.3

8.4

Frequency & Span .............................................................................................. 183
8.1.1

Meter Frequency ........................................................................................ 183

8.1.2

Scan Frequency Mode ............................................................................... 183

8.1.3

CISPR Band ............................................................................................... 183

8.1.4

Midspan Frequency .................................................................................... 183

8.1.5

Start Frequency .......................................................................................... 183

8.1.6

Stop Frequency .......................................................................................... 183

8.1.7

Span ........................................................................................................... 183

8.1.8

X Axis Scale................................................................................................ 184

BW ...................................................................................................................... 184
8.2.1

Meter RBW ................................................................................................. 184

8.2.2

Scan RBW .................................................................................................. 184

Sweep ................................................................................................................. 185
8.3.1

Sweep Config ............................................................................................. 185

8.3.2

Sweep Control ............................................................................................ 185

Amplitude ............................................................................................................ 186
8.4.1

VIII

Ref Level .................................................................................................... 186
int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

8.4.2

Attenuator ................................................................................................... 186

8.4.3

RF Preamp ................................................................................................. 187

8.4.4

Y Axis Unit .................................................................................................. 187

8.4.5

Y Axis Scale Type ....................................................................................... 188

8.4.6

Ref Offset.................................................................................................... 189

8.5

Trigger ................................................................................................................. 190
8.5.1

Trigger Source ............................................................................................ 190

8.5.2

Trigger Level ............................................................................................... 190

8.5.3

Trigger Slope .............................................................................................. 191

8.5.4

Trigger Delay .............................................................................................. 191

8.6

Trace ................................................................................................................... 192
8.6.1

Select Trace................................................................................................ 192

8.6.2

Trace Type .................................................................................................. 192

8.6.3

Trace State ................................................................................................. 193

8.6.4

Detect ......................................................................................................... 194

8.7

Marker & Peak .................................................................................................... 196
8.7.1

Select Marker ............................................................................................. 196

8.7.2

Select Trace................................................................................................ 196

8.7.3

Marker Type ................................................................................................ 196

8.7.4

Marker Postion ........................................................................................... 198

8.7.5

Relative To .................................................................................................. 199

8.7.6

Readout Type ............................................................................................. 199

8.7.7

Marker Lines ............................................................................................... 200

8.7.8

Marker -> .................................................................................................... 201

8.7.9

Peak Search ............................................................................................... 203

8.8

Limits ................................................................................................................... 207
8.8.1

Slect Limit ................................................................................................... 207

8.8.2

Limit State ................................................................................................... 207

8.8.3

Limit Margin ................................................................................................ 207

8.8.4

Limit Type ................................................................................................... 208

int.siglent.com

IX

SSA5000A Series User Manual

8.9

9Limit Edit ..................................................................................................... 208

8.8.6

Limit Test..................................................................................................... 212

8.8.7

Setup .......................................................................................................... 212

Meas & Meas Setup ........................................................................................... 214
8.9.1

Average Type.............................................................................................. 214

8.9.2

Meas Control .............................................................................................. 215

8.9.3

Scan............................................................................................................ 216

8.9.4

Measure ...................................................................................................... 216

8.9.5

List Operation ............................................................................................. 217

8.9.6

Meter........................................................................................................... 218

8.9.7

Global ......................................................................................................... 218

Pulse Measurement Mode ......................................................................................... 219
9.1

9.2

9.3

9.4

9.5
X

8.8.5

Frequency ........................................................................................................... 220
9.1.1

Frequency................................................................................................... 220

9.1.2

Freq Offset .................................................................................................. 220

9.1.3

Freq Step .................................................................................................... 220

BW ...................................................................................................................... 222
9.2.1

Resolution Bandwidth................................................................................. 222

9.2.2

Video Bandwidth......................................................................................... 222

9.2.3

V/R Ratio .................................................................................................... 223

Sweep ................................................................................................................. 224
9.3.1

Sweep Points.............................................................................................. 224

9.3.2

Sweep Time ................................................................................................ 224

9.3.3

Sweep/Measure.......................................................................................... 225

Amplitude ............................................................................................................ 226
9.4.1

Ref Level .................................................................................................... 226

9.4.2

Ref Offset.................................................................................................... 227

9.4.3

Y Axis Scale ................................................................................................ 227

Correction ........................................................................................................... 230
int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

9.6

Trigger ................................................................................................................. 232
9.6.1

Trigger Source ............................................................................................ 232

9.6.2

Trigger Level ............................................................................................... 233

9.6.3

Trigger Slope .............................................................................................. 233

9.6.4

Trigger Delay .............................................................................................. 233

9.6.5

Zero Span Trigger Delay Compensation (external trigger only) ................ 234

9.6.6

Period (periodic trigger only) ...................................................................... 234

9.6.7

Offset Time ................................................................................................. 235

9.6.8

Reset Time Offset Display .......................................................................... 235

9.6.9

Sync Source (periodic trigger only) ............................................................ 236

9.6.10Gate Source ............................................................................................. 236

9.7

Trace ................................................................................................................... 238
9.7.1

Trace Type .................................................................................................. 238

9.7.2

Trace State ................................................................................................. 239

9.7.3

Detect ......................................................................................................... 240

9.8Marker & Peak .................................................................................................... 242
9.8.1

Select Marker ............................................................................................. 242

9.8.2

Select Trace................................................................................................ 242

9.8.3

Marker Type ................................................................................................ 242

9.8.4

Marker Postion ........................................................................................... 244

9.8.5

Readout Type ............................................................................................. 245

9.8.6

Marker Couple ............................................................................................ 246

9.8.7

Marker Lines ............................................................................................... 246

9.8.8

Marker Table ............................................................................................... 247

9.8.9

Marker Funtion ........................................................................................... 247

9.8.10Peak Search ............................................................................................. 249

9.9

Meas & Meas Setup ........................................................................................... 254
9.9.1

10

Swept SA .................................................................................................... 254

Phase Noise Measurement Mode ............................................................................. 262

int.siglent.com

XI

SSA5000A Series User Manual

10.1

10.2

10.3

10.4

10.5

10.6

XII

Frequency & Span .............................................................................................. 262
10.1.1

Carrier Frequency..................................................................................... 262

10.1.2Start Offset................................................................................................ 262

10.1.3

Stop Offset ................................................................................................ 263

10.1.4

Auto Tune ................................................................................................. 263

10.1.5Singal Tracking ......................................................................................... 263

Sweep ................................................................................................................. 265
10.2.1

Sweep Points............................................................................................ 265

10.2.2

Sweep/Measure........................................................................................ 265

Amplitude ............................................................................................................ 266
10.3.1

Ref Level .................................................................................................. 266

10.3.2Y Axis Scale Type ..................................................................................... 266

Marker ................................................................................................................. 267
10.4.1

Select Marker ........................................................................................... 267

10.4.2

Select Trace.............................................................................................. 267

10.4.3Marker Type .............................................................................................. 267

10.4.4Marker Postion ......................................................................................... 269

10.4.5Marker Fn ................................................................................................. 269

10.4.6

Spurious search........................................................................................ 271

Trace ................................................................................................................... 272
10.5.1

Select Trace.............................................................................................. 272

10.5.2

Trace Type ................................................................................................ 272

10.5.3

Trace Function .......................................................................................... 273

Meas ................................................................................................................... 275
10.6.1

Average .................................................................................................... 275

10.6.2

View .......................................................................................................... 276

10.6.3

Meas Type ................................................................................................ 276

10.6.4

Smoothing ................................................................................................ 276

10.6.5Carrier amplitude limit .............................................................................. 277

10.6.6

Limit .......................................................................................................... 277
int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

11

Noise Figure Measurement Mode ............................................................................. 282
11.1

Frequency & Span .............................................................................................. 284
11.1.1

Freq Context ............................................................................................. 284

11.1.2

Freq Mode................................................................................................. 284

11.2

BW ...................................................................................................................... 287
11.2.1

11.3

Resolution Bandwidth ............................................................................... 287

Sweep ................................................................................................................. 287
11.3.1

Avg Time/Pt............................................................................................... 287

11.3.2

Points ........................................................................................................ 288

11.3.3

Sweep/Measure ........................................................................................ 288

11.4

Amplitude ............................................................................................................ 289
11.4.1

Attenuator & Preamp & Ref Level ............................................................ 289

11.4.2Y Axis Scale .............................................................................................. 290

11.4.3Y Scale Unit .............................................................................................. 290

11.4.4

Auto Scale................................................................................................. 291

11.5

Trace ................................................................................................................... 291
11.5.1

Layout ....................................................................................................... 291

11.5.2

Trace Type ................................................................................................ 292

11.5.3

Trace State ............................................................................................... 293

11.5.4

Disp Result................................................................................................ 293

11.6

Marker ................................................................................................................. 294
11.6.1

Select Marker & Select Trace ................................................................... 294

11.6.2Marker Type .............................................................................................. 294

11.6.3Marker All Off ............................................................................................ 295

11.7

Meas Setup ......................................................................................................... 295
11.7.1

Settings ..................................................................................................... 295

11.7.2

P hot/P cold Unit ....................................................................................... 295

11.7.3

DUT Setup ................................................................................................ 295

11.7.4

Ext LO Setup ............................................................................................ 297

int.siglent.com

XIII

SSA5000A Series User Manual

1211.7.5ENR Setup ................................................................................................ 300

11.7.6

Calibration ................................................................................................. 300

Bluetooth Measurement Mode .................................................................................. 302
12.1

12.2

12.3

12.4

12.5

Freq/Channel ...................................................................................................... 302
12.1.1Channel .................................................................................................... 302

12.1.2Center Frequency ..................................................................................... 302

12.1.3

Center Frequency Step ............................................................................ 302

Amplitude ............................................................................................................ 303
12.2.1

Scale ......................................................................................................... 303

12.2.2

Ref Level .................................................................................................. 303

12.2.3

Attenuator ................................................................................................. 303

Marker/Peak ........................................................................................................ 304
12.3.1

Select Marker ........................................................................................... 304

12.3.2

Select Trace.............................................................................................. 304

12.3.3Marker Type .............................................................................................. 304

12.3.4Marker X ................................................................................................... 306

12.3.5

Relative To ................................................................................................ 306

12.3.6

Peak.......................................................................................................... 307

Trace ................................................................................................................... 308
12.4.1

Trace Num & Layout................................................................................. 308

12.4.2

Select Trace.............................................................................................. 308

12.4.3

Trace Format ............................................................................................ 308

Sweep ................................................................................................................. 312
12.5.1

12.6

12.7

Measurement ...................................................................................................... 313
12.6.1Low Energy............................................................................................... 313

12.6.2Average .................................................................................................... 315

Trigger ................................................................................................................. 316
12.7.1

XIV

Sweep/Measure control ........................................................................... 312

Trigger Source .......................................................................................... 316
int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

131412.7.2

Trigger Level ............................................................................................. 317

12.7.3

Trigger Slope ............................................................................................ 317

12.7.4

Trigger Delay ............................................................................................ 317

12.7.5

Trigger Delay ............................................................................................ 318

12.7.6

Zero Span Trigger Delay Compensation (external trigger only) .............. 318

12.7.7

Period (periodic trigger only) .................................................................... 319

12.7.8

Offset Time ............................................................................................... 319

12.7.9Reset Time Offset Display ........................................................................ 320

12.7.10

Sync Source (periodic trigger only) ........................................................ 320

Input and Output......................................................................................................... 321
13.1

Freq Ref Input ..................................................................................................... 321

13.2

Input Z Correction ............................................................................................... 321

13.3

Correction ........................................................................................................... 321

13.4

IF Output ............................................................................................................. 323

System ......................................................................................................................... 326
14.1

System ................................................................................................................ 326
14.1.1

About ........................................................................................................ 326

14.1.2

Hardware .................................................................................................. 327

14.1.3

Log Record ............................................................................................... 327

14.1.4

Language .................................................................................................. 327

14.1.5Connect Setting ........................................................................................ 328

14.1.6

Date and Time .......................................................................................... 330

14.1.7

Option ....................................................................................................... 330

14.1.8Upgrade .................................................................................................... 330

14.1.9Help .......................................................................................................... 330

14.2

Reset ................................................................................................................... 332
14.2.1

Preset ....................................................................................................... 332

14.2.2Preset Type............................................................................................... 332

int.siglent.com

XV

SSA5000A Series User Manual

15

14.2.4

Power On .................................................................................................. 333

14.2.5

Factory Reset ........................................................................................... 333

14.2.6

Reset&Clear ............................................................................................. 333

Alignments .......................................................................................................... 334

14.4

File ...................................................................................................................... 335

14.5

Display ................................................................................................................ 336

14.6

Power .................................................................................................................. 337

14.7

Self Test .............................................................................................................. 337
14.7.1

Screen Test ............................................................................................... 337

14.7.2

Keyboard Test........................................................................................... 337

14.7.3LCD Test ................................................................................................... 337

14.7.4

Touch Test................................................................................................. 337

Remote Control........................................................................................................... 338

15.2

15.3

XVI

Save User Config ..................................................................................... 332

14.3

15.1

16

14.2.3

Remotely Operating the Analyzer ....................................................................... 338
15.1.1

USB Device port ....................................................................................... 338

15.1.2

LAN port.................................................................................................... 339

15.1.3

GPIB-USB Host port................................................................................. 340

Build Communication .......................................................................................... 341
15.2.1

VISA.......................................................................................................... 341

15.2.2

Sockets/Telnet .......................................................................................... 343

Remote Control Capabilities ............................................................................... 344
15.3.1

User-defined Programming ...................................................................... 344

15.3.2NI MAX ..................................................................................................... 344

15.3.3Web browser ............................................................................................ 347

SCPI Overview ............................................................................................................ 348
16.1

Command Format ............................................................................................... 348

16.2

Symbol Instruction .............................................................................................. 348

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

17

16.3

Parameter Type .................................................................................................. 349

16.4

Command Abbreviation ...................................................................................... 350

16.5IEEE Common Commands................................................................................. 351

16.6

SCPI LIST ........................................................................................................... 353
16.6.1

GPSA ........................................................................................................ 353

16.6.2

RTSA ........................................................................................................ 359

16.6.3

MA ............................................................................................................ 362

16.6.4

EMI ........................................................................................................... 364

16.6.5

PULSE ...................................................................................................... 368

16.6.6

PN ............................................................................................................. 370

16.6.7

NF ............................................................................................................. 373

16.6.8

BT ............................................................................................................. 375

16.6.9Other ......................................................................................................... 376

Service and Support .................................................................................................. 377
17.1

Service Summary................................................................................................ 377

17.2

Troubleshooting .................................................................................................. 378

int.siglent.com

XVII

SSA5000A Series User Manual1

Copyright and Declaration

Copyright
SIGLENT TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD All Rights Reserved.

Trademark Information
SIGLENT is the registered trademark of SIGLENT TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD

Declaration
SIGLENT products are protected by patent law worldwide
SIGLENT reserves the right to modify or change parts of or all the specifications or pricing policies atcompany’s sole decision.
Information in this publication replaces all previously corresponding material.
Any way of copying, extracting or translating the contents of this manual is not allowed without thepermission of SIGLENT.
SIGLENT will not be responsible for losses caused by either incidental or consequential inconnection with the furnishing, use or performance of this manual as well as any information
contained.

Product Certification
SIGLENT guarantees this product conforms to the national and industrial standards in China as wellas the ISO9001: 2008 standard and the ISO14001: 2004 standard. Other international standard
conformance certification is in progress.

int.siglent.com

1

SSA5000A Series User Manual2

Important Safety Information

This manual contains information and warnings that must be followed by the user for safe operationand to keep the product in a safe condition.

2.1

General Safety Summary

Carefully read the following safety precautions to avoid personal injury and prevent damage to the
instrument and any products connected to it. To avoid potential hazards, please use the instrument
as specified.

To Avoid Fire or Personal Injury.

Use Proper Power Line.
Only use a local/state approved power cord for connecting the instrument to mains power sources.
Ground the Instrument.
The instrument grounds through the protective terra conductor of the power line. To avoid electric
shock, the ground conductor must be connected to the earth. Make sure the instrument is grounded
correctly before connect its input or output terminals.

Connect the Signal Wire Correctly.
The potential of the signal wire is equal to the earth, so do not connect the signal wire to a highvoltage. Do not touch the exposed contacts or components.
Look over All Terminals’ Ratings.
To avoid fire or electric shock, please look over all ratings and signed instructions of the instrument.
Before connecting the instrument, please read the manual carefully to gain more information about
the ratings.
Equipment Maintenance and Service.
When the equipment fails, please do not dismantle the machine for maintenance. The equipment
contains capacitors, power supply, transformers, and other energy storage devices, which may
cause high voltage damage. The internal devices of the equipment are sensitive to static electricity,and direct contact is easy to cause irreparable damage to the equipment. It is necessary to return tothe factory or the company's designated maintenance organization for maintenance.
Be sure to pull out the power supply when repairing the equipment. Live line operation is strictly
prohibited. The equipment can only be powered on when the maintenance is completed and themaintenance is confirmed to be successful.

2

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Identification of Normal State of Equipment.
After the equipment is started, there will be no alarm information and error information at theinterface under normal conditions. The curve of the interface will scan from left to right freely; if there
is a button in the scanning process or there is an alarm or error prompt, the device may be in an
abnormal state. You need to view the specific prompt information. You can try to restart the setting. If
the fault information is still in place, do not use it for testing. Contact the manufacturer or the
maintenance department designated by the manufacturer to carry out maintenance to avoid thewrong test data caused by the use of the fault or endanger the personal safety.

Not Operate with Suspected Failures.
If you suspect that there is damage to the instrument, please let qualified service personnel check it.

Avoid Circuit or Wire Exposed Components Exposed.
Do not touch exposed contacts or components when the power is on.

Do not operate in wet/damp conditions.

Do not operate in an explosive atmosphere.
Keep the surface of the instrument clean and dry.

Not to use the equipment for measurements on mains circuits, not to use the equipment formeasurements on voltage exceed the voltage range describe in the manual. The maximum
additional transient voltage cannot exceed 1300V.

The responsible body or operator should refer to the instruction manual to preserve theprotection afforded by the equipment. If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by
the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.

Any parts of the device and its accessories are not allowed to be changed or replaced, otherthan authorized by the manufacturer or agent.

int.siglent.com

3

SSA5000A Series User Manual

2.2

Safety Terms and Symbols

When the following symbols or terms appear on the front or rear panel of the instrument or in thismanual, they indicate special care in terms of safety.

This symbol is used where caution is required. Refer to the accompanying
information or documents to protect against personal injury or damage to the
instrument.

This symbol warns of a potential risk of shock hazard.

This symbol is used to denote the measurement ground connection.

This symbol is used to denote a safety ground connection.
This symbol shows that the switch is an On/Standby switch. When it is pressed,
the analyzer’s state switches between Operation and Standby. This switch does
not disconnect the device's power supply. To completely power off the analyzer,
the power cord must be unplugged from the AC socket after the instrument is in
the standby state.
This symbol is used to represent alternating current, or "AC".

4

CAUTION

The "CAUTION" symbol indicates a potential hazard. It calls attention to aprocedure, practice, or condition which may be dangerous if not followed. Do notproceed until its conditions are fully understood and met.

WARNING

The "WARNING" symbol indicates a potential hazard. It calls attention to aprocedure, practice, or condition which, if not followed, could cause bodily injury
or death. If a WARNING is indicated, do not proceed until the safety conditions
are fully understood and met.

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

2.3

Working Environment

The design of the instrument has been verified to conform to EN 61010-1 safety standard per thefollowing limits:

Environment
The instrument is used indoors and should be operated in a clean and dry environment with anambient temperature range.
Note: Direct sunlight, electric heaters, and other heat sources should be considered when evaluating
the ambient temperature.

Warning: Do not operate the instrument in explosive, dusty, or humid
environments.

Ambient Temperature
Operating: 0 ℃ to +50 ℃
Non-operation: -30 ℃ to +70 ℃
Note: Direct sunlight, radiators, and other heat sources should be taken into account whenassessing the ambient temperature.

Humidity
Operating: 5% ~ 90 %RH, 30 ℃, derate to 50 %RH at 40 ℃
Non-operating: 5% ~ 95% RH

Mains supply voltage fluctuations
Refer to 2.5 Power and Ground Requirements

AltitudeOperating: ≤ 3,048 m, 25 ℃
Non-operating: ≤ 12,191 m

Installation (overvoltage) Category
This product is powered by mains conforming to installation (overvoltage) Category II.
Note: Installation (overvoltage) category I refers to situations where equipment measurement
terminals are connected to the source circuit. In these terminals, precautions are done to limit thetransient voltage to a correspondingly low level.

Installation (overvoltage) category II refers to the local power distribution level which applies toint.siglent.com

5

SSA5000A Series User Manual

equipment connected to the AC line (AC power).

Degree of Pollution
The analyzers may be operated in environments of Pollution Degree II.
Note: Degree of Pollution II refers to a working environment that is dry and non-conductive pollution
occurs. Occasional temporary conductivity caused by condensation is expected.

IP Rating
IP20 (as defined in IEC 60529).

2.4

Cooling Requirements

This instrument relies on the forced air cooling with internal fans and ventilation openings. Care must
be taken to avoid restricting the airflow around the apertures (fan holes) at each side of the analyzer.
To ensure adequate ventilation it is required to leave a 15 cm (6 inch) minimum gap around the sidesof the instrument.

CAUTION: Do not block the ventilation holes located on both sides of theanalyzer.
CAUTION: Do not allow any foreign matter to enter the analyzer through theventilation holes, etc.

2.5Power and Grounding Requirements

The instrument operates with a single-phase, 100 to 240 Vrms (+/-10%) AC power at 50/60 Hz(+/-5%), or single-phase 100 to 120 Vrms (+/-10%) AC power at 400 Hz (+/-5%).

No manual voltage selection is required because the instrument automatically adapts to line voltage.
Depending on the type and number of options and accessories (probes, PC port plug-in, etc.), theinstrument can consume up to 193 W of power.
Note: The instrument automatically adapts to the AC line input within the following ranges:

6

Voltage Range:

90 - 264 Vrms

90 - 132 Vrms

Frequency Range:

47 - 63 Hz

380 - 420 Hz

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

The instrument includes a grounded cord set containing a molded three-terminal polarized plug anda standard IEC320 (Type C13) connector for making line voltage and safety ground connection. The
AC inlet ground terminal is connected directly to the frame of the instrument. For adequate protection
against electrical shock hazards, the power cord plug must be inserted into a mating AC outlet
containing a safety ground contact. Use only the power cord specified for this instrument and certified
for the country of use.

Warning: Electrical Shock Hazard!
Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside of the analyzer, ordisconnection of the safety ground terminal creates a hazardous situation.
Intentional interruption is prohibited.

The position of the instrument should allow easy access to the socket. To make the instrumentcompletely power off, unplug the instrument power cord from the AC socket.

The power cord should be unplugged from the AC outlet if the analyzer is not to be used for an
extended period.

CAUTION: The outer shells of the front panel terminals are connected to the
instrument’s chassis and therefore to the safety ground.

2.6

Cleaning

Clean only the exterior of the instrument, using a damp, soft cloth. Do not use chemicals or abrasive
elements. Under no circumstances allow moisture to penetrate the instrument. To avoid electricalshock, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet before cleaning.

Warning: Electrical Shock Hazard!
No operator serviceable parts inside. Do not remove covers.
Refer servicing to qualified personnel

2.7

Abnormal Conditions

Do not operate the analyzer if there is any visible sign of damage or has been subjected to severetransport stresses.
If you suspect the analyzer’s protection has been impaired, disconnect the power cord and secure
the instrument against any unintended operation.

int.siglent.com

7

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Proper use of the instrument depends on careful reading of all instructions and labels.

Warning: Any use of the analyzer in a manner not specified by the
manufacturer may impair the instrument’s safety protection. This instrument
should not be directly connected to human subjects or used for patientmonitoring.

2.8

Safety ComplianceThis section lists the safety standards with which the product complies.

U.S. nationally recognized testing laboratory listing1.

UL 61010-1:2012/R: 2018-11. Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement,
Control, and Laboratory Use – Part 1: General Requirements.

2.

UL 61010-2-030:2018. Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control,and Laboratory Use – Part2-030: Particular requirements for testing and measuring circuits.

Canadian certification
1.

CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-1:2012/A1:2018-11. Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment
for Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use – Part 1: General Requirements.

2.

CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-2-030:2018. Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use – Part 2-030: Particular requirements for testing andmeasuring circuits.

8

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Informations
essentielles sur la sécurité
Ce manuel contient des informations et des avertissements que les utilisateurs doivent suivre pour
assurer la sécurité des opérations et maintenir les produits en sécurité.

Exigence de Sécurité
Lisez attentivement les précautions de sécurité ci - après afin d 'éviter les dommages corporels et deprévenir les dommages aux instruments et aux produits associés. Pour éviter les risques potentiels,
utilisez les instruments prescrits.
Éviter l 'incendie ou les lésions corporelles.
Utilisez un cordon d'alimentation approprié.
N'utilisez que des cordons d'alimentation spécifiques aux instruments approuvés par les autorités
locales.
Mettez l'instrument au sol.
L'instrument est mis à la Terre par un conducteur de mise à la terre de protection du cordon
d'alimentation.Pour éviter un choc électrique, le conducteur de mise à la terre doit être mis à laterre.Assurez - vous que l'instrument est correctement mis à la terre avant de connecter les bornes
d'entrée ou de sortie de l'instrument.
Connectez correctement le fil de signalisation.
Le potentiel de la ligne de signal est égal au potentiel au sol, donc ne connectez pas la ligne designal à haute tension.Ne touchez pas les contacts ou les composants exposés.
Voir les cotes de tous les terminaux.
Pour éviter un incendie ou un choc électrique, vérifiez toutes les cotes et signez les instructions del'instrument.Avant de brancher l'instrument, lisez attentivement ce manuel pour obtenir de plus
amples renseignements sur les cotes.
Entretien du matériel.
En cas de défaillance de l'équipement, ne pas démonter et entretenir l'équipement sans autorisation.
L'équipement contient des condensateurs, de l'alimentation électrique, des transformateurs etd'autres dispositifs de stockage d'énergie, ce qui peut causer des blessures à haute tension. Lesdispositifs internes de l'équipement sont sensibles à l'électricité statique. Le contact direct peutfacilement causer des blessures irrécupérables à l'équipement. L'équipement doit être retourné àl'usine ou à l'organisme de maintenance désigné par l'entreprise pour l'entretien. L'alimentationélectrique doit être retirée pendant l'entretienLa ligne ne doit pas être mise sous tension tant que
int.siglent.com

9

SSA5000A Series User Manuall'entretien de l'équipement n'est pas terminé et que l'entretien n'est pas confirmé.
Identification de l'état normal de l'équipement.
Après le démarrage de l'équipement, dans des conditions normales, il n'y aura pas d'informationd'alarme et d'erreur au bas de l'interface, et la courbe de l'interface sera balayée librement degauche à droite; si un blocage se produit pendant le processus de numérisation, ou si l'informationd'alarme ou d'erreur apparaît au bas de l'interface, l'équipement peut être dans un état anormal.
Pour voir l'information d'alarme spécifique, vous pouvez d'abord essayer de redémarrerSi
l'information sur la défaillance est toujours présente, ne l'utilisez pas pour l'essai. Contactez lefabricant ou le Service de réparation désigné par le fabricant pour effectuer l'entretien afin d'éviterd'apporter des données d'essai erronées ou de mettre en danger la sécurité personnelle en raison
de l'utilisation de la défaillance.
Ne pas fonctionner en cas de suspicion de défaillance.
Si vous soupçonnez des dommages à l'instrument, demandez à un technicien qualifié de vérifier.
L 'exposition du circuit ou de l' élément d 'exposition du fil est évitée.
Lorsque l 'alimentation est connectée, aucun contact ou élément nu n' est mis en contact.
Ne pas fonctionner dans des conditions humides / humides.
Pas dans un environnement explosif.
Maintenez la surface de l 'instrument propre et sec.
Le Circuit d 'alimentation électrique ne peut pas être mesuré à l' aide du dispositif, ni latension qui dépasse la plage de tension décrite dans le présent manuel.
Seuls les ensembles de sondes conformes aux spécifications du fabricant peuvent êtreutilisés.
L'organisme ou l'opérateur responsable doit se référer au cahier des charges pour protéger laprotection offerte par le matériel.La protection offerte par le matériel peut être compromise si
celui - ci est utilisé de manière non spécifiée par le fabricant.
Aucune pièce du matériel et de ses annexes ne peut être remplacée ou remplacée sansl'autorisation de son fabricant.
Remplacer la batterie dans l 'appareil avec les mêmes spécifications de batterie au lithium.

10

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Termes et symboles de sécurité
Lorsque les symboles ou termes suivants apparaissent sur le panneau avant ou arrière del'instrument ou dans ce manuel, ils indiquent un soin particulier en termes de sécurité.

Ce symbole est utilisé lorsque la prudence est requise. Reportez-vous aux
informations ou documents joints afin de vous protéger contre les blessuresou les dommages à l'instrument.
Ce symbole avertit d'un risque potentiel de choc électrique.

Ce symbole est utilisé pour désigner la connexion de terre de mesure.

Ce symbole est utilisé pour indiquer une connexion à la terre de sécurité.
Ce symbole indique que l'interrupteur est un interrupteur marche / veille.
Lorsqu'il est enfoncé, l'état de l'instruments bascule entre Fonctionnement et
Veille. Ce commutateur ne déconnecte pas l'alimentation de l'appareil. Pouréteindre complètement l'instruments, le cordon d'alimentation doit êtredébranché de la prise secteur une fois l'instruments en état de veille.
Ce symbole est utilisé pour représenter un courant alternatif, ou "AC".

CAUTION

Le symbole " CAUTION" indique un danger potentiel. Il attire l'attention sur
une procédure, une pratique ou une condition qui peut être dangereuse si ellen'est pas suivie. Ne continuez pas tant que ses conditions n'ont pas été
entièrement comprises et remplies.

WARNINGLe symbole " WARNING" indique un danger potentiel. Il attire l'attention sur
une procédure, une pratique ou une condition qui, si elle n'est pas suivie,
pourrait entraîner des blessures corporelles ou la mort. Si un
AVERTISSEMENT est indiqué, ne continuez pas tant que les conditions desécurité ne sont pas entièrement comprises et remplies.

int.siglent.com

11

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Environnement de travail
La conception de l'instrument a été certifiée conforme à la norme EN 61010-1, sur la base desvaleurs limites suivantes:

Environnement
L'instrument doit être utilisé à l'intérieur dans un environnement propre et sec dans la plage detempérature ambiante.
Note: la lumière directe du soleil, les réchauffeurs électriques et d'autres sources de chaleur doiventêtre pris en considération lors de l'évaluation de la température ambiante.

Attention: ne pas utiliser l'instrument dans l'air explosif, poussiéreux ou
humide.

Température ambiante
En fonctionnement: 0 ℃ à +50 ℃
Hors fonctionnement: -30 ℃ à +70 ℃
Note: pour évaluer la température de l'environnement, il convient de tenir compte des rayonnements
solaires directs, des radiateurs thermiques et d'autres sources de chaleur.

Humidité
Fonctionnement: 5% ~ 90% HR, 30 °C, 40 °C réduit à 50% HRHors fonctionnement: 5% ~ 95%,
65 ℃, 24 heures

Fluctuation de la tension d'alimentation
Voir connexions d’alimentation et au sol

Altitude
Fonctionnement: ≤ 3000 m
À l'arrêt: ≤ 12,191 m

Catégorie d 'installation (surtension)
Ce produit est alimenté par une alimentation électrique conforme à l 'installation (surtension)
Catégorie II.

Installation (overvoltage) Category Definitions Définition de catégorie d 'installation(surtension)
La catégorie II d'installation (surtension) est un niveau de signal applicable aux terminaux de mesure

12

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manuald' équipement reliés au circuit source.Dans ces bornes, des mesures préventives sont prises pourlimiter la tension transitoire à un niveau inférieur correspondant.

La catégorie II d'installation (surtension) désigne le niveau local de distribution d 'énergie d' unéquipement conçu pour accéder à un circuit alternatif (alimentation alternative).
Degré de pollution
Un instruments peut être utilisé dans un environnement Pollution Degree II.
Note: Pollution Degree II signifie que le milieu de travail est sec et qu'il y a une pollution non
conductrice.Parfois, la condensation produit une conductivité temporaire.

IP Rating
IP20 (as defined in IEC 60529).

int.siglent.com

13

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Exigences de refroidissement
Cet instrument repose sur un refroidissement à air forcé avec des ventilateurs internes et desouvertures de ventilation. Des précautions doivent être prises pour éviter de restreindre le flux d'air
autour des ouvertures (trous de ventilateur) de chaque côté de la lunette. Pour assurer une
ventilation adéquate, il est nécessaire de laisser un espace minimum de 15 cm (6 pouces) sur lescôtés de l'instrument.

ATTENTION: Ne bloquez pas les trous de ventilation situés des deux côtésde la lunette.
ATTENTION: Ne laissez aucun corps étranger pénétrer dans la lunette parles trous de ventilation, etc.

Connexions d'alimentation et de terre
L'instrument fonctionne avec une alimentation CA monophasée de 100 à 240 Vrms (+/- 10%) à 50/60
Hz (+/- 5%), ou monophasée 100 - 120 Vrms (+/-10 %) Alimentation CA à 400 Hz (+/-5%).
Aucune sélection manuelle de la tension n'est requise car l'instrument s'adapte automatiquement àla tension de ligne.

Selon le type et le nombre d'options et d'accessoires (sondes, plug-in de port PC, etc.), l'instrument
peut consommer jusqu'à 193 W d'énergie.
Remarque: l'instrument s'adapte automatiquement à l'entrée de ligne CA dans les plages suivantes:

Plage de tension:

90 - 264 Vrms

90 - 132 Vrms

Gamme de fréquences:

47 - 63 Hz

380 - 420 Hz

L'instrument comprend un jeu de cordons mis à la terre contenant une fiche polarisée à trois bornes
moulée et un connecteur standard IEC320 (Type C13) pour établir la tension de ligne et la connexion
de mise à la terre de sécurité. La borne de mise à la terre de l'entrée CA est directement connectéeau châssis de l'instrument. Pour une protection adéquate contre les risques d'électrocution, la fiche
du cordon d'alimentation doit être insérée dans une prise secteur correspondante contenant uncontact de sécurité avec la terre. Utilisez uniquement le cordon d'alimentation spécifié pour cet
instrument et certifié pour le pays d'utilisation.

14

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Avertissement: risque de choc électrique!
Toute interruption du conducteur de terre de protection à l'intérieur ou à
l'extérieur de la portée ou la déconnexion de la borne de terre de sécurité
crée une situation dangereuse.
L'interruption intentionnelle est interdite.

La position de l'instruments doit permettre un accès facile à la prise. Pour éteindre complètement
l'instruments, débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de l'instrument de la prise secteur.

Le cordon d'alimentation doit être débranché de la prise secteur si la lunette ne doit pas être utilisée
pendant une période prolongée.

ATTENTION: les enveloppes extérieures des bornes du panneau avant sontconnectées au châssis de l'instrument et donc à la terre de sécurité.

Nettoyage
Nettoyez uniquement l'extérieur de l'instrument à l'aide d'un chiffon doux et humide. N'utilisez pas deproduits chimiques ou d'éléments abrasifs. Ne laissez en aucun cas l'humidité pénétrer dansl'instrument. Pour éviter les chocs électriques, débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de la prisesecteur avant de le nettoyer.

Avertissement: risque de choc électrique!
Aucune pièce réparable par l'opérateur à l'intérieur. Ne retirez pas les capots.
Confiez l'entretien à un personnel qualifié

Conditions anormales
Utilisez l'instrument uniquement aux fins spécifiées par le fabricant.
N'utilisez pas la lunette s'il y a des signes visibles de dommages ou si elle a été soumise à de fortes
contraintes de transport.

Si vous pensez que la protection de l'instruments a été altérée, débranchez le cordon d'alimentationet sécurisez l'instrument contre toute opération involontaire.

Une bonne utilisation de l'instrument nécessite la lecture et la compréhension de toutes les
instructions et étiquettes.

int.siglent.com

15

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Avertissement: Toute utilisation de l'instruments d'une manière non spécifiée
par le fabricant peut compromettre la protection de sécurité de l'instrument.
Cet instrument ne doit pas être directement connecté à des sujets humains ni
utilisé pour la surveillance des patients.

Conformité en matière de sécurité
La présente section présente les normes de sécurité applicables aux produits.

U.S. nationally recognized testing laboratory listing■ UL 61010-1:2012/R:2018-11. Prescriptions en matière de sécurité pour les appareils électriques
utilisés en laboratoire et de mesure - partie 1: prescriptions générales.
■ UL 61010-2-030:2018. Prescriptions de sécurité pour les appareils électriques de mesure, decontrôle et de laboratoire - partie 2 - 030: prescriptions spéciales pour les circuits d 'essai et demesure.

Canadian certification■ CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-1:2012/A1:2018-11. Prescriptions en matière de sécurité pour lesappareils électriques utilisés en laboratoire et de mesure - partie 1: prescriptions générales.
■ CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-2-030:2018. Prescriptions de sécurité pour les appareils électriquesde mesure, de contrôle et de laboratoire - partie 2 - 030: prescriptions spéciales pour les circuits d'essai et de mesure.

16

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual3

Quick Start

This chapter guides users to quickly get familiar with the appearance, panel and the user interface,
as well as announcements during the first use of the analyzer.

3.1

General Inspection

1.

Inspect the shipping container

Keep the damaged shipping container or cushioning material until the contents of the shipment havebeen completely checked and the instrument has passed both electrical and mechanical tests.

The consigner or carrier will be responsible for damages to the instrument resulting from shipment.
SIGLENT will not provide free maintenance or replacement.

2.

Inspect the instrument

If the instrument is found to be damaged, defective or fails in electrical or mechanical tests, pleasecontact SIGLENT.

3.

Check the accessories

Please check the accessories according to the packing list in the box. If the accessories areincomplete or damaged, please contact your SIGLENT sales representative.

int.siglent.com

17

SSA5000A Series User Manual

3.2
3.2.1

Preparing for Use
Appearance and Dimension

Adjust the supporting legs properly to use them as stands to tilt the analyzer upwards for stable
placement as well as easier operation and observation of the instrument display.

Unit:mmFigure 3-1 Front and lateral View

3.2.2

Connect to AC Power Supply

The spectrum analyzer accepts 100-240V, 50/60Hz or 100-120V 400Hz AC power supply. Please
use the provided power cord to connect the instrument to the power source as shown in the figure
below. Before powering on, make sure the analyzer is protected by a fuse.

Figure 3-2 Rear View

18

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

3.3

Front Panel

3

1

4
2
5
Figure 3-3 the Front Panel

Table 3-1 Front Panel Description
NO.

Name

Description

1

LCD Screen

12.1 inch multi-touch screen, resolution 1280*800

2Power Switch

Stand by status: Orange
Power on status: White
Short press: To Stand by status with current state saved
Long press: To Stand by status without current state saved

3

Function Keys

Function and control input

4

USB Host

The analyzer can serve as a “host” device to connect USB memory,
USB mouse and keyboard, SIGLENT USB-GPIB adaptor, etc

5

RF Input

2.92 mm male connector, compatable with 2.92mm/3.5mm/SMA
connector mechanicallyint.siglent.com

19

SSA5000A Series User Manual

3.4

Rear Panel

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10 11 12

13

Figure 3-4 Rear Panel

Table 3-2 Rear Panel
NO.

Name

Description

1

HandlePull up the handle vertically for easy carrying of the instrument.
When you do not need the handle, press it down.

2

Safety Lock HoleIf needed, you can use a security lock(purchased separately) to lockthe analyzer to a desired location.

3

GND Terminal

Connect the casing ground and the ground with the grounding
conductor.

4

LAN

Through this interface, the analyzer can be connected to your local
network (LAN) for remote control. Set the parameter in System
menu.

5

USB Device

Through this interface, the analyzer can be connected to PC for
remote control.

20

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

6

HDMI

Output the LCD screen display content of the analyzer and connect
it to the external monitor through HDMI cable for synchronous
display.

7

Audio

3.5 mm audio cable jack, which can be externally connected withheadphones or speakers to monitor the audio demodulation output
of modulated signals. Set the parameter in Meas Setup menu.

8

OCXO

The OCXO reference clock source with better temperature
coefficient and clock accuracy can be selected to obtain a morestable reference clock. This module is a factory installed option.

9

REF INThe [10 MHz IN] and [10 MHz OUT] connectors are usually used tobuild synchronization among multiple instruments.

10 MHzThe analyzer can use the internal or an external reference source.
Set the parameter in Input/Output menu
10

REF OUT
10 MHzThe [10 MHz IN] and [10 MHz OUT] connectors are usually used tobuild synchronization among multiple instruments.
When an internal reference source is used, the [10 MHz OUT]
connector can output a 10 MHz clock signal generated by the
analyzer. This signal can be used to synchronize other instruments.

11

TRIG OUT

Trigger output to indicate various working states inside the analyzer,
which is used to establish event synchronization among multiple
instruments.Set the parameter in Input/Output menu.

12

TRIG IN

In external trigger mode, the analyzer will update the trace scan
after the Trigger In connector receives an external trigger signal thatmeets the trigger input specifications. Set the parameter in Trigger
menu.

13

AC Power Supply

Before power on, please ensure that the ground wire of AC power
supply is well connected with the earth, and ensure that the
grounding wire of grounding terminal is well connected with theearth.
Please confirm that the fuse works normally before power on.

int.siglent.com

21

SSA5000A Series User Manual

3.5

User Interface

Figure 3-5 User Interface of spectrum analyzer mode

Table 3-3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode User Interface
No

Name

Description

1

SIGLENTSIGLENT logo2Mode/Measure

Indicate the current working mode and measurement functionof the analyzer, and click to switch, such as spectrum analysis
mode, real-time spectrum mode, etc.

3

Shortcut Menu

Shortcuts to common used measurement functions, such as
peak search, screen capture, file and other functions.

4

Instrument
Configuration

Indicate the main working states of trace, interface, sweep,
trigger, etc.

5

Measurement
ResultDisplay the signal measurement results of the analyzer invarious forms such as waveform, spectral line, cursor, table,
statistics, constellation diagram, etc

6

Sweep Parameter

Indicate and control the main sweep parameters, such as
frequency, resolution, scanning time, etc.

7

Menu

Complete the parameter setting of the analyzer.

22

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

8

Menu Switch

Control the opening and closing of the menu area. After
closing, a larger measurement result area can be displayed.

9Interface Status

Indicates and controls the connection status of LAN, USB
memory and other devices.

10

Date and Time

Indicates and controls the time and date.

3.6

Touch screen and mouse operation

The analyzer provides a 12.1 inch multi-touch screen and supports various gesture operations
including:

Press or click on the upper-right-corner of the screen to enter the main menu

Swipe up and down or left and right in the waveform area to change the X-axis center coordinate
or Y-axis reference level;Perform two-points scaling in the waveform area to change the X-axis span;Click on a screen parameter or menu for parameter selection or editing;Open and drag the marker;

Use auxiliary shortcuts to perform common operations.

You can turn the touch screen function on and off via

3.7

Touch .

Keyboard operation

The analyzer provides a 12.1 inch multi-touch screen and supports various gesture operations
including:

Press or click on the upper-right-corner of the screen to enter the main menu;

Swipe up and down or left and right in the waveform area to change the X-axis center coordinate
or Y-axis reference level;Perform two-points scaling in the waveform area to change the X-axis span;Click on a screen parameter or menu for parameter selection or editing;Open and drag the marker;

Use auxiliary shortcuts to perform common operations.

You can turn the touch screen function on and off via

3.8

Touch .

Using Built-in Help

The built-in help system provides information about every function key at the front panel and every
menu soft key.


Press

Help

int.siglent.com

and the embedded help would show up.

23

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Click on the items in the contents tree on the left to navigate to any topics interested.

Click the green back or forward arrow to go back or forward to the contents just read.



Click the close sign button in the top right corner or press the Esc front-panel key to quit the help
system.

3.9

Firmware Operation

3.9.1

Check System Information

Users can get the system information by press

Product Model, Serial and Host ID

Software Version and hardware Version



Option Information

3.9.2

System> “System” > “About”, including.

Load Option

Refer to the procedures below to activate the options you have purchased.
> “System” > “Load Option”;

1

Press

2

Enter the license key in the onscreen window. Press

SystemEnter

to confirm your input andterminate the license key input. Or;
3

Load the .lic file provided by pressing

File> “Load” from internal memory or USB stick.

The option will be enabled after rebooting.

3.9.3

Firmware Upgrade

Follow this procedure to update the instrument firmware:
1

Download the firmware package from an official SIGLENT website.

2

Extract and copy the .ADS file into the root directory of an USB stick.

3

Plug the USB stick into the USB Host connector. Press

System> “System” > “Update”; findthe .ADS file in USB stick.
4

Press the “Load”, the analyzer will perform the update process automatically.

The upgrade process will take several minutes. When the upgrade is completed, themachine will reboot.
Any interruption during the update process will result in update failure and systemdata loss. This is not covered under the warranty and the user will bear repair costs
and shipping.
Do not remove the USB storage device until the update is finished.

24

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

3.10 Remote Control
The analyzer supports communication with computers via USB, LAN, and GPIB-USB interfaces. By
using these interfaces, in combination with programming languages and/or NI-VISA software, users
can remotely control the analyzer based on a SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable
Instruments) compliant command set, LabView and IVI (Interchangeable Virtual Instrument), tointeroperate with other programmable instruments.
You can also remote monitor and control the analyzer in Web Browser or Easy Spectrum.
For more details, refer to the ‘Programming Guide’ or contact your nearest SIGLENT office.

3.11 Service and Support
SIGLENT warrants that the products that it manufactures and sells will be free from defects inmaterials and workmanship for a period of three years (accessories for a period of one year) from thedate of shipment from an authorized Siglent distributor.
If the product proves defective within the respective period, SIGLENT will provide repair or
replacement as described in the complete warranty statement. To arrange for service or obtain acopy of the complete warranty statement, please contact your nearest Siglent sales and service
office. Except as provided in this summary or the applicable warranty statement, SIGLENT makes nowarranty of any kind, express or implied, including without limitation the implied warranties ofmerchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. In no event shall SIGLENT be liable for indirect,
special or consequential damages.

int.siglent.com

25

SSA5000A Series User Manual

4

Mode & Measurement

The analyzer operates in multiple operating modes, each of which contains several measurements:Spectrum Analyzer Mode (GPSA):

Swept Spectrum Analyzer (Swept SA)Channel Power (CH Power)

Adjacent Channel Power Ratio (ACPR)



Occupied BW (OBW)

T-Power (T-Power)

Third Order Intercept (TOI)Spectrum Monitor (Spectrum Monitor)



Carrier Noise Ratio (CNR)Harmonic Analysis (Harmonic)

Real-Time Spectrum Analyzer Mode (RTSA):

Real Time Spectrum & PvT (Spectrum & PvT)

Modulation Analyzer Mode (MA):

Digital Modulation Analyzer (DMA)

Analog Modulation Analyzer (AMA)EMI Measurement Mode (EMI)

PULSE Measurement Mode（PULSE）



Phase Noise Measurement Mode（PN）



Noise Figure measurement Mode（NF）



Bluetooth Measurement Mode（BT）

26

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Figure 4-1 Mode/measurement selection

The analyzer supports the creation of multiple independent modes / measurements, but only one ofthem can be activated at the same time. At this time, other measurements enter the background.
Wait until the next activation to restore the state before switching
1.

The entry of the mode / measurement switching window also represents the currently runningmode / measurement

2.

Mode selection

3.

Measurement selection

4.

Operation options, including adding a measurement, replacing the selected measurement,
deleting the selected measurement and deleting all (created) measurements

5.

A list of measurements that have been created, with the currently active mode / measurement
highlighted

Command Format:INSTrument[:SELect]:INSTrument[:SELect]?

Instruction

Select the working mode of the spectrum analyzer.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

GPSA: Spectrum Analysis Mode
MA: Modulation Analysis
RTSA: Real-Time Spectrum Analysis
EMI:emi Measurement ModepulseX:Pulse Measurement Modepn: Phase Noise Measurement ModenfIG: Noise figure Measurement Mode
BT: Bluetooth Measurement Mode

int.siglent.com

27

SSA5000A Series User Manual

28

ReturnEnumeration

Example:INSTrument MA

Command Format:INSTrument:MEASure:INSTrument:MEASure?

Instruction

Get/Set the measurement mode.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

SA: Spectrum Analysis
ACPR: Adjacent Channel Power Ratio
CHPower: Channel Power
OBW: Occupy Bandwidth
TPOWer: Time-Domain Power
SPECtrogram: Spectrogram
TOI: Third-Order Intermodulation
HARMonics: Harmonic Analysis
CNR: Carrier-to-Noise Ratio

ReturnEnumeration: SA||ACPR|CHP|OBW|TPOW|SPEC|TOI|HARM|CNR

Example:INSTrument:MEASure ACPR

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5

Spectrum Analyzer Mode

The ‘Spectrum Analyzer’ mode is the default mode of the analyzer.

5.1

Frequency & Span

5.1.1

Frequency & Span

Set the frequency-related parameters and functions of the analyzer. The sweep will restart every time
the frequency parameters are modified.
The frequency range of a channel can be expressed by these parameters: Start Frequency, Center
Frequency, Stop Frequency and Span. If any of the parameters change, the others will be adjusted
automatically in order to ensure the coupling relationship among them:f center  (f start  fstop)/2
fspan  fstop  fstart, Wheref span is the span.

The LO will sweep from the Start Frequency to the Stop Frequency if the Span > 0, while the LO is
fixed at a constant frequency if Span = 0 ( Zero Span).
Span change, associated with BW and scan parameters.
After the frequency related parameters are changed, restart scanning \ measurement.
Last sweep sets the sweep width to the value before the last modification.
Zoom in sets the sweep width to half the current sweep width value.
Zoom out sets the sweep width to twice the current sweep width value.

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer?

Instruction

Sets the center frequency of the spectrum analyzer.
Gets the center frequency.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range

50 Hz~28 GHz
Zero Span: 0 ~ 28 GHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:FREQuency:CENTer 0.2 GHz

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt?

Instruction

Sets the start frequency of the spectrum analyzer.
Gets the start Frequency.

Parameter Range

0 Hz ~ 28 GHz
Zero Span: 0 ~ 28 GHz

Example:FREQuency:STARt 100 Hz

int.siglent.com

29

SSA5000A Series User Manual

30

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP?

Instruction

Sets the stop frequency of the spectrum analyzer.
Gets the stop frequency.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter
Range

100 Hz ~ 28 GHz
Zero Span: 0 ~ 28 GHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:FREQuency:STOP 1.0 GHz

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN?

Instruction

Sets the frequency span. Setting the span to 0 Hz puts the analyzer into zero span.
Gets span value.

NOTE

Channel Power Only: [:SENSe]:CHPower:REQuency:SPANOBW Only: [:SENSe]:OBWidth:REQuency:SPAN
ACPR Only: [:SENSe]:ACPower:REQuency:SPANTOI Only: [:SENSe]:TOI:REQuency:SPAN
CNR Only: [:SENSe]:CNR:REQuency:SPAN

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range

0 Hz, 100 Hz ~ 28GHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:FREQuency:SPAN 1 GHz

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:FULL

Instruction

Sets the frequency span to full scale.

Example:FREQuency:SPAN:FULL

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:ZERO

Instruction

Sets the frequency span to zero span.

Example:FREQuency:SPAN:ZERO

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:PREVious

Instruction

Sets the frequency span to the previous span setting.

Example:FREQuency:SPAN:PREVious

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:HALF

Instruction

Sets the frequency span to half of the current span setting.

Example:FREQuency:SPAN:HALF

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:DOUBle

Instruction

Sets the frequency span to double the current span setting.

Example:FREQuency:SPAN:DOUBle

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.1.2

X Axis Scale

Set the scale type of X-axis to Linear (Lin) or Logarithmic (Log) scale.
In Log scale type, the frequency scale of X-axis is displayed in the logarithmic form.

Command Format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:SPACing:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:SPACing?

Instruction

Sets the The x type
Gets the The x type

Parameter Typeenumeration

Return

LOG/LIN

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X:SPACing LOG:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X:SPACing?

5.1.3

Freq Offset

Set the frequency offset value to illustrate the frequency conversion between the measured device
and the input of the spectrum analyzer.
This parameter does not affect any hardware settings of the spectrum analyzer, but onlychanges the display values of center frequency, start frequency and stop frequency.

To eliminate the frequency offset value, the frequency offset value can be set to 0 Hz.

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:OFFSet[:SENSe]:FREQuency:OFFSet?

Instruction

Sets the frequency offset of the spectrum analyzer.
Gets the frequency offset.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range-100 GHz ~ 100 GHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:FREQuency:OFFSet 1 GHz

5.1.4

Freq Step

Setting the value of Freq Step will change the direction key step of center frequency, start frequency,
stop frequency and frequency offset.


At a fixed step change the value of the center frequency can reach the purpose of switchingmeasurement channels rapidly and continuously.



There are two kinds of frequency step modes: Auto and Manual. In Auto mode, the Freq step is
1/10 of the span in Non-zero span or equals the RBW while in Zero Span. In Manual mode, you
can set the step using the numeric keys.

Command Format

int.siglent.com[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement][:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement]?

31

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Instruction

Specifies the center frequency step size.
Gets the center frequency step.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range

1 Hz ~ 28 GHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP 2 MHz

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO?

Instruction

Specifies whether the step size is set automatically based on the span.
Gets center frequency step mode.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF

5.1.5

Signal Track

Turn on or off the signal tracking function. It is used to track the signal whose frequency is unstable
and the instantaneous change of the amplitude is less than 3 dB. By marking cursor 1 on themeasured signal, the change of the measured signal can be tracked and measured all the time.
The signal tracking process is shown in the following figure:

Figure 5-1 Signal Tracking Flow32

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User ManualWhen Marker1 is on, turn on signal tracking, a point whose amplitude does not change morethan 3 dB near Marker1 will be searched and marked, and the frequency at that point will be set
to center frequency.

When Maker1 is off, turn on signal tracking, Marker1 will be activated, and a peak search will be
performed, and then the peak frequency will be set to center frequency.



Signal tracking function is only available in sweep analysis. Signal tracking function is turned off
in following cases:

Zero Span modeTraces are not updated, including single sweep mode or View mode.

Cont Peak function turned onOther non-Swept SA measurement modes

Command Format:CALCulate:MARKer:TRCKing[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1:CALCulate:MARKer:TRCKing[:STATe]?

Instruction

Sets the signal track state
Gets the signal track stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:TRCKing ON

5.1.6

Auto Tune

Automatically search the signal in the full frequency band and adjust the frequency and amplitude
parameters to the best state. One key to perform signal search and automatic parameter setting.
When this function is enabled, Auto Tune is displayed in the status bar of the screen. After the
automatic search is complete, Auto Tune disappears.



Reference level, scale size, input attenuation and other parameters may be modified during
automatic search.

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:TUNE:IMMediate

Instruction

Perform auto tune

Parameter TypeNo parameter

Parameter Range

No parameter

ReturnNo returnExample:FREQuency:TUNE:IMMediate

int.siglent.com

33

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.2

BW

The bandwidth menu contains the RBW (Resolution Bandwidth), VBW (Video Bandwidth), averagetype and filter type. Filter type includes the EMI filter type that enables EMI measurement controls.

5.2.1

Resolution Bandwidth

Set the resolution bandwidth in order to distinguish between signals which have frequency
components that are near one another.


Reducing the RBW will increase the frequency resolution, but will also increase the sweep time
dramatically (Sweep Time is affected by a combination of RBW and VBW when the analyzer isin Auto mode).

Generally, the frequency resolution ability is affected by RBW, RBW Filter shape factor, LO
Phase noise, and LO Residual FM.



RBW varies with the span (non-zero span) in Auto RBW mode.



Under EMI filter, RBW can only be set to 200 Hz, 9 kHz, 120 kHz and 1 MHz with a 6dB shapefactor.

34

Command Format[:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution]?

Instruction

Specifies the resolution bandwidth. For numeric entries, all RBW types choose thenearest (arithmetically, on a linear scale, rounding up) available RBW to the value
entered.
Gets the resolution bandwidth.

NOTE[:SENSe]:CHPower:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:OBWidth:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:ACPower:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:TOI:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:HARMonics:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:TPOWer:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:SPECtrogram:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:CNR:BANDwidth[:RESolution]

Parameter Type

Discrete

Parameter Range

1Hz , 3Hz , 10 Hz , 30 Hz , 100 Hz , 300 Hz , 1 kHz , 3 kHz , 10 kHz , 30 kHz ,100 kHz , 300 kHz , 1 MHz , 3 MHz , 10 MHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:BWIDth 1 kHz

Command Format[:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO?

Instruction

Turn on/off auto resolution bandwidth state.
Gets the resolution bandwidth auto state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:BWID:AUTO On

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.2.2Video Bandwidth

Set the video bandwidth in order to filter out the noise outside the video band.


Reducing the VBW will smooth the trace and helps to highlight small signals from noise, but it
will also increase the sweep time (Sweep Time is affected by a combination of RBW and VBWwhen it is in Auto mode).



VBW varies with RBW when it is in Auto mode. While in Manual mode, VBW is not affected by
RBW.

Command Format[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo?

Instruction

Specifies the video bandwidth.
Gets the video bandwidth.
[:SENSe]:OBWidth:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:ACPower:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:TOI:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:HARMonics:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:TPOWer:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:SPECtrogram:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:CNR:BANDwidth[:RESolution]

NOTE

Parameter Type

Discrete

Parameter Range

1Hz , 3Hz , 10 Hz , 30 Hz , 100 Hz , 300 Hz , 1 kHz , 3 kHz , 10 kHz , 30 kHz ,100 kHz , 300 kHz , 1 MHz , 3 MHz , 10 MHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:BWIDth:VIDeo 10 kHz

Command Format[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO?

Instruction

This command turns on/off auto video bandwidth state.
Gets the video bandwidth state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

ExampleBWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO OFF

5.2.3

V/R Ratio

Set the ratio of VBW to RBW. This value is different while measuring different kinds of signals:
Sine/Continuous Wave (CW) signals: Use 1 to 3 (for faster sweeps)



Pulsed/transient signals: Use 10 (to reduce the influence on the amplitude of transient signals)



Noise signals: Generally use 0.1 (to obtain the average of noises)

Command Format

int.siglent.com[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio?

35

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Instruction

Specifies the ratio of the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth.
Gets the ratio of the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth.

Parameter Type

Discrete, Float

Parameter Range

0.001, 0.003, 0.01, 0.03, 0.1, 0.3, 1.0, 3.0, 10.0, 30.0, 100.0, 300.0, 1000.0

Return

Float

Example:BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio 30

5.2.4

Filter TypeEMI filter according to CISPR16 standard. Different from ordinary RBW filter, EMI filter support -6dB
bandwidth.
Support bandwidth 200Hz, 9kHz, 120kHz, 1MHz.

36

Command Format[:SENSe]:FILTer:TYPE EMI|GAUSS[:SENSe]:FILTer:TYPE?

Instruction

Sets filter type
Gets filter type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

EMI|GAUSS

ReturnEnumeration

Example:FILTer:TYPE EMI

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.3

Sweep

5.3.1

Sweep Type

There are two sweep types, Swept and FFT. Swept can only support a minimum of 3kHz RBW, andconversely FFT can only support a maximum of 10kHz RBW.
5.3.1.1

Auto Sweep Type

When automatic sweep type is enabled, the analyzer automatically switches sweep types based on
RBW and sweep type rules.

Command Format[:SENSe]:SWEep:MODE FFT|SWEep[:SENSe]:SWEep:MODE?

Instruction

Sets sweep mode.
Gets sweep mode.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

FFT|SWEep

ReturnEnumeration

Example:SWEep:MODE SWEep

Command Format[:SENSe]:SWEep:MODE AUTO|FFT|SWEep[:SENSe]:SWEep:MODE?

Instruction

Sets sweep mode auto state.
Gets sweep mode auto state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:SWEep:MODE AUTO 1

5.3.2

Sweep Type Rules

Speed first. This option tells the analyzer to select the faster one based on the sweep time when
automatically switching the sweep type.
The dynamic range is preferred. This selection tells the analyzer to automatically switch the sweep
type based on the dynamic range, but if the dynamic range is very close between sweep and FFT,
select the faster one.

Command Format[:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes[:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes?

Instruction

Sets / get suto sweep type rules

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

RANge|SPEed

ReturnRANge|SPEed

Example:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes SPEed

int.siglent.com

37

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.3.3

Sweep Points

The number of sweep points represents the number of sweep and trace displayed points(201~10001).
More sweep points will improve the resolution of waveform, but also affect the minimum sweep time,and increase the time of data processing and remote access to data, and reduce the response rate.
Under the influence of the scheme, when the sweep type is FFT, the sweep points cannot remain
effective all the time, and the actual output points may be less than the sweep points in some states.

Command Format[:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts[:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts?

Instruction

Sets sweep points.
Gets sweep points.

Parameter TypeintegerParameter Range

201-10001

Example:SWEep:POINts 2001
:SWEep:POINts?

5.3.4

Sweep Time & Sweep Time Rules

When the sweep type is normal swept, you can change the sweep time (SWT) to control the timerequired to sweep the current frequency range. The sweep time supports automatic mode andmanual mode:
AutoSWT refers to the appropriate sweep time of the analyzer according to the relevant configurationline operation, which satisfies the following calculation logic:

When Span>0:

AutoSWT  max[ minSWT, k * (fspan / RBW / VBW), Points * ResTimeper Point];k  3、
12;
minSWT  1 ms
When Span=0:

AutoSWT  max[ minSWT ，Points * ResTimeper Point];
minSWT  1 us

Where velocity factor K =3 or 12, corresponding to two supported Sweep Time Rules: Speed or
Accuracy; ResTimeper Point Represents the DSP response time of a sweep point, it is inversely
correlated with RBW value.

Users can also manually set the sweep time based on actual requirements. But it needs to be38

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

satisfied:
When Span>0:1ms  SWT  4ks

When Span=0:

1us  SWT  6ks

In general, the manual sweep time should not be longer than the automatic sweep time in thiscondition. Otherwise, unforeseeable anomalies may be caused and may be marked (UNCAL).
It should be pointed out in particular that under the influence of the scheme, when the sweep type is
FFT, the sweep time can only be calculated by the instrument itself, and any modification related tothe sweep time cannot take effect.

Command Format[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME?

Instruction

Specifies the time in which the instrument sweeps the display. A span value of 0 Hz
causes the analyzer to enter zero span mode. In zero span the X-axis represents
time rather than frequency.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: ks, s, ms, us

Parameter Range

1us ~ 6000s

ReturnFloat, unit: s

Example:SWEep:TIME 5s

Command Format[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO?

Instruction

This command turns on/off auto sweep time state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON

Command Format[:SENSe]:SWEep:SPEed NORMal|ACCUracy[:SENSe]:SWEep:SPEed?

Instruction

Toggles the sweep speed between normal and accuracy.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

ACCUracy|NORMal

Example:SWEep: SPEed NORMal

5.3.5

Sweep Time Estimate

The estimated sweep time represents the time actually consumed by each sweep, including data
sampling time (sweep time) and related scheduling time.
The estimated sweep time cannot be modified.

int.siglent.com

39

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.3.6

Sweep/Measure

Sweep/Measure
Single/Continue controls analyzer to perform single or continuous sweep/measure.

RestartRestart the current sweep or measure. In particular, if the sweep parameters are modified, a restart
will be performed.

40

Command format:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF|ON|0|1:INITiate:CONTinuous?

Instructions

Sets continuous sweep mode on-off.
Gets continuous sweep mode state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF

Command Format:INITiate[:IMMediate]

Instruction

Restarts the current sweep.

Example:INITiate:IMMediate

Command Format:INITiate:RESTart

Instruction

Restarts the current sweep.

Example:INITiate:RESTart

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.4

Amplitude

Set the amplitude parameters of the analyzer. Through modifying these parameters, signals undermeasurement can be displayed in a proper mode for easier observation and minimum error. Anychange of Ref Level, Attenuator Value, Preamp mode and Ref Offset will restart sweep.

5.4.1

Ref Level

Set the maximum power or voltage that can be currently displayed in the trace window. The value isdisplayed at the upper left corner of the screen grid.
The maximum reference (Ref) level available is affected by the maximum mixing level; input
attenuation is adjusted under a constant maximum mixing level in order to fulfill the following
condition:

Note: the maximum reference level of different machine models may be different, please refer to thedata manual specifically.

Command Format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel?

Instruction

This command sets the reference level for the Y-axis.
Gets reference level.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: dBm, dBmV, dBuV, dBuA, V, W

Parameter Range

Unit is dBm: -170 dBm ~ 23 dBm;
Unit is dBmV: -123.01 dBmV ~ 69.99 dBmV;
Unit is dBuV: -63.01 dBuV ~ 129.99 dBuV;
Unit is dBuA: -96.99 dBuA ~ 96.01 dBuA;
Unit is Volts: 707.11pV ~ 3.16 V;
Unit is Watts: 0W ~ 199.53m W

ReturnFloat, unit: dBm

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:RLEVel 20 DBM

5.4.2

Attenuator

Set the value for the internal attenuator of the RF input. So that the large signal can be low distortionand the small signal can pass through the mixer with low noise.

Input attenuation can be set up to auto or manual mode.
Auto mode: the attenuation value is automatically adjusted according to the state of preamplifier
and the current reference level.

The maximum input attenuation can be set to 50dB, resolution: 2dB. When the set parameters
do not meet the above formula, you can adjust the reference level.

int.siglent.com

41

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation?

Instructions

Sets/gets the attenuation value

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

0 dB ~ 50 dB (Even gears only)

ReturnInteger, unit dB

Example:POWer:ATTenuation 10

Command format[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO?

Instructions

Sets/gets the auto attenuation value switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO ON

5.4.3

RF Preamp

Control the state of the internal preamplifier (PA) located in the RF input signal path. When thesignal-under-measurement is small, turning on the preamplifier can reduce the displayed noise level
and aid distinguishing small signals from the noise.
The corresponding icon “PA” will appear at the left side of the screen when the preamplifier is turnedon.

Command format[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe]?

Instructions

Sets/gets the preset amplifier inside the switch spectrometer

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:POWer:GAIN ON

5.4.4

Y Axis Unit

Sets the display unit of magnitude.

42

Command format:UNIT:POWer DBM|DBMV|DBUV|V|W:UNIT:POWer?

Instructions

Sets/gets the display unit of magnitude

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

DBM|DBMV|DBUV|DBUA|V|W

ReturnEnumeration: DBM|DBMV|DBUV|V|W

Example:UNIT:POWer DBMV

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.4.5

Y Axis Scale TypeSet the scale type of the Y-axis to Lin or Log. The default is Log.
In Lin mode, the vertical Scale value cannot be changed. The Display area is set for reference
level of 0%.



In Log scale type, the Y-axis denotes the logarithmic coordinate. The value shown at the top of
the grid is the reference level and each grid represent the scale value. The unit of Y-axis willautomatically switch to the default unit (dBm) in Log scale type when the scale type is changed
from Lin to Log.

In Lin scale type, the Y-axis denotes the liner coordinate; the values shown at the top of the gridand the bottom of the grid are the reference level and 0 V. The scale setting function is invalid.
The unit of Y-axis will automatically switch to the default unit (Volts) in Lin scale type when thescale type is charged from Log to Lin.

The scale type does not affect the setting of Y-axis unit.

Set the unit of the Y-axis to dBm , dBmV , dBuV , dBuA , Volts (RMS) or Watts. Default is dBm.
The conversion relationships between units are as follows.

Where, R denotes the reference impedance. The default value is 50Ω and can be adjusted bypressing “Correction > RF input”. The “75 Ω” impedance is just a numeric value, not a real
impedance. Setting the RF input to 75 Ω will not change the actual input impedance. A 75 Ω
feed-through adapter is required to match 75 Ω circuits to the 50 Ω input of the analyzer.

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision?

Instructions

Sets/gets the scale on which trace logarithms are displayed

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

0.1 dB ~ 20 dB

ReturnFloat, unit dB

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:PDIVision 10 dB

int.siglent.com

43

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing LINear|LOGarithmic:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the scale display type

Parameter Type

Enumeration: LINear |LOGarithmic

ReturnEnumeration: LIN|LOG

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SPACing LINear

5.4.6

Ref Offset

Assign an offset to the reference level to compensate for gains or losses generated between thedevice under measurement and the analyzer.
The change of this value changes both the reference level readout and the amplitude readout of themarker; but does not impact the position of traces on the screen.

44

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:RLEVel:OFFSet:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:RLEVel:OFFSet?

Instructions

Sets/gets the frequency offset

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-100 dB~100 dB

ReturnFloat, unitdB

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:RLEVel:OFFSet 2

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.5

Trigger

The analyzer provides a variety of trigger functions, users can choose from the trigger menu.

5.5.1

Trigger Source

The analyzer provides a variety of trigger sources to suit different trigger requirements.
Free Run
Free trigger is the default mode of the analyzer, in which the spectrum analyzer sweeps circularly
and continuously.

Video
When the user wants to capture an instantaneous signal that appears for a very short time, the video
trigger mode can be adopted . In this working mode, only when the rising edge or falling edge of asignal touches the Trigger Level, the signal will be triggered and displayed on the screen.

External
External trigger provides users with richer trigger functions. If users want to realize the periodic
trigger and delay trigger spectrum analyzer, they can choose the external trigger mode. In this mode,
it is triggered by the rising or falling edge of the external input signal. The square wave signal with acertain frequencycan be periodically triggered, and the delay time can be adjusted by setting the
Trigger Delay option.

Periodic
When Periodic is selected, the analyzer uses the built-in period timer signal as the trigger. The trigger
event is set by the periodic timer parameter, which is modified by offset and periodic synchronization
Src.
You can synchronize periodic signals with external events (using periodic synchronization Src) to getcloser to a reliable trigger signal.
If the synchronization source is not selected (off state), the internal timer will not synchronize with any
external timed events.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce?

Instructions

sets the trigger source.
gets the trigger source.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range"IMMediate ", "VIDeo ", "EXTernal ","FRAMe"

Return"IMM", "VID", "EXT" ,"FRAMe"

Example:TRIGger:SOURce VID

int.siglent.com

45

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.5.2

Trigger Level

Sets the amplitude level for the video trigger (absolute level only supported). When the video signal
crosses the voltage level with the selected slope, it is triggered.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]: {type}:LEVel:TRIGger[:SEQuence]: {type}:LEVel?

Instructions

sets the trigger level.
gets the trigger level.
{type}: "VIDeo", "EXTernal"

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-300 dBm ~50 dBm

Return

Float

Example:TRIGger:VIDeo:LEVel -20

5.5.3

Trigger Slope

Set the trigger polarity for external trigger, video trigger. The options are rising edge trigger and fallingedge trigger.
The same trigger source uses the same trigger edge for both gating and triggering.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]: {type}:SLOPe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]: {type}:SLOPe?

Instructions

sets the trigger edge.
gets the trigger edge.
{type}: " VIDeo ", " EXTernal "Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range"POS", "NEG"

Return"POS", "NEG"

Example:TRIGger: EXTernal:SLOPe:TRIGger: VIDeo:SLOPe?

5.5.4

Trigger Delay

When scanning is at zero span, negative delay can be set . The time range of negative delay isrelated to the number of sweep points and sweep time:
Maximum negative delay time = [ 496M / ( sweep points * 64 ) - 5] * sweep time
Maximum positive delay time =500ms

46

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay?

Instructions

sets the trigger delay
gets the trigger delay{type}:" VIDeo ", " EXTernal " ,"FRAMe"

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Parameter Type

Float

Return

Float

Example:TRIGger:EXTernal:DELay 5e-3
:TRIGger:FRAMe:DELay?

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay:STATe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay:STATe?

Instructions

sets the trigger delay state.
gets the trigger delay state.
{type}:" VIDeo ", " EXTernal " ,"FRAMe"

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:TRIGger:EXTernal: DELay:STATe 1

5.5.5

Zero Span Trigger Delay Compensation (external trigger only)

In normal cases, after the trigger is generated, the data is displayed and the data is triggered at thesame time. However, the processing time of the trigger path and the data path is different. As a result,the data displayed at the trigger time is the previous data. This does not affect the integrity of the data
and does not cause data loss at the trigger point. However, in some cases, it is necessary to display
the zero point of screen coordinate as the input signal information of trigger point, so the function ofzero span delay compensation is needed.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal:DELay:COMPensation OFF|ON|0|1:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal:DELay:COMPensation?

Instructions

Enable /disable the external trigger zero sweep delay compensation

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:TRIGger:EXTernal:DELay:COMPensation OFF

5.5.6

Period (periodic trigger only)

Set the trigger period. For gating and triggering, the same trigger source uses the same trigger cycle.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:PERiod:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:PERiod?

Instructions

Set/Query Period Trigger period

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

100ns~10s

Return

Float

Example:TRIGger:FRAMe:PERiod 1s

int.siglent.com

47

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.5.7

Offset Time

Adjust the cumulative offset between the periodic trigger clock and trigger events. The periodic
trigger clock cannot be viewed on the software, only the trigger event can be seen. Therefore, inorder to adjust the trigger event time, only the offset between the periodic triggering clock and thetriggering event can be adjusted. However, the absolute value of the internal offset is unknown, andeach modification of the offset is cumulative on the previous basis.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet?

Instructions

Set/Query Period Trigger period offset

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

0s~10sReturn

Float

Example:TRIGger:FRAMe:OFFSet 1s

5.5.8

Reset Time Offset Display

Reset the display of cycle trigger time offset.

48

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet:DISPlay:RESet

Instructions

Reset Period trigger offset return to zero

Example:TRIGger:FRAMe:OFFSet:DISPlay:RESet

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.5.9

Sync Source (periodic trigger only)

Figure 5-2 Trigger of synchronization source

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:SYNC:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:SYNC?

Instructions

Set/Query the type of periodic synchronization

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range"OFF", "EXT"

Return"OFF", "EXT"Example:TRIGger:FRAMe:SYNC EXT

5.5.10Gate Source

Select a gate source for gate measurement. The optional sources are external source and periodic
source.

External
Set the trigger source of the gate to be an external source. Similar to trigger, when configuringexternal sources, you can choose whether to trigger on the rising edge or the falling edge, andconfigure zero span delay compensation. The configuration of the gating source affects theconfiguration of the trigger source.

Periodint.siglent.com

49

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Set the trigger source of the gate to a periodic source. Similar to trigger, you can configure trigger
period, trigger offset, and trigger period synchronization sources when configuring periodic sources.
The configuration of the gating source affects the configuration of the trigger source.

Command format[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:SOURce[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:SOURce?

Instructions

Set or query the gate source type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range" EXTernal ","FRAMe"

Return"EXT","FRAMe"

Example:SWEep:EGATe:SOURce EXT

5.5.11Gate

The gate is to separate the spectrum information of some signals that occupy the same part in thefrequency domain but are separated from each other in the time domain, such as time divisionmultiple access signals.
5.5.11.1

Gate On

Turn on or off the gate function. When this function is enabled, the gate settings view is closed

Command format[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe[:STATe][:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe[:STATe]?

Instructions

Set or query the gate switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

Example:SWEep:EGATe 1

5.5.11.2

Gate Method

Configure the gate method.
LO gate: In this gate mode, the sweep does not start immediately, but detects the trigger of thegate source first. After the trigger of the gate source, the gate signal is determined according to
the gate delay and gate width.
When the gate signal is high, the sweep begins. When the gate signal is low, sweep stops.
When the next gate trigger occurs, continue as before until the specified bandwidth has been
swept.
In zero span mode, data is collected only when the gate is open, so the setting of the gate willaffect the actual sweep time, even though there is no actual sweep process.



FFT gate: In this gate mode, the sweep does not start immediately, but detects the trigger of the50

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

gating source first. After the trigger of the gate source, the gate signal is determined according to
the gate delay and gate width.
When the gate signal is high, sweep starts, data is collected and FFT transformation is carriedout. Since the data processed by FFT needs to be continuous, the gate can be low only after
FFT transformation is completed, which is also why the gate length of FFT is a fixed value.
The gate length of FFT needs to be larger than the data length required to complete FFT. WhenFFT completes a spectrum calculation, the gate will be lower. Then wait for the generation of thenext gate trigger and repeat the previous action until the specified bandwidth is swept. FFT gate
is unavailable in zero span mode.
Video gate: In this gate mode, after entering the sweep mode, it starts immediately and detects
the trigger of the gate source at the same time. After the trigger of the gate source, the gate
signal is determined according to the gate delay and the gate width.
When the gate signal is low, the output data is a constant value; when the gate signal is high, thespectrum swept at this time is output. The video trigger does not affect the sweep process, butdisplays the spectrum of the gate signal at the high moment, and a fixed value at othermoments.
With this gate mode, it is usually necessary to set the sweep time to a long time so that the gate
signal appears at least once in each display point, thus ensuring that the detector can obtain thereal data in the corresponding time interval when the detect mode is peak detect.

Command format[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:METHod[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:METHod?

Instructions

Set/Query the gate method

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range"OFF","LO","VIDeo","FFT"Return"OFF","LO","VIDeo","FFT"Example:SWEep:EGATe:METHod FFT

5.5.11.3

Gate Length

Set the gate length. This parameter cannot be changed when FFT gate.
The relationship between RBW and gate length in FFT gate mode

int.siglent.com

RBW

gate length (us)1Hz24980643Hz

82836810Hz

27234851

SSA5000A Series User Manual

30Hz

86968

100Hz

27807

300Hz

10323

1000Hz5447

3000Hz2333

10000Hz

1117

Command format[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:LENGth[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:LENGth?

Instructions

Set/Query the gate length

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

2.106us~5s

Return

Float

Example:SWEep:EGATe:LENGth 1s

5.5.11.4

Gate Delay

Configure the delay between gate trigger and gate on.

Command format[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:DELay[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:DELay?

Instructions

Set or query the gate delay

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

Swept: 8.906us~25s
Zero span: 1.894us~25s

Return

Float

ExampleSWEep:EGATe:DELay 0.005s

5.5.11.5

Gate View

When Turn on this view:Disable the gate on/off and the gate function.

To enter the zero span mode, set different Gate View Sweep Time based on different gate
methods.When you close the gate view, the sweep span and sweep time before the gate view isenabled are restored.

Gate View Sweep Time
Controls the sweep time in the gate view window. When selecting different gate methods, theinstrument will automatically configure different sweep time.

52

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Gate View Start Time
Set the start time on the left of the gate view, that is, set a delay.

Command format[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:VIEW[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:VIEW?

Instructions

Set or query the gate view switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

Example:SWEep:EGATe:VIEW 1

Command format[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:VIEW:STARt[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:VIEW:STARt?

Instructions

Set/Query the gate View start time

Parameter Type

Float

Return

Float

Example:SWEep:EGATe:VIEW:STARt 1s

Command format[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:TIME[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:TIME?

Instructions

Set/Query the gate View time

Parameter Type

Float

Return

Float

Example[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:TIME 1s

int.siglent.com

53

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.6

Trace

Figure 5-3 trace selectThe sweep signal is displayed as a trace on the screen.

Command format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6 [:DATA]?

Instructions

Get trace data

ReturnStringExample:TRACe:DATA?

Command format:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA]ASCii|REAL32| REAL:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA]?

Instructions

Sets/gets the format of trace data read

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

ASCii
REAL32 Floating 32-bit
REAL Floating 64-bit

ReturnEnumeration: ASCii|REAL| REAL32

Example:FORMat ASCii

5.6.1

Select Trace

The analyzer allows for up to four traces to be displayed at the same time. Each trace has its own
color (Trace A -- Yellow, Trace B -- Purple, Trace C -- Light blue and Trace D -- Green). All traces canbe set parameter independently. As a default, analyzer will choose Trace A and set the type of the
trace as Clear Write.

54

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format

TRACe:SELEct
TRACe:SELEct?

Instructions

Sets/gets the current trace

Parameter Type

EnumerationTRACE1-6

ReturnEnumeration: TRACE1-6

ExampleTRACe:SELEct TRACE3

5.6.2

Trace TypeSet the type of the current trace or disable it. The system calculates the sampled data using a
specific operation method according to the trace type selected and displays the result. Trace types
include Clear Write, Max Hold, Min Hold, View, Average and Blank. The corresponding icon of the
trace type will be displayed in the status bar at the left of the screen, as shown in the figure below.

Clear Write
Erases any data previously stored in the selected trace, and display the data sampled in real-time ofeach point on the trace.
Max Hold
Retain the maximum level for each point of the selected trace. Update the data if a new maximum
level is detected in successive sweeps. Max Hold is very effective when measuring events that may
take successive scans to measure accurately. Some common applications include FM Deviation, AM
NRSC, and frequency hopping or drift.

Min Hold
Display the minimum value from multiple sweeps for each point of the trace and update the data if a
new minimum is generated in successive sweeps.
Average
Set the averages times of the selected trace.
More averages can reduce the noise and the influence of other random signals; thus highlighting thestable signal characteristics. The larger the averages times is, the smoother the trace will be.
Enabling averaging will take more time to collect the full spectral information because the analyzer
needs to sweep the set average count. The displayed data is averaged in a first-in-first-out fashion.

Command format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE WRITe|MAXHold|MINHold| AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE?

Instructions

Sets/gets the display type of trace

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

WRITe: Trace is in normal mode. Update data
MAXHold: Displays the maximum value of traces

int.siglent.com

55

SSA5000A Series User Manual
MINHold: Displays the minimum value of trace
AVERage: Displays the average value of trace
ReturnEnumeration: WRITE|MAXH|MINH| AVER

Example:TRAC1:TYPE MINH

5.6.3

Trace State

There are four trace states: active, view, blank, and background. Different trace states indicate therefresh and display states of traces:
ActiveRefreshed and displayed trace data.

View
The trace data will not be refreshed, and the current latest trace will be displayed in a fixed frame.

Blank
Trace data is no longer refreshed or displayed

Background
Refreshed trace data but no display.

Command format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DISPlay[:STATe]:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DISPlay[:STATe]?

Instructions

Sets/gets the display status of the trace

Parameter Type

Enumeration: ACTI|VIEW|BLAN| BACKParameter Range

ACTIve: Trace is in normal mode. Update data
VIEW: Stops updating trace to display current trace data
BLANk: Clear trace data
BACKground: Set as background

ReturnEnumeration: ACTI|VIEW|BLAN| BACKExample:TRACe2:DISPlay BLANK:TRACe2:DISPlay?

5.6.4

Detect

The analyzer displays the sweep signal on the screen in the form of a trace. For each trace point, theanalyzer always captures all the data within a specific time interval and processes (Peak, Average,etc.) the data using the detector currently selected, then it displays the processed data (a single data
point) on the screen.
Select an appropriate detector type according to the actual application in order to ensure theaccuracy of the measurement.

56

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

The available types are Pos Peak, Neg Peak, Sample, Normal, Average and Quasi Peak. The
default is Pos peak.

Positive PeakFor each trace point, Positive Peak detector displays the maximum value of data sampled within thecorresponding time interval.

Negative PeakFor each trace point, Negative Peak detector displays the minimum value of data sampled within thecorresponding time interval.

SampleFor each trace point, Sample detector displays the transient level corresponding to the central time
point of the corresponding time interval. This detector type is applicable to noise or noise-like signal.

NormalNormal detector (also called ROSENFELL Detector) displays the maximum value and the minimum
value of the sample data segment in turn: Odd-numbered data points display the maximum value
and even-numbered data points display the minimum value. In this way, the amplitude variation
range of the signal is clearly shown.

Average
For each trace point, Average detector displays the average value of data sampled within thecorresponding time interval.

Command format[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6[:FUNCtion][:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6[:FUNCtion]?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the trace detection type

Parameter Type

Enumeration NEG|POS|SAMP|AVER|NORMAL

Parameter Range

NORMAL: standard
NEGative: Negative peak
POSitive: positive peak
SAMPle: The sampling
AVERage: average

ReturnEnumeration: NEG|POS|SAMP|AVER|NORMAL

Example:DETector:TRAC1 AVERage

Command format[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AUTO 0|1[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AUTO?
[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe:AUTO:ALL

Instructions

Set/get trace automatic detection switch

Parameter Type

Booleanint.siglent.com

57

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Parameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

Example:DETector:TRACe3:AUTO 1:DETector:TRACe:AUTO:ALL

5.6.5

Math

Set the computational method of the math trace.
Output Z
The Math result is denoted by the Z variable and can be displayed by trace.

Input X, Y
Input X, Y can be applied to trace.

Calculation TypeThe analyzer provides the calculation types as shown below:
Power Diff : X-Y+Offset→ZPower Sum : X+Y+Offset→Z
Log Offset : X+ Offset→Z
Log Diff : X-Y-Ref→Z
Offset value

58

Command format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MATH:X:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6MATH:X?

Instructions

Sets/gets the x-trace of the variable

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

TRACE1-6

ReturnEnumeration

Example:TRACe3:MATH:X 5

Command format:TRACe:MATH:Y [1]|2|3|4|5|6:TRACe:MATH:Y?

Instructions

Set the variable Y trace
Get the variable y-trace

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

TRACE1-6

ReturnEnumeration

Example:TRACe1:MATH:Y 3

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format:CALCulate[:SELected]:MATH:FUNCtion:CALCulate[:SELected]:MATH:FUNCtion?

Instructions

Sets/gets the trace calculation type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

OFF
PDIF: Power subtracting
PSUM: Power up
LOFF: Logarithmic deviation
LDIF: Logarithmic subtraction

ReturnEnumeration

Example:CALCulate:MATH:FUNCtion PDIF

Command format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MATH:OFFSet:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MATH:OFFSet?

Instructions

Set the LOG OFFSET constant
Ask for the LOG OFFSET constantParameter Type

IntegerParameter Range-100dB-100dB

Return-100dB-100dB

Example:TRACe1:MATH:OFFSet -10:TRACe3:MATH:OFFSet?

Command format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MATH:REFerence:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MATH:REFerence?

Instructions

Sets/gets the LOG DIFF constantParameter Type

IntegerParameter Range-100dB-100dB

Return-100dB-100dB

Example:TRACe5:MATH:REFerence 10:TRACe6:MATH:REFerence?

5.6.6

Normalize

Trace normalization function. Please save the reference trace before using this function.
Command format:CALCulate:NTData:STORE:REF

Instructions

Set normalization to save the reference trace

Example:CALCulate:NTData:STORE:REF

Command format:CALCulate:NTData[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1:CALCulate:NTData[:STATe]?

Instructions

Set/read switch normalization

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:NTData 1

int.siglent.com

59

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRLevel:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRLevel?

Instructions

Sets/gets the normalized reference level

Parameter Type

Float, unitdB

Parameter Range-200 dB ~ 200 dB

ReturnFloat, unitdB

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:NRLevel 10

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRPosition:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRPosition?

Instructions

Sets/reads the normalized reference location

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

0 ~ 100

ReturnInteger

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:NRPosition 10

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:NTTRace[:STATe]:DISPlay:WINDow:NTTRace[:STATe]?

Instructions

Sets/gets the normalized reference trace switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:NTTRace 1

5.6.7

Trace Function

Trace function supports the following operations on the specified trace

Trace Copy
Copy data from the source trace to the destination trace. After copying, the trace state of the target
trace is automatically changed to view.

Trace Exchange
Exchange the data of the source trace with the data of the target trace. After the exchange, the trace
status of the source trace and the target trace will be automatically changed to view.
Preset All Traces
The settings and data of all traces are changed to the default state.

Clear All Traces
Clear all traces data.

60

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format:TRACe:COPY

Instructions

Copy the trace

Example:TRACe:COPY 1,2

Command format:TRACe:EXCHange

Instructions

Exchange of trace

Example:TRACe:EXCHange 1,2Command format:TRACe:PRESet:ALL

Instructions

Reset all traces

Example:TRACe:PRESet:ALL

Command format:TRACe:CLEar:ALL

Instructions

Clear all traces

Example:TRACe:CLEar:ALL

int.siglent.com

61

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.7

Marker & Peak

The marker appears as a rhombic sign (as shown below) for identifying points on a trace. You caneasily read the amplitude, frequency and sweep time of the marked point on the trace.
The analyzer allows for up to eight/four pairs of markers to be displayed at one time, but only
one pair or a single marker is active every time.

You can use the numeric keys, knob or direction keys to modify the desired frequency or time aswell as view the readouts of different points on the trace.

5.7.1

Select Marker

Select one of the eight markers. The default is Marker1. When a marker is selected, you can set its
type, trace to be marked, readout type and other related parameters. The enabled marker will appear
on the trace selected through the Select Trace option and the readouts of this marker are also
displayed in the active function area and at the upper right corner of the screen.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:SELEct:CALCulate:MARKer:SELEct?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the current marker

Parameter Type

Enumeration1-8

ReturnEnumeration: 1-8

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:SELEct 5

5.7.2

Select Trace

Select the trace to be marked by the current marker. Valid selections includeTrace1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:TRACe 1|2|3|4|5|6:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:TRACe?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the marker trace

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

1|2|3|4|5|6

ReturnEnumeration

ExampleCALCulate:MARK:TRAC 1

5.7.3

Marker Type5.7.3.1

NormalOne of the marker types. It is used to measure the X (Frequency or Time) and Y (Amplitude) valuesof a certain point on the trace. When selected, a marker with the number of the current marker (suchas “ 1 ”) appears on the trace.


If no active marker exists currently, a marker will be enabled automatically at the center

62

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manualfrequency of the current trace.
You can use the numeric keys, knob or direction keys to move the marker. The readouts of themarker will be displayed at the upper right corner of the screen.

The readout resolution of the X-axis (frequency or time) is related to the span. For higher
readout resolution, reduce the span.

5.7.3.2

Delta

One of the marker types. It is used to measure the delta values of X (Frequency or Time) and Y(Amplitude) between the reference point and a certain point on the trace. When selected, a pair ofmarkers appears on the trace: Fixed Related Marker (marked by a combination of the marker
number and letter “ + ”, such as “ 2+ ”) and the Delta Marker (marked by the “∆”, such as “ 1∆2 ”).


After the marker selects “Delta”, the original marker will become the delta measurement marker,
and the related marker of the incrementing sequence number will become the reference “fixed”
marker

The delta marker is in the "relative to" state, and its X-axis position can be changed; the related
marker is in the "fixed" state by default (the X-axis and Y-axis positions are fixed), but the X-axis
can be adjusted by changing to the "normal" state.

The first row in the upper right corner of the trace area shows the frequency (or time) difference
and amplitude difference between the two markers; the second row in the upper right corner of
the trace area shows the X axis and amplitude value of the related marker.



Delta reset. It is only valid when the current marker is a differential marker. If the marker type ofthe relative marker of the current marker is normal or differential, change the horizontal positionof the relative marker to the horizontal position of the current marker; if the marker type of therelative marker is fixed, change the horizontal position and vertical position of the relative marker
to the current one. The horizontal and vertical position of the marker.

5.7.3.3

Fixed

One of the marker types. When “Fixed” is selected, the X-axis and Y-axis of the marker will notchange by the trace and can only be changed through the menu. The fixed marker is marked with"+".
After the marker selects “Delta”, the original marker will become the delta measurement marker, andthe related marker of the incrementing sequence number will become the reference “fixed” marker

5.7.3.4

Off

Turn off the marker currently selected. The marker information displayed on the screen and functions
based on the marker will also be turned off.

int.siglent.com

63

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE POSition|DELTa|FIXed|OFF:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MODE?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the marker mode

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

POSition
DELTa
FIXed
OFF

ReturnEnumeration: POS|DELT|FIX|OFF

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:MODE POSition

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe OFF|ON|0|1:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe?

Instructions

Sets/gets the marker switch status

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:STATe ON

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF

Instructions

Close all markers

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8 [:SET]:RESEt:DELTa

Instructions

Difference marker resets to 0
Only valid when the current cursor is a differential marker

Example:CALCulate:MARKer2:RESEt:DELTa

5.7.4

Marker Postion

Displays and sets the position of the marker. Only the x-axis position can be set.

64

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X?

Instructions

Sets/gets the value of the marker point X axis
This command takes effect only when the marker mode is not OFF::CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE
If the marker readout type is frequency, the parameter is frequency.
When the marker readout type is time, the value is time. Reference
commands::CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:READout

Parameter Typefrequency , Float , unitHz , kHz, MHz , GHz , default Hz or time , Float , unitus , ms ,s , ks , default s

Parameter Range

0 Hz ~ max span or 10 ms ~ 1000 s

ReturnWhen the marker readout type is frequency, the reading is frequency, floating point
type, in Hz;
When the marker readout type is time, the reading is time, floating point type, in s;
When the marker readout type is cycle, the reading is cycle, floating point type, unit s;

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Example:CALCulate:MARKer4:X 0.4 GHz:CALCulate:MARKer4:X 200 ms:CALCulate:MARKer4:X?

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:Y:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:Y?

Instructions

Read the value of the Y-axis of the marker point, which can also be used to read themarker noise in the marker function.
To execute this command, ensure that the marker is in the
onstate.:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

None

ReturnFloat, unitdBm

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:Y?
Return: -25

5.7.5

Relative To“Relative to” is used to measure the delta values of X (Frequency or Time) and Y (Amplitude)
between two markers which can mark on different traces.
After the marker selects “Delta”, the original marker will become the delta measurement marker, andthe related marker of the incrementing sequence number will become the reference “fixed” marker

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:REFerence 1|2|3|4:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:REFerence?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the marker relative toParameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8

ReturnEnumeration

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:REFerence 3

5.7.6

Readout Type

Select a desired readout type for the X-axis for the marker. Different markers can use different
readout types. This setting will change the readout type and affect the marker readings in the activefunction area and at the upper right corner of the screen, but will not change the actual value.

Frequency
In this type, Normal marker shows the absolute frequency. Delta markers and Delta Pair markers
show the frequency difference between the delta marker and reference marker. The default readout
mode in non-zero span is “Frequency”.
Note: This type is invalid in Zero span.

int.siglent.com

65

SSA5000A Series User Manual

PeriodIn this type, the Normal marker shows the reciprocal of frequency; while Delta marker and Delta Pairmarker show the reciprocal of frequency difference. When the frequency difference is zero, thereciprocal is infinite and 100 Ts is displayed.
Note: This type is invalid in Zero span.
Time
In this type, the Normal marker shows the time difference between the marker and the start of thesweep; while Delta marker and Delta Pair marker show the sweep time difference between the deltamarker and reference marker.
The default readout mode in Zero span is Time.

Inverse TimeIn this type, the Normal marker Inverse Time = 1 / Time ; while Delta marker and Delta Pair marker s
Inverse Time = 1 / Δ Time.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:READout
FREQuency | TIME | PERiod | INTIme:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:READout?

Instructions

Sets/gets the marker in X-axis reading mode

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

FREQuency: frequency
TIME
PERiodINVERSE_TIME

ReturnEnumeration: FREQ|TIME|PER| INTIme

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:X:READout FREQuency

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:READout:AUTO 0|1:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:READout:AUTO?

Instructions

Sets/gets the marker in X-axis reading mode auto

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:X:READout:AUTO 1

5.7.7

Marker Couple

When Marker Couple is on, Markers are set up and moved in coupled operation on all traces.
When Marker Couple is off, Markers are set up and moved independently for each trace.

Command format

66:CALCulate[:SELected]:MARKer:COUPle:CALCulate[:SELected]:MARKer:COUPle?

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Instructions

Set/query the marker coupling switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:COUPle 1:CALCulate:MARKer:COUPle?

5.7.8

Marker Lines

Mark the marker with the intersection of horizontal and vertical lines, which is more convenient toquery the marker position in the waveform area.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:LINE:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:LINE:STATe?

Instructions

Sets/gets the marker line switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer2:X:LINE:STATe 1:CALCulate:MARKer2:X:LINE:STATe?

5.7.9

Marker Table

Enable or disable the Marker Table.
Display all the markers enabled on the lower portion of the screen, including marker number, trace
number, marker readout type, X-axis readout and amplitude. Through this table you can view themeasurement values of multiple points. The table allows for up to eight markers to be displayed at
one time.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:TABLe ON|OFF|0|1:CALCulate:MARKer:TABLe?

Instructions

Sets/gets the marker table stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:TABLe ON

5.7.10Marker ->5.7.10.1

M->CF

Set the center frequency of the analyzer to the frequency of the current marker.


If the Normal marker is selected, the center frequency will be set to the frequency of the current
marker.

int.siglent.com

67

SSA5000A Series User Manual

If the Delta or Delta Pair marker is selected, the center frequency will be set to the frequency of
the Delta Marker.



The function is invalid in Zero span.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:CENTer

Instructions

Sets/gets the value of the marker X axis to the center frequency .If the marker is notopen, this command automatically turns the marker on the center frequency.

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:CENTer

5.7.10.2

M -> CF Step

Set the center frequency step of the analyzer to the frequency of the current marker.


If the Normal marker is selected, the center frequency step will be set to the frequency of thecurrent marker.



If the Delta or Delta Pair marker is selected, the center frequency step will be set to thefrequency of the Delta Marker.



The function is invalid in Zero span.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:STEP

Instructions

Sets/gets the value of the marker X axis to mid-frequency step
If the marker is not open, this command automatically turns the marker on the center
frequency.

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:STEP

5.7.10.3

M -> Start Freq

Set the start frequency of the analyzer to the frequency of the current marker.


If the Normal marker is selected, the start frequency will be set to the frequency of the current
marker.



If the Delta or Delta Pair marker is selected, the start frequency will be set to the frequency of
the Delta Marker.



The function is invalid in Zero span.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:START

Instructions

Sets/gets the value of the marker X axis to the starting frequency, valid when themarker is on

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:START

5.7.10.4

M -> Stop Freq

Set the stop frequency of the analyzer to the frequency of the current marker.


If the Normal marker is selected, the stop frequency will be set to the frequency of the current
marker.

68

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

If the Delta or Delta Pair marker is selected, the stop frequency will be set to the frequency of
the Delta Marker.



The function is invalid in Zero span.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:STOP

Instructions

Sets/gets the value of the marker X axis to terminate frequency
If the corresponding marker is not open, sending this command will automatically
open the marker at the end frequency.

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:STOP

5.7.10.5

M ->Ref Level

Set the reference level of the analyzer to the amplitude of the current marker.


If the Normal marker is selected, the reference level will be set to the amplitude of the current
marker.



If the Delta or Delta Pair marker is selected, the reference level will be set to the amplitude of
the Delta Marker.
Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:RLEVel

Instructions

Sets/gets the value of the marker Y-axis as a reference level
If the marker is not open, this command automatically turns the marker on the center
frequency.

Example:CALCulate:MARKer2:RLEVel

5.7.10.6

ΔM->SpanSet the span of the analyzer to the frequency difference between the two markers in Delta marker
type.


If the Normal marker is selected, this function is invalid.



The function is invalid in Zero span.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:DELTa[:SET]:SPAN

Instructions

Sets/gets the difference between the marker and the X axis to sweep widthThis command takes effect only when the marker mode is DELTa:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE

Example:CALCulate:MARKer2:DELTa:SPAN

5.7.10.7

ΔM->CF

Set the center frequency of the analyzer to the frequency difference between the two markers in
Delta marker type.


If the Normal marker is selected, this function is invalid.



The function is invalid in Zero span.

int.siglent.com

69

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:DELTa[:SET]:CENTer

Instructions

Sets/gets the difference between the marker and the X axis to the center frequency
This command takes effect only when the marker mode is DELTa:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE

Example:CALCulate:MARKer3:DELTa:CENTer

5.7.11Marker Fn

Special marker functions including Noise Marker, N dB BW and Freq Counter.
Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:FUNCtion OFF|FCOunt|NOISe|NDB:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:FUNCtion?

Instructions

Set/Get marker function

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

OFF: normal
NOISe: noisy marker
NDB: N dB marker

ReturnEnumeration: OFF|NOISe|NDB

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:FUNCtion NOISe

5.7.11.1

N dB BW

Enable the N dB BW measurement or set the value of N dB. The N dB BW denotes the frequency
difference between two points that are located on both sides of the current marker and with N dB fall
(N Less than or equal to 0) or rise (N>0) in amplitude as shown in the figure on the next page.
When the measurement starts, the analyzer will search for the two points which are located at bothsides of the current point with N dB fall or rise in amplitude and display the frequency difference
between the two points in the active function area. "----" would be displayed if the search fails.
The parameters in the figure are shown as:

Figure 5-4 N dB parameter70

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

mkr_ndb_bw

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:BANDwidth:NDB:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:BANDwidth:NDB?

Instructions

Set/Obtain the N dB bandwidth reference value

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-100 dB ~ 100 dB

Return

Float

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:BANDwidth:NDB 10 DB

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:BANDwidth:RESult?

Instructions

Result of setting/reading N dB bandwidth

Return

Float

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:BANDwidth:RESult?

5.7.11.2

Freq Counter

Turn on or off the frequency counter. The frequency readout is accuracy is up to 0.01 Hz.


The function is valid only when selecting marker 1.



If marker 1 is selected but not active, turning on the frequency counter will open marker 1
Normal marker automatically.

The frequency counter measures the frequency near the center frequency in Zero span.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:FCOunt:[:STATe] ON|OFF|0|1:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:FCOunt:[:STATe]?

Instructions

Sets/gets the marker frequency counter stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:FCOunt 1

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:FCOunt:X?

Instructions

Read the marker frequency counter reading

Return

Float

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:FCOunt:X?

5.7.11.3

Noise Marker

Execute the Noise marker function for the selected marker and read the normalized noise power
spectral density.


If the current marker is “ Off ” in the Marker menu, pressing Noise Marker will first set it toNormal type automatically; then measure the average noise level at the marked point andnormalize this value to 1 Hz bandwidth. During this process, certain compensation is always

int.siglent.com

71

SSA5000A Series User Manual

made based on the detection and trace types. The measurement will be more precise if RMS
Avg or Sample detection type is used.
This function can be used for measuring the C/N ratio.

5.7.11.4

Off

Turn off the noise marker, N dB BW measurement or Frequency Counter, but not the marker itself.

5.7.12

Peak Search

Open the peak search setting menu and execute peak search.
5.7.12.1

Peak Search

Next Search
Execute peak search and mark the peak.

Minium PeakExecute minimum search and mark the minium peak.

Next Peak
Search for and mark the peak whose amplitude is closest to that of the current peak and which meetsthe peak search condition.

Next Left Peak
Search for and mark the nearest peak which is located at the left side of the current peak and meetsthe peak search condition.

Next Right Peak
Search for and mark the nearest peak which is located at the right side of the current peak and meetsthe peak search condition.

Peak PeakExecute peak search and minimum search at the same time and mark the results with delta pairmarkers. Wherein, the result of peak search is marked with the delta marker and the result of
minimum search is marked with the reference marker.

Peak -> CF
Execute peak search and set the center frequency of the analyzer to the frequency of the peak. The
function is invalid in Zero Span.

72

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum

Instructions

Marker searches for peaks and marks them with the specified marker(If peak-to-peak value is on, peak-to-peak value search is carried out; otherwise,
single peak value search is carried out, refer to thecommand:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:PTPeak:STATe
Search criteria include peak type, absolute threshold, and relative offset:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:MODE:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion)

Example:CALCulate:MARKer4:MAXimum

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MINimum

Instructions

Marker searches for the minimum peak and marks it with the specified marker

Example:CALCulate:MARKer4:MINimum

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:NEXT

Instructions

Marker searches for the next peak and marks it with the specified marker(Based on the set search criteria, including peak type, absolute threshold, andrelative offset, see the following command:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:MODE:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion)

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:MAXimum:NEXT

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:LEFT:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:RIGHt

Instructions

Marker searches for left/right peaks and marks with the specified marker(Based on the set search criteria, including peak type, absolute threshold, andrelative offset, see the following command:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:MODE:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion)

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:MAXimum:LEFT

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:PTPeak

Instructions

Performs a peak-to-peak search, marking with the specified marker

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:PTPeak

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum[:SET]:CENTer

Instructions

Execute peak search and set the center frequency of the analyzer to the frequency ofthe peakExample:CALCulate:MARKer1:MAXimum:CENTer

5.7.12.2

Peak Config

Define the conditions of peak search for various peak searches. A real peak should meet therequirements of both the “Peak Threshold” and “Peak Excursion”.

int.siglent.com

73

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Peak Threshold
Assign a minimum for the peak amplitude. Peaks whose amplitudes are greater than the specified
peak threshold are treated as real peaks.The actual minimal peak threshold is -200dBm when shut
down the Peak Threshold.
Peak Excursion
Set the excursion between the peak and the minimum amplitude on both sides of it. Peaks whose
excursions are beyond the specified excursion are treated as real peaks.The actual minimal peakexcursion is 0dBm when shut down the Peak Excursion.

74

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold?

Instructions

Sets/gets the absolute threshold for the peak search criteria

Parameter Type

Float, unitdBm

Parameter Range-200.0 dBm~ 200.0 dBm

ReturnFloat, unitdBm

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:STATe?

Instructions

Set or obtain the absolute threshold switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:CPSEarch ON

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion?

Instructions

Sets/gets a relative threshold for the peak search criteria

Parameter Type

Float, unitdB

Parameter Range

0 ~ 200.0 dB

ReturnFloat, unitdB

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion 10

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion:STATe?

Instructions

Set and obtain the relative threshold switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion:STATe ON-50

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.7.12.3

Count Peak

Enable or disable continuous peak search. The default is Off. When enabled, the system will always
execute a peak search automatically after each sweep in order to track the signal undermeasurement.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:CPSearch[:STATe]:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:CPSearch[:STATe]?

Instructions

Enable the continuous peak search function
Gets the status of the continuous peak search function switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:CPSEarch ON

5.7.12.4

Peak Table

Open the peak table (in the lower window) which lists the peaks (with frequency and amplitude) thatmeet the peak search condition. Up to 30 peaks can be displayed in the table.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe?

Instructions

Set/Query the switch of the peak value table

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe ON

Command format:CALCulate:PEAK:TABLe?

Instructions

Get peak table data

ReturnStringExample:CALCulate:PEAK:TABLe?

5.7.12.5

Sort Order

Sort all signals in the peak table by the specific order.
Sort order based on the frequency / time(zero span) , ampt or delta to limit.
Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT?

Instructions

Sets/gets the peak sorting basis

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range
Return

AMPT|FREQ|DELTa
AMPT|FREQ|DELTa

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT FREQ:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT?

int.siglent.com

75

SSA5000A Series User Manual

76

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT:ORDEr:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT:ORDEr?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the peak sort type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range
ReturnASC|DEC
ASC|DEC

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT:ORDEr DEC:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT:ORDEr?

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:DTLimit:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:DTLimit?

Instructions

Peak sorting based on limit selection

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

1-6

Return

1-6

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:DTLimit 5:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:DTLimit?

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:DTLimit:STATe 0|1:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:DTLimit:STATe?

Instructions

Set/Query the switch of the peak value table

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:DTLimit:STATe ON

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.8

Limit

The analyzer supports Pass/Fail test function. In this function, the measured curve will be comparedwith the pre-edited curve. If the related rules are met, the result is “Pass”, else the result is “Fail”.

5.8.1

Slect Limit

Activate/Select a limit.

5.8.2

Limit State

Enable or disable slected limit.
Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:STATe OFF|ON|0|1:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:STATe?

Instructions

Sets/gets the restricted stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:STATe OFF

5.8.3

Limit Margin

Set the margin for selected limit.
When trace is between limit and margin, it will be displayed as Fail Margin.

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MARGin:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MARGin?

Instructions

Sets/gets the limit margin value

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-100 dB ~ 100dB

Return

Float

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:MARGin 10:CALCulate:LLINe2:MARGin?
:CALCulate:LLINe2:MARGin:STATe 0

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MARGin:STATe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MARGin:STATe?

Instructions

Sets/gets the restricted stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:MARGin:STATe OFF

int.siglent.com

77

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.8.4

Limit TypeSet the limit type as upper / lower . The limit 1,3,5 is default as the lower and 2,4,6 as the lower.

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE UPPer|LOWer:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the restriction type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

UPPer|LOWer

ReturnEnumeration

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:TYPE LOWer

5.8.5

Limit Edit

Edit the properties of slected limit.

Figure 5-5 limit edit

Table 5-1 Limit1 Edit Menu
Function

Explanation

Type

Select upper or lower limit type. The default value is Upper.

Mode

Select limit line or limit point. The default value is Line.
Set the number of the point to be edited if you selected the point type, and therange is 1 ~ 100.

78

Add point

Add a new point for editing.

X-axisEdit the X-axis value (frequency or time) of the current point.

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Amplitude

Edit the amplitude of the current point or line.

Del Point

Delete the point whose number is selected in Mode.

Del All

Delete all the points.

Save/Load

Save or load the limit file.

X OffsetSet offsets of X axis.

Y OffsetSet offsets of Y axis

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:X:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:X?

Instructions

Set the limit point template frequency offset
Gets the limit point template frequency offset

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

0 ~ 26.5G

Return

Float

Example:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:X 1MHz

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:Y:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:Y?

Instructions

Sets the limit point template amplitude offset
Gets the limiter template amplitude offset

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-350 dB~380 dB

Return

Float

Example:CALCulate:LLINe5:Offset:Y -10

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DATA val1,val2:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DATA?

Instructions

Sets/gets restricted data (Clears previous data)

Parameter Typeval1 : frequency : Float,
val2 : Ampl : Float

Parameter Range

val1 : related with Spanval2 : -400 dBm~330 dBm

Returnval1 : frequency : Float,
val2 : Ampl : Float

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:DATA 100, -20, 200, -25 (Add two points(100,-20) and (200,-25)):CALC:LLINe1:DATA?

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:ADD val1,val2:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:POINt:DELete

Instructions

Add limit point
Delete limit points

Parameter Typeval1 : frequency : Float,
val2 : Ampl : Float

int.siglent.com

79

SSA5000A Series User Manual

80

Parameter Range

val1 : related with Spanval2 : -400 dBm~330 dBm

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:ADD 100,-20:CALCulate:LLINe2:POINt:DELete 2

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe:ALL:DELete

Instructions

Delete specified restrictions
Delete all restrictions

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe:ALL:DELete

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TRACe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TRACe?

Instructions

Select the limit trace

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

1~6

Return

1~6

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:TRACe 3

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:INTerpolate:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:INTerpolate:TYPE?

Instructions

Set/Query the frequency difference type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

LOG|LIN

Return

LOG|LIN

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:FREQuency:INTerpolate:TYPE LOG

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:CMODe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:CMODe?

Instructions

Set or query the frequency reference type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

FIXed|RELAtive

ReturnFIXed|RELAtive

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:FREQuency:CMODe FIX

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE?

Instructions

Set or query the range difference type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

LOG|LIN

Return

LOG|LIN

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1: AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE LOG

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6: AMPLitude:CMODe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6: AMPLitude:CMODe?

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Instructions

Set or query the amplitude reference type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

FIXed|RELAtive

ReturnFIXed|RELAtive

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2: AMPLitude:CMODe FIX

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:COPY:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:COPY?

Instructions

Copy the limit

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

1~6

Return

1~6

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:COPY 5

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:BUILd:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:BUILd?

Instructions

Fitting a trace

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

1~6

Return

1~6

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2: BUILd 1:CALCulate:LLINe2: BUILd?

5.8.6

Limit Test

Enable or disable the limit test function.

Figure 5-6 test results

int.siglent.com

81

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe:TEST:CALCulate:LLINe:TEST?

Instructions

Sets/gets the status of the test switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe:TEST 1

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FAIL?

Instructions

Query limit test results.

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:FAIL 1

5.8.7

Setup

Fail to stop
Turn on or off the Fail to stop function. If the function is on, the analyzer will stop sweep and retain thetest result when the test result is “Fail”.

BuzzerTurn on or off the buzzer. When the buzzer is on, it beeps when the test result is “Fail”.

82

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:BEEP:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:BEEP?

Instructions

Sets/gets the restricted buzzer

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:BEEP OFF

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe:FAIL:STOP:CALCulate:LLINe:FAIL:STOP?

Instructions

The set/query limit test stops if it fails

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe:FAIL:STOP OFF

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.9

Meas & Meas Setup

Provide optional measurement functions. When activated, the screen will be divided into two parts.
The above part is the measure screen which displays traces, and the other part is used to display
measurement results.

5.9.1

Swept SAThe Swept SA measurement lets you perform “traditional” Spectrum Analysis, that is, Swept andZero Span measurements, as well as “Swept FFT” analysis (FFT analysis presented as though it
were swept).
5.9.1.1

Average TypeChoose one of the following averaging types: log power (video), power (RMS), or voltage averaging.
When trace average is on, the average type is shown on the left side of the display.

Figure 5-7 Average TypeLog Power
Select the logarithmic (decibel) scale for all filtering and averaging processes. This scale is "Video"
because it is the most common display and analysis scale for the video signal within analyzer. This
scale is excellent for finding Sine/CW signals near noise.

Power Average
In this average type, all filtering and averaging processes work on the power (the square of themagnitude) of the signal, instead of its log or envelope voltage. This scale is best for real-time power
measurement of complex signals.
Voltage Average
In this Average type, all filtering and averaging processes work on the voltage of the envelope of thesignal. This scale is suitable for observing rise and fall behavior of AM or pulse-modulated signals
such as radar and TDMA transmitters.

int.siglent.com

83

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE LOGPower|POWer|VOLTage[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE?

Instructions

Set/Query the average type

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

LOGPower
POWer
VOLTage

ReturnEnumeration: LOGP|POW|VOLT

ExampleAVERage:TYPE VOLTage

Command format[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE:AUTO 0|1|ON|OFF[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE:AUTO?

Instructions

Set/query the average type automatically

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:AVERage:TYPE:AUTO 1

5.9.1.2

Average/Hold Number

Sets the terminal count number N for Average, Max Hold and Min Hold trace types. This number isan integral part of how the average trace is calculated. Basically, increasing N results in a smootheraverage trace.

Command format[:SENSe]:AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:COUNt[:SENSe]:AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:COUNt?

Instructions

Sets/gets the average number of traces

Parameter type

IntegerParameter Range

1 ~ 999

ReturnInteger

Example:AVERage:TRACe1:COUNt 10

Command format[:SENSe]:AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6?
[:SENSe]:AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:CLEar

Instructions

The current average number of times the trace has been obtained
Restart average

Example:AVERage:TRACe2 ?
:AVERage:TRACe2:CLEar

5.9.1.3

Tune & Radio

Demod (AM/FM)
Sets the demodulation type of AM, FM or OFF demod. Default setting is OFF demod.
When AM (or FM) demodulation is turned on, the system automatically opens a cursor to position itat the center frequency, and perform AM (or FM) demodulation for this frequency point.

84

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User ManualThis machine is equipped with a headphone jack, through which demodulation signal can be output
in audio mode. Audio frequency represents the frequency of the modulated signal, and the intensityof audio indicates the amplitude of the modulated signal.

EarphoneSet the headset status/volume.When the headset is turned on, the voice of the modulation signal canbe heard through the headset during the demodulation process. The headset is disabled by default.
You can set the volume of the headset by volume.

Demodulation time
Set the dwell time of signal demodulation after each sweep. Longer dwell time will benefit continuous
demodulation signal.
If the headset is turned on, the voice of the demodulated signal will be heard through the headset
during this period.

Command format[:SENSe]:DEMod AM|FM|OFF[:SENSe]:DEMod?

Instructions

Sets the demodulation mode
Gets the demodulation mode

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

AM : Amplitude modulation
FM : Frequency modulation
OFF

ReturnEnumeration: AM|FM|OFF

Example:DEMod AM

Command format[:SENSe]:DEMod:EPHone OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:DEMod:EPHone?

Instructions

Switch the headset

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:DEMod:EPHone ON

Command format[:SENSe]:DEMod:VOLume[:SENSe]:DEMod:VOLume?

Instructions

Adjust the volume

Parameter type

IntegerParameter Range

0 ~ 10ReturnInteger

Example:DEMod:VOLume 10

Command format[:SENSe]:DEMod:TIME[:SENSe]:DEMod:TIME?

int.siglent.com

85

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Instructions

Set the demodulation time
Get demodulation time

Parameter type

Float , unitms , us , sParameter Range

5 ms ~1000 s

ReturnFloat , units

ExampleDEMod:TIME 5 ms

5.9.1.4

Automatic coupling

Auto coupling instantly sets all auto/manual functions to auto. The automatic coupling action islimited to the current measurement. It does not affect other measurements in the mode.
In the automatic state, the automatic/manual functions are referred to as "coupled", which meansthat their values will change based on changes made to other values in the measurement. This helps
ensure accurate measurements and optimal dynamic range. Automatic coupling is a just-in-time
action feature that, when it is performed, all automatic/manual controls for the current measurement
are set to automatic and all measurement settings coupled to automatic/manual parameters areautomatically set to their best values.

Command format:COUPle:ALL

Instructions

Automatic coupling

Example:COUPle:ALL

5.9.1.5

Display line

The amplitude line can be used as a reference for the amplitude readout or as a threshold condition
for the peak display in the peak table.
The frequency line can be used as a reference for frequency readout.

86

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe?

Instructions

Sets/gets the amplitude display line

Parameter type

Float

Return

Float

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe -40

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATe:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATe?

Instructions

Set/get amplitude display line automatically

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATe 1

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X:FLINe:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X:FLINe?

Instructions

Set/Obtain the frequency display line

Parameter type

Float

Return

Float

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X:FLINe 100e6

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X:FLINe:STATe:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X:FLINe:STATe?

Instructions

Set/get frequency display line automatically

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X:FLINe:STATe 1

5.9.1.6

GloablThe global center frequency causes the current center frequency to act on other measurements/
swep.

Command format:INSTrument:COUPle:FREQuency:CENTer:INSTrument:COUPle:FREQuency:CENTer?

Instructions

Enable/disable the global center frequency

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|1

Example:INSTrument:COUPle:FREQuency:CENTer 0:INSTrument:COUPle:FREQuency:CENTer?

int.siglent.com

87

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.9.2

Channel Power

Measure the power and power density within the specified channel bandwidth. When this function isenabled, the span and resolution bandwidth are automatically adjusted to smaller values. SelectChannel Power and press

Meas Setup

to set the corresponding parameters.

Figure 5-8 Channel Power

Measurement Results: Channel power and power spectral density.


Channel Power: Power within the integration bandwidth.

Power Spectral Density: Power (in dBm/Hz) normalized to 1Hz within the integration bandwidth.

Measurement Parameters: Center Freq, Integration BW, Span, Span power.

Command format:CHPower:MEASure:CHPower?
:CHPower:MEASure:CHPower:CHPower?
:CHPower:MEASure:CHPower:DENSity?

Instructions

Read channel power and power spectral density

ReturnFloat , Channel power unit: dBm
Float , A unit of spectral density of power :dBm/Hz

Example:CHPower:MEASure:CHPower?

5.9.2.1

Average Mode

Select the type of control used for the averaging function. This determines the average operation
after the specified number of data acquisitions (average count) has been reached. Options include:88

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Exponentialr:
The measure average operation continuously calculates a weighted average for each index using a
specified number of averages.
Repeat:Each time the specified average is reached, the measurement resets the average counter.

Command format[:SENSe]:CHPower:AVERage:TCONtrol[:SENSe]:CHPower:AVERage:TCONtrol?

Instructions

Sets/gets the average mode

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

EXPOnentialr|REPEat

ReturnEnumerationEXPOnentialr|REPEat

Example:CHPower:AVERage:TCONtrol REPEat

5.9.2.2

Integration BW

Set the frequency width of the channel to be tested and the power of the channel is the power
integral within this bandwidth. You can use the numeric keys, knob or direction keys to modify thisparameter.

Command format[:SENSe]:CHPower:BWIDth:INTegration[:SENSe]:CHPower:BWIDth:INTegration?

Instructions

Sets/gets the integral bandwidthParameter type

Float , unitHz , kHz , MHz ,GHz

ReturnFloat , unitHz

Example:CHPower:BWIDth:INTegration 1.0 GHz

Command format[:SENSe]:CHPower:FREQuency:SPAN:POWer

Instructions

Sets the value of channel sweep to the integral bandwidth

Example:CHPower:FREQuency:SPAN:POWer

5.9.2.3

PSD Unit

Select power spectral density unit, optional dBm/Hz , dBm/MHz.

Command format:UNIT:CHPower:POWer:PSD:UNIT:CHPower:POWer:PSD?

Instructions

Select the power spectral density unit

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

DBMHZ|DBMMHZ

ReturnDBMHZ|DBMMHZ

Example:UNIT:CHPower:POWer:PSD DBMHZ:UNIT:CHPower:POWer:PSD?

int.siglent.com

89

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.9.3

ACPR

Measure the power of the main channel and adjacent channels as well as the power difference
between the main channel and each of the adjacent channels. When this function is enabled, thespan and resolution bandwidth of the analyzer are adjusted to smaller values automatically.
Select ACPR and press

Meas Setup

to set the corresponding parameters.

Figure 5-9 ACPR
Measurement Results: Main CH Power, Left channel power and Right channel power.


Main CH Power : Displays the power within the bandwidth of the main power

Left channel power : Displays the power of left channel and the power difference between theleft channel and the main channel (in dBc)

Right channel power: Display the power of the right channel and the power difference between
the right channel and the main channel (in dBc)

Measurement parameter: Center frequency, main channel bandwidth, adjacent channel bandwidthand channel spacing

90

Command format:MEASure:ACPRatio:ACPower:MAIN?
:MEASure:ACPRatio:LOWer:POWer?
:MEASure:ACPRatio:UPPer:POWer?

Instructions

Get the main channel power
Obtain low and high frequency adjacent channel power

ReturnFloat , unitdBm

Example:MEASure:ACPRatio:ACPower:MAIN?

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format:MEASure:ACPRatio:LOWer?
:MEASure:ACPRatio:UPPer?

Instructions

Obtain the low frequency/high frequency adjacent channel power ratio

ReturnFloat , unitdBm

Example:MEASure:ACPRatio:LOWer?

5.9.3.1

Average Mode

Select the type of control used for the averaging function. This determines the average operation
after the specified number of data acquisitions (average count) has been reached. Options include:
Exponentialr:
The measure average operation continuously calculates a weighted average for each index using a
specified number of averages.
Repeat:Each time the specified average is reached, the measurement resets the average counter.

Command format[:SENSe]:ACPower:AVERage:TCONtrol[:SENSe]:ACPower:AVERage:TCONtrol?

Instructions

Setting average ModeGet average pattern

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

EXPOnentialr|REPEat

ReturnEnumerationEXPOnentialr|REPEat

Example:ACPower:AVERage:TCONtrol REPEat

5.9.3.2

Main Channel

Set the bandwidth of the main channel and the power of the main channel is the power integral within
this bandwidth.

Command format[:SENSe]:ACPRatio:BWIDth:INTegration[:SENSe]:ACPRatio:BWIDth:INTegration?

Instructions

Set the bandwidth of the adjacent channel
Obtain the bandwidth of the adjacent channel

Parameter type

Float , unitHz , kHz , MHz , GHz

Parameter Range

related with Span

ReturnFloat , unitHz

Example:ACPRatio:BWIDth:INTegration 20 MHz

5.9.3.3

Adjacent Chn

Set the frequency width of the adjacent channels.
The adjacent channel bandwidth is related to the main channel bandwidth.

int.siglent.com

91

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format[:SENSe]:ACPRatio:OFFSet:BWIDth[:INTegration][:SENSe]:ACPRatio:OFFSet:BWIDth[:INTegration]?

Instructions

Set the main channel bandwidth
Get the main channel bandwidthParameter type

Float , unitHz , kHz , MHz , GHz

Parameter Range

related with Span

ReturnFloat , unitHz

Example:ACPRatio:OFFSet:BWIDth 20 MHz

5.9.3.4

Adj Chn space

Set the difference between the center frequency of the main channel and the center frequency of theadjacent channels.
Adjusting this parameter will also adjust the distance between the upper/lower channel and the main
channel.

Command format[:SENSe]:ACPRatio:OFFSet[:FREQuency][:SENSe]:ACPRatio:OFFSet[:FREQuency]?

Instructions

Set the adjacent channel interval
Gets the adjacent channel intervalParameter type

Float , unitHz , kHz , MHz , GHz

Parameter Range

related with Span

ReturnFloat , unitHz

Example:ACPRatio:OFFSet 20 MHz

5.9.3.5

PSD Unit

Select power spectral density unit, optional is dBm/Hz, dBm/MHz.

92

Command format:UNIT: ACPRatio:POWer:PSD:UNIT: ACPRatio:POWer:PSD?

Instructions

Select the power spectral density unit

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

DBMHZ|DBMMHZ

ReturnDBMHZ|DBMMHZ

Example:UNIT: ACPRatio:POWer:PSD DBMHZ:UNIT: ACPRatio:POWer:PSD?

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.9.4

OBW

Integrates the power within the whole span and calculates the bandwidth occupied by this power
according to the specified power ratio. The OBW function also indicates the difference (namely“Transmit Freq Error”) between the center frequency of the channel under measurement and thecenter frequency of the analyzer. Select Occupied BW and press

Meas Setup

to set thecorresponding parameters.

Figure 5-10 OBW

Measurement Results: occupied bandwidth and transmit frequency error.


Occupied Bandwidth: Integrates the power within the whole span and then calculates the
bandwidth occupied by the power according to the specified power ratio.

Transmit Frequency Error: The difference between the center frequency of the channel andthe center frequency of the analyzer.

Command format:MEASure:OBWidth?
:MEASure:OBWidth:OBWidth?
:MEASure:OBWidth:CENTroid?

Instructions

Read bandwidth and bandwidth center

ReturnFloat , unitHz

Example:MEASure:OBW?

Command format:MEASure:OBWidth:OBWidth:FERRor?

Instructions

Get transmission frequency error

int.siglent.com

93

SSA5000A Series User Manual

ReturnFloat , unitHz

Example:MEASure:OBWidth:OBWidth:FERRor?

5.9.4.1

Average Mode

Select the type of control used for the averaging function. This determines the average operation
after the specified number of data acquisitions (average count) has been reached. Options include:
Exponentialr:
The measure average operation continuously calculates a weighted average for each index using a
specified number of averages.
Repeat:Each time the specified average is reached, the measurement resets the average counter.

Command format[:SENSe]:OBWidth:AVERage:TCONtrol[:SENSe]:OBWidth:AVERage:TCONtrol?

Instructions

Sets/gets average mode

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

EXPOnentialr|REPEat

ReturnEXPOnentialr|REPEat

Example:OBWidth:AVERage:TCONtrol REPE

5.9.4.2

Power ratio

Specifies the percentage of total power measured within occupied bandwidth for the current
measurement.
Command format[:SENSe]:OBWidth:PERCent[:SENSe]:OBWidth:PERCent?

Instructions

Set the bandwidth usage percentage
Gets the percentage of occupied bandwidthParameter type

Float

Parameter Range

10~99.99

Return

Float

Example:OBW:PERCent 50

5.9.4.3

Power Reference

Select the power reference type.


Total Power: The measurement result will display the power in the entire span.



OBW power: The measurement result will display the occupied power.

94

Command format[:SENSe]:OBWidth:PREFerence[:SENSe]:OBWidth:PREFerence?

Instructions

Setting power Reference
Obtaining power reference

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Parameter type

Enumeration TPOW|OBWPower

ReturnEnumeration

Example:OBWidth:PREFerence TPOW

5.9.4.4

x dB

Sets the x dB value used for the "x dB Bandwidth" result, which measures the bandwidth between
two points on the signal that are x dB below the highest signal point in the OBW range.

Command format[:SENSe]:OBWidth:XDB[:SENSe]:OBWidth:XDB?

Instructions

Set the bandwidth USAGE dBc value
Obtain the occupied bandwidth dBc value

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range

0.1~100

Return

Float

Example:OBWidth:XDB 3

5.9.4.5

Power integration mode

Set the power integration mode to Normal or From-Center.

Command format[:SENSe]:OBWidth:INTegration[:METHod][:SENSe]:OBWidth:INTegration[:METHod]?

Instructions

Set integral typeGet integral type

Parameter type

Enumeration NORMal|ICENter

ReturnEnumeration

Example:OBWidth:INTegration ICENter

int.siglent.com

95

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.9.5

T-Power

The system enters Zero span and calculates the power within the time domain. The types of powers
available include Peak, Average and RMS. Select T-Power and press

Meas Setup

to set thecorresponding parameters.

Figure 5-11 T-Power

Measurement Results: T-Power
T-Power: The power of the signal from the start line to the stop line.
Measurement Parameter: Center frequency, start line, stop line.

Command format:MEASure:TPOWer?

Instructions

Read time domain power

ReturnFloat , unitdBm

Example:MEASure:TPOWer?

5.9.5.1

Average Mode

Select the type of control used for the averaging function. This determines the average operation
after the specified number of data acquisitions (average count) has been reached. Options include:
Exponentialr
The measure average operation continuously calculates a weighted average for each index using a
specified number of averages.

96

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

RepeatEach time the specified average is reached, the measurement resets the average counter.

Command format[:SENSe]: TPOWer:AVERage:TCONtrol[:SENSe]: TPOWer:AVERage:TCONtrol?

Instructions

Sets/gets average mode

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

EXPOnentialr|REPEat

ReturnEXPOnentialr|REPEat

Example:TPOWer:AVERage:TCONtrol REPE

5.9.5.2

Center Frequency

Set the center frequency, this center frequency which is the same with the center frequency of theanalyzer. Modifying this parameter will change the center frequency of the analyzer.

Command format[:SENSe]:TPOWer:FREQuency:CENTer[:SENSe]:TPOWer:FREQuency:CENTer?

Instructions

Set the time domain power center frequency
Obtain the time domain power center frequency

Parameter type

Float , unitHz , kHz , MHz , GHz

Parameter Range

related with Span

ReturnFloat , unitHz

Example:TPOWer:FREQuency:CENTer 15kHz

5.9.5.3

Start line

Set the left margin (in time unit) of T-Power measurement. The data calculated under thismeasurement is between the start line and stop line.

Command format[:SENSe]:TPOWer:LLIMit[:SENSe]:TPOWer:LLIMit?

Instructions

Set/Query the time domain power measurement start line

Parameter type

Float , unit : s

Parameter Range

0 ~ 1000 s

ReturnFloat , time unit: s

Example:TPOWer:LLIMit 100

5.9.5.4

Stop line

Set the right margin (in time unit) of T-Power measurement. The data calculated under thismeasurement is between the start line and stop line.

Command format

int.siglent.com[:SENSe]:TPOWer:RLIMit[:SENSe]:TPOWer:RLIMit?

97

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Instructions

Set/Query the time domain power measurement stop line

Parameter type

Float , unit :sParameter Range

0 ~ 1000 s

ReturnFloat , time unit: s

Example:TPOWer:RLIMit 50 s

5.9.6

TOI

Automatic measurement of IP3 (Third order Intercept Point), including the power of fundamental
wave and the Third order in the power, and calculate the adjustable Intercept Point.

Figure 5-12 TOI
TOI is an automatic measurement. There are no user controlled parameters.

98

Command format:MEASure:TOI?

Instructions

Read the measurement results of third-order intermodulation distortion
Returns the following values separated by commas in scientific count form:
Lower Tone frequency (Hz), amplitude, Upper Tone frequency (Hz), amplitude,
TOI(Lower 3rd) frequency (Hz), amplitude, third-order intermodulation cutoff(Intercept), High frequency TOI (Upper 3rd) frequency (Hz), amplitude, third-orderintermodulation cut-off point (Intercept).

Return

Float

Example:MEASure:TOI?

Command format:MEASure:TOI:IP3?

Instructions

Read the smaller value in the third-order intermodulation cutoff (Intercept) of low
frequency TOI(Lower 3rd) and high frequency TOI(Upper 3rd)

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Return

Float

Example:MEASure:TOI:IP3?

5.9.6.1

Average Mode

Select the type of control used for the averaging function. This determines the average operation
after the specified number of data acquisitions (average count) has been reached. Options include:
Exponentialr
The measure average operation continuously calculates a weighted average for each index using a
specified number of averages.
RepeatEach time the specified average is reached, the measurement resets the average counter.

Command format[:SENSe]:TOI:AVERage:TCONtrol[:SENSe]:TOI:AVERage:TCONtrol?

Instructions

Sets/gets average mode

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

EXPOnentialr|REPEat

ReturnEXPOnentialr|REPEat

Example:TOI:AVERage:TCONtrol REPE

int.siglent.com

99

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.9.7

Spectrum Monitor

Display the power of the swept spectrum as an intensity color map commonly referred to as awaterfall chart. Select Spectrum Monitor and press

Meas Setup

to set the corresponding

parameters.

Figure 5-13 Spectrum Monitor

Display the power of spectrum of successive scans as a color map. Also call a waterfall chart.
Measurement Parameter: Spectrogram, Restart.
Spectrogram: Sets the meas state of spectrum monitor.
Restart: clear the measurement and then restart it.

Command format[:SENSe]:SPECtrogram:STATe[:SENSe]:SPECtrogram:STATe?

Instructions

Set the spectrum to monitor the operating status
Obtain spectrum to monitor operating status

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

Example[:SENSe]:SPECtrogram:STATe 0[:SENSe]:SPECtrogram:STATe?

Command format[:SENSe]:SPECtrogram:RESTart

Instructions

Spectrum rescanning

Parameter type

Boolean100

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Parameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

Example[:SENSe]:SPECtrogram:RESTart

5.9.7.1

Average Mode

Select the type of control used for the averaging function. This determines the average operation
after the specified number of data acquisitions (average count) has been reached. Options include:
Exponentialr:
The measure average operation continuously calculates a weighted average for each index using a
specified number of averages.
Repeat:Each time the specified average is reached, the measurement resets the average counter.

Command format[:SENSe]: SPECtrogram:AVERage:TCONtrol[:SENSe]: SPECtrogram:AVERage:TCONtrol?

Instructions

Sets/gets average mode

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

EXPOnentialr|REPEat

ReturnEXPOnentialr|REPEat

Example:SPECtrogram:AVERage:TCONtrol REPE

int.siglent.com

101

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.9.8

CNR

Measure the power of the carrier and noise of the specified bandwidth and their ratio. Select CNR
and press

to set the corresponding parameters.

Meas Setup

Figure 5-14 CNR

Measurement Results: C/N, Carrier Power, Noise Power.
C/N: the ratio of Carrier Power to Noise Power.
Carrier Power: the total power of the carrier bandwidth.
Noise Power: the total power of the selected noise bandwidth.

Command format:CNRatio:MEASure:CNRatio?
:CNRatio:MEASure:CNRatio:CARRier?
:CNRatio:MEASure:CNRatio:NOISe?

Instructions

Obtain the SNR
Acquisition of carrier powerGet noise power

Return

Float

Example:CNRatio:MEASure:CNRatio?

5.9.8.1

Average Mode

Select the type of control used for the averaging function. This determines the average operation
after the specified number of data acquisitions (average count) has been reached. Options include:
Exponentialr:

102

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

The measure average operation continuously calculates a weighted average for each index using a
specified number of averages.

Repeat:Each time the specified average is reached, the measurement resets the average counter.

Command format[:SENSe]:CNRatio:AVERage:TCONtrol[:SENSe]:CNRatio:AVERage:TCONtrol?

Instructions

Sets/gets average mode

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

EXPOnentialr|REPEat

ReturnEXPOnentialr|REPEat

Example:CNRatio:AVERage:TCONtrol REPE

5.9.8.2

Carrier BW

Set the bandwidth of the carrier to be measured.

Command format[:SENSe]:CNRatio:BANDwidth:INTegration[:SENSe]:CNRatio:BANDwidth:INTegration?

Instructions

Sets/gets bandwidth of the carrier

Parameter Type

Float , Unit: Hz , MHz ,Parameter Range

100 Hz~28 GHz

ReturnFloat , Unit: Hz

Example

INSTrument:CNRatio:MEASure CNR:CNRatio:BANDwidth:INTegration 20 MHz

5.9.8.3

Noise BW

Set the bandwidth of the noise to be measured.

Command format[:SENSe]:CNRatio:BANDwidth:NOISe[:SENSe]:CNRatio:BANDwidth:NOISe?

Instructions

Sets/gets bandwidth of the noise

Parameter Type

Float , Unit: Hz , kHz , MHz , GHz

Parameter Range

100 Hz~3.2 GHz

ReturnFloat , Unit: Hz

Example:ACPRatio:OFFSet:BWIDth 20 MHz

5.9.8.4

Freq Offset

Set the difference between carrier center frequency and noise center frequency.

Command format

int.siglent.com[:SENSe]:CNRatio:OFFSet[:SENSe]:CNRatio:OFFSet?

103

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Instructions

Sets/gets frequency offset

Parameter Type

Float , Unit: Hz , kHz , MHz , GHz

Parameter Range

100 Hz~700 MHz

ReturnFloat , Unit: Hz

Example:ACPRatio:OFFSet 20 MHz

5.9.9

Harmonics

The harmonic power and total harmonic distortion of carrier signal are measured. The maximum
measurable harmonic is 10th harmonic. The fundamental wave amplitude of carrier signal must be
greater than - 50 dBm, otherwise the measurement result is invalid.

Figure 5-15 Harmonics

5.9.9.1

Measurement Results

Each harmonic amplitude and total harmonic distortion of carrier signal. It can measure up to 10th
harmonic.

5.9.9.2

Fundamental

Set the frequency of the fundamental wave.
If the automatic mode is turned on, the fundamental wave will be automatically found from the first
scan. If the automatic mode is turned off, the user can input the fundamental frequency manually.

104

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format[:SENSe]:HARMonics:FREQuency:FUNDamental[:SENSe]:HARMonics:FREQuency:FUNDamental?

Instructions

Set the fundamental frequency
Get the fundamental frequency

Parameter Type

Float , unit: Hz , kHz , MHz , GHz

Parameter Range

1 Hz~28 GHz

ReturnFloat , unitHz

ExampleHARMonics:FREQuency:FUNDamental 20 MHz

Command format[:SENSe]:HARMonics:FREQuency:FUNDamental:AUTO[:SENSe]:HARMonics:FREQuency:FUNDamental:AUTO?

Instructions

Set the fundamental frequency
Get the fundamental frequency

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

ExampleHARMonics:FREQuency:FUNDamental:AUTO 1

5.9.9.3

Freq Step

Set the harmonic step. In auto mode, the frequency of a harmonic is a multiple of the fundamental
frequency.

Command format[:SENSe]:HARMonics:FREQuency:STEP[:INCRement][:SENSe]:HARMonics:FREQuency:STEP[:INCRement]?

Instructions

Set the frequency stepGet the frequency step

Parameter Type

Float , unit: Hz , kHz , MHz , GHz

Parameter Range

1 Hz~28 GHz

ReturnFloat , unit: Hz

Example:HARMonics:FREQuency:STEP 20 MHz

Command format[:SENSe]:HARMonics:FREQuency:STEP[:INCRement]:AUTO[:SENSe]:HARMonics:FREQuency:STEP[:INCRement]:AUTO?

Instructions

Set the frequency stepGet the frequency step

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

Example:HARMonics:FREQuency:STEP:AUTO 1

5.9.9.4

Harmonic Num

Set the total number of the harmonics to be measured.

Command format

int.siglent.com[:SENSe]:HARMonics:NUMBer[:SENSe]:HARMonics:NUMBer?

105

SSA5000A Series User Manual
Instructions

Set harmonic number
Querying harmonic number

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

2 ~ 10ReturnInteger

Example:HARMonics:NUMBer 5

5.9.9.5

Select Harmonic

When “All” is selected, the trace shows the fundamental wave and all harmonics in the sweep
bandwidth.
When 1-10 is selected, the trace shows a zero span trace corresponding to the fundamental wave or
the measured harmonic.

Command format[:SENSe]:HARMonics:SELect[:SENSe]:HARMonics:SELect?

Instructions

Set select harmonic
Query select harmonics

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

0 ~ 10ReturnInteger

Example:HARMonics:SELect 7

5.9.10

IQ Acquisition

IQ Acquisition Instructions
IQ acquisition is similar to zero-span measurement in Swept SA, where the input signal is displayed
as I/Q data results. It is commonly used for measuring digital modulated signals and supports
exporting IQ data to txt files for users to perform data demodulation and analysis. The IQA windowpresents the I and Q signal waveforms, depicting the voltage changes over time. The I signal isrepresented by the yellow trace, while the Q signal is represented by the purple trace. I/Q views
provided in spectrum measurements enables users to examine complex components of the same
signal without the need to modify settings or measurements.

106

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Figure 5-16 IQ Acquisition

5.9.10.1

Amplitude

Configuring the amplitude parameters of the analyzer makes the display of the measured signal
visually appealing and minimizes measurement errors. By adjusting these parameters, the signal canbe displayed in the current window in an easily observable format. Once the amplitude parameters
have been modified, the measurement process will commence anew.

Ref Value
The reference line may be positioned top, center or bottom of the marker by setting a reference
value.1.2 Scale/Div
Configuring the unit for each vertical scale division in the logarithmic display can be done by either
manually setting the value or enabling automatic scaling, which is determined by the measured
results.

Attenuation
Based on the magnitude of the input signal, the user configures the corresponding RF front-end
attenuator and amplifier to avoid distortion when presenting large input signals and reduce noise
when dealing with small input signals.

5.9.10.2

Averaging

Enable or disable the averaging calculation option for measurement results.

int.siglent.com

107

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Avg|Hold Number
Averaging|Hold count N represents the counter when the trace type is set to ‘Average’. In a single
measurement (Single) and any valid trace type set to ‘Average’, the scan will stop when the counterreaches N.
A higher (Average|Hold) count can reduce the influence of noise or other random signals, highlighting
the stable characteristics of the signal.

Average Mode
Select the type of control used for the averaging function. This determines the average operation
after the specified number of data acquisitions (average count) has been reached. Options include:

Exponentialr
The measure average operation continuously calculates a weighted average for each index using a
specified number of averages.

RepeatEach time the specified average is reached, the measurement resets the average counter.

Command format[:SENSe]:WAVeform:AVERage:TCONtrol[:SENSe]:WAVeform:AVERage:TCONtrol?

Instructions

Set average modeGet average mode

Parameter Typeenumeration

Parameter Range

EXPOnentialr|REPEat

ReturnEnumeration :EXPOnentialr|REPEat

Example:WAVeform:AVERage:TCONtrol REPEat

5.9.10.3

Measuring time

Set the time for collecting signals.

Command format[:SENSe]:WAVeform:SWEep:TIME[:SENSe]:WAVeform:SWEep:TIME?

Instructions

Set measuring time
Set measuring time

Parameter Type

Float , unit ks , s , ms , usParameter Range

1us ~ 10s

Return

Float

Example:WAVeform:SWEep:TIME 100ms

5.9.10.4

Sampling rate

Set the rate of signal collection, that is, the logarithm of IQ collected by 1s.

108

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format[:SENSe]:WAVeform:SRATe[:SENSe]:WAVeform:SRATe?

Instructions

Set Sampling rate
Get Sampling rate

Parameter Type

Float , unit Hz , kHz , MHz , GHz

Parameter Range

1kHz ~ 20MHz

ReturnFloat , UNIT Hz

Example:WAVeform:SRATe 200kHz

5.9.10.5

Sampling period

The inverse of the sampling rate. Only commands can be used for query, but Settings are notsupported.

Command format[:SENSe] :WAVeform:APERture?

Instructions

Get the Sampling period

ReturnFloat , unit :sExample:WAVeform:APERture?

5.9.10.6
1.

IQ data Acquisition

In the file saving interface, select the file type as. txt to save IQ data. The data length is thenumber of points under the current configuration (sampling time * sampling rate)2.

Acquisition IQ data through SCPI

Command format:SAVE:RAW:IQ

Instructions

Acquisition original data

Parameter Type

Floating + Character

Parameter Range

200~125M

ReturnExample:SAVE:RAW:IQ 1000000,”raw_iq.txt”

By acquisition IQ data through commands, the original data length and saved file name can be
dynamically configured, and the file is saved in the local path by default

5.9.10.7

Operation Demonstration

1.

Input the 16QAM signal through the RF port of SSA5000A.

2.

Use the IQ Acquisition to observe the I/Q signal waveform of the signal:(1) Click→

int.siglent.com

Mode/MeasOK→

pectrum Analyzer(SA)→IQ Acquisition→

Replace / Add.

109

SSA5000A Series User Manual(2) Click

FREQ, configure the center frequency corresponding to the IQ signal.

(3) Click AMPTD, Adjust the reference level, the scale and measurement time to better display
the I/Q waveform on the screen.

110

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual(4) Click

int.siglent.com

Save/Recall, save IQ data as .txt file.

111

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.9.11CCDF

CCDF Instructions
The complementary cumulative distribution function (CCDF) reflects the probability of the peak
power of the measured signal exceeding a certain threshold, which is the peak power greater than
the average power. It can also be said that CCDF can describe the probability of the measured signal
greater than a certain peak to average power ratio. As shown in the figure below, the x-coordinate is
the difference of power, and the y-coordinate is the percentage. Generally speaking, it is to calculate
the average power of a signal and the instantaneous power of each point. For the 0dB point, it is theratio of greater than or equal to the average power of 0dB point in the total number of points.

Figure 5-17 CCDF

Average power:
1.

Average power2.

The probability of a point with greater than average power among all points

Power level that has 10 % of the power;
Power level that has 1 % of the power;
Power level that has 0.1 % of the power;
Power level that has 0.01 % of the power;
Power level that has 0.001 % of the power;
Power level that has 0.0001 % of the power.

112

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Peak value:1.

delta between maximum power and average power

2.

Maximum power

Command format:FETCh:PSTatistic?
:MEASure:PSTatistic?
:READ:PSTatistic?

Instructions

Get the CCDF measurement result

Parameter TypestringReturn

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Example:FETCh:PSTatistic?

5.9.11.1

Average input power
Probability at the average input power level
Power level that has 10 % of the power
Power level that has 1 % of the power
Power level that has 0.1 % of the power
Power level that has 0.01 % of the power
Power level that has 0.001 % of the power
Power level that has 0.0001 % of the power
Peak power
Count

Digital IF BW

BW is the measured channel bandwidth, ranging from 10k to 10M. Bandwidth not only affects the test
range, but also affects the data rate.

Command format[:SENSe]:PSTatistic:BANDwidth[:SENSe]:PSTatistic:BANDwidth?

Instructions

Set channel bandwidth
Acquire channel bandwidthParameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

10k~10M

Return

Float

Example:PSTatistic:BANDwidth 1e6:PSTatistic:BANDwidth?

5.9.11.2

Meas Cycles

Meas Cycles refers to the test cycle, if the test cycle is 2, then after the end of the first test cycle, animage is made and the data of this time is saved. When the second test cycle is over, all the data of
the second cycle and the first cycle are statistically plotted, and then all the statistical points are
removed. Therefore, with the increase of the number of cycles, the number of tests will also increase,and the statistical effect will be closer to the theoretical value.

Command format

int.siglent.com[:SENSe]:PSTatistic:SWEep:CYCLes[:SENSe]:PSTatistic:SWEep:CYCLes?

113

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Instructions

Set test cycle
Get test cycle

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

1~3.2M

ReturnInteger

Example:PSTatistic:SWEep:CYCLes 500:PSTatistic:SWEep:CYCLes?

5.9.11.3

Meas Interval

Meas Interval refers to the length of time for a measurement period.

Command format[:SENSe]:PSTatistic:SWEep:TIME[:SENSe]:PSTatistic:SWEep:TIME?

Instructions

Set the measurement interval
Get the measurement intervalParameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

50us~10ms

Return

Float

Example:PSTatistic:SWEep:TIME:PSTatistic:SWEep:TIME

5.9.11.4

CountsThere are three main control items in MEAS SETUP: Counts, Meas Cycles and Meas Interval. Theirrelationship is as follows:
Counts = Meas Cycles ∗ Meas Interval ∗ Sample Rate
Sample Rate = BW ∗ 1.25
Where 1 ≤ Meas Cycles ≤ 3.2M, 50us ≤ Meas Interval ≤ 10ms, 1k ≤ Counts ≤ 2G.

Command format[:SENSe]:PSTatistic:COUNts?

Instructions

Get points

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

1k~2G

ReturnInteger

Example:PSTatistic:COUNts?

114

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5.9.11.5

Ref/guass trace

Figure 5-18 trace

As shown in the figure above, blue is the saved reference trace; Purple is Gaussian trace; Yellow is
the current trace.
Reference trace
You need to save the reference trace first. After saving the reference trace, you can view thereference trace through the View/Close button.

Command format:CALCulate:PSTatistic:STORe:REFerence

Instructions

Set the save reference trace

Example:CALCulate:PSTatistic:STORe:REFerence

Command format:DISPlay:PSTatistic:RTRace[:STATe]:DISPlay:PSTatistic:RTRace[:STATe]?

Instructions

Set the reference trace switch
Get the reference trace switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

Example:DISPlay:PSTatistic:RTRace 1

Gaussian trace
Open or close the Gauss trace saved inside the machine

int.siglent.com

115

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format:DISPlay:PSTatistic:GAUSsian[:STATe]:DISPlay:PSTatistic:GAUSsian[:STATe]?

Instructions

Set the Gaussian trace switch
Get the Gaussian trace switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

Example:DISPlay:PSTatistic:GAUSsian 1

5.9.11.6 X Scale/Div
Set the scale on the x axis

Command format:DISPlay:PSTatistic:VIEW:WINDow2:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:PDIVision:DISPlay:PSTatistic:VIEW:WINDow2:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:PDIVision?

Instructions

Set the scale on the x axis
Get the X-axis scale

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

0.1~10Return

Float

Example:DISPlay:PSTatistic:VIEW:WINDow2:TRACe:X:PDIVision 1

116

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

6

Real-Time Spectrum Analyzer Mode

This chapter introduces the function keys and menu functions of the front panel under the Real-Time
Spectrum Analyzer Mode.

6.1

Frequency & SPAN

6.1.1

Frequency & Span

Set the frequency-related parameters and functions of the analyzer. The sweep will restart every time
the frequency parameters are modified.
The frequency range of a channel can be expressed by these parameters: Start Frequency, Center
Frequency, Stop Frequency and Span. If any of the parameters change, the others will be adjusted
automatically in order to ensure the coupling relationship among them:f center  (f start  f stop)/2
f span  f stop  f start, Wheref s p a n is the span.

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer?

Instruction

Sets the center frequency of the spectrum analyzer.
Gets the center frequency.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range

2.5kHz~27.9999975 GHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:FREQuency:CENTer 0.2 GHz

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt?

Instruction

Sets the start frequency of the spectrum analyzer.
Gets the start Frequency.

Parameter Range

0 Hz ~ 27.9999975 GHz

Example:FREQuency:STARt 100 Hz

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP?

Instruction

Sets the stop frequency of the spectrum analyzer.
Gets the stop frequency.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range

5kHz ~ 28 GHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:FREQuency:STOP 1.0 GHz

int.siglent.com

117

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN?

Instruction

Sets the frequency span. Setting the span to 0 Hz puts the analyzer into zero span.
Gets span value.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range

5kHz~40MHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:FREQuency:SPAN 1 GHz

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:FULL

Instruction

Sets the frequency span to full scale.

Example:FREQuency:SPAN:FULL

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:PREVious

Instruction

Sets the frequency span to the previous span setting.

Example:FREQuency:SPAN:PREVious

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:HALF[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:DOUBle

Instruction

Sets the frequency span to half/double of the current span setting.

Example:FREQuency:SPAN:HALF

6.1.2

Freq Offset

Set the frequency offset value to illustrate the frequency conversion between the measured device
and the input of the spectrum analyzer.
This parameter does not affect any hardware settings of the spectrum analyzer, but onlychanges the display values of center frequency, start frequency and stop frequency.

To eliminate the frequency offset value, the frequency offset value can be set to 0 Hz.

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:OFFSet[:SENSe]:FREQuency:OFFSet?

Instruction

Sets the frequency offset of the spectrum analyzer.
Gets the frequency offset.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range-100 GHz ~ 100 GHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:FREQuency:OFFSet 1 GHz

6.1.3

Freq Step

Setting the value of Freq Step will change the direction key step of center frequency, start frequency,
stop frequency and frequency offset.
118

At a fixed step change the value of the center frequency can reach the purpose of switching
int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

measurement channels rapidly and continuously.


There are two kinds of frequency step modes: Auto and Manual. In Auto mode, the Freq step is
1/10 of the span in Non-zero span or equals the RBW while in Zero Span. In Manual mode, you
can set the step using the numeric keys.

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement][:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement]?

Instruction

Specifies the center frequency step size.
Gets the center frequency step.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range

1 Hz ~ 40 MHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP 2 MHz

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO?

Instruction

Specifies whether the step size is set automatically based on the span.
Gets center frequency step mode.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF

int.siglent.com

119

SSA5000A Series User Manual

6.2

BW

Set the RBW (Resolution Bandwidth) and filter type. Resolution Bandwidth.
Set the resolution bandwidth in order to distinguish between signals which have frequency
components that are near one another.


Reducing the RBW will increase the frequency resolution.



RBW varies with the span (non-zero span) in Auto RBW mode.



Under under the rectangular window filter, the RBW is fixed at 49.938kHz.

RBW value range is related to filter type, please refer to filter type section for details.
Table 6-1 RBWParameter

Explanation

Kaiser100.431kHz ~3.314MHz

Hanning

74.98kHz ~2.47MHz

Flattop

188.462kHz ~ 6.22MHz

Gaussian

98.797 kHz ~ 3.26MHzBlackman-Harris

100.19kHz~ 3.31MHz

Rectangular49.938KHz

Command Format[:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution]?

Instruction

Specifies the resolution bandwidth. For numeric entries, all RBW types choose thenearest (arithmetically, on a linear scale, rounding up) available RBW to the value
entered.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz

Parameter Range

None

ReturnFloat, Unit: Hz

Example:BWIDth?

Command Format[:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO?

Instruction

Turns on/off auto resolution bandwidth state.
Gets the resolution bandwidth state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:BWID:AUTO On

120

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command Format[:SENSe]:FILTer:TYPE KAISer | HANNing | FLATtop | GAUSsian | BHARris |RECTangular[:SENSe]:FILTer:TYPE?

Instruction

Sets FFT window function.
Gets FFT window function.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Return

KAIS
HANN
FLAT
GAUS
BHAR
RECT

Example:FILT:TYPE KAIS

int.siglent.com

121

SSA5000A Series User Manual

6.3

Sweep

Sets parameters about the Sweep functions, including acquisition time, sweep mode, sweep times,
etc.

6.3.1

Acquisition Time

Set the acquisition time of real-time spectrum analyzer within the real-time analysis span. The
acquisition time can be set in “Auto” or “Manual” mode and the default is “Auto”.

Command Format[:SENSe]:ACQuisition:TIME[:SENSe]:ACQuisition:TIME？

Instruction

Sets Acquisition time.
Gets Acquisition time.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: ks, s, ms, us

Parameter Range

27.5 ms ~ 40 s

ReturnFloat, unit: sDefault

29.998ms

Menu

Sweep > Acq Time

Example:ACQuisition:TIME 2s

6.3.2

Sweep

Set the sweep mode in single or continuous, the default is continuous. The corresponding icon of thesweep will be displayed in the status bar at the left of the screen.
6.3.2.1

SingleSet the sweep mode to “Single”. You can set the sweep times , and execute the set number of scans
every time you press “single time”.

6.3.2.2

Numbers

Set the sweeps times for a single sweep. In single sweep mode, the system executes the specified
sweeps times and the number shown on the icon in the status bar at the left of the screen varies withthe process of the sweep.

6.3.2.3

Continue

Set the sweep mode to “Continue”. The character Cont on the parameter icon denotes the analyzer
is sweeping continuously.


If the instrument is in single sweep mode and no measurement function is enabled, press thiskey and the system will enter continuous sweep mode and sweep continuously if the trigger
conditions are satisfied.



122

If the instrument is in single sweep mode and a measurement function is on, press this key andint.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

the system will enter continuous sweep mode and measure continuously if the trigger conditions
are satisfied.


In continuous sweep mode, the system will send a trigger initialization signal automatically andenter the trigger condition judgment directly after each sweep.

Command format:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF|ON|0|1:INITiate:CONTinuous?

Instructions

Sets continuous sweep mode on-off.
Gets continuous sweep mode state.

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF

6.3.2.4

Pause/Resume

Press the pause key to pause after the sweep of current frame is completed; press the continue key
to continue the sweep of the real-time spectrum analyzer if it is in the continuous sweep mode, and if
it is in the single sweep mode, the number of times the spectrum analyzer continues to sweep if thenumber of times the single scanning is not completed. Continue without clearing historical data after
pause.

Command Format:DISPlay:PAUSe OFF|ON|0|1:DISPlay:PAUSe?

Instruction

Pause current sweeep (pause at the end of the current sweep).

Parameter Type

None

Parameter Range

None

ReturnNone

Example:DISPlay:PAUSe 1

6.3.2.5

RestartRestart will clear all historical data, and restart sweeping to records new data.

Command Format:INITiate[:IMMediate]

Instruction

Restarts the current sweep.

Parameter Type

None

Parameter Range

None

ReturnNone

Default

None

Menu
Exampleint.siglent.com:INITiate:IMMediate123

SSA5000A Series User Manual

6.4

Amplitude

Set the amplitude parameters of the analyzer. Through modifying these parameters, signals undermeasurement can be displayed in a proper mode for easier observation and minimum error.

6.4.1

Ref Level

Set the maximum power or voltage that can be currently displayed in the trace window. The value isdisplayed at the upper left corner of the screen grid.
The maximum reference (Ref) level available is affected by the maximum mixing level; input
attenuation is adjusted under a constant maximum mixing level in order to fulfill the following
condition:

The reference level is an important parameter of the spectrum analyzer, which indicates the upper
limit of the current dynamic range of the spectrum analyzer. When the energy of the signal to bemeasured exceeds the reference level, it may produce nonlinear distortion or even overload alarm.

It is necessary to know the nature of the signal to be measured and carefully select the reference
level to obtain the best measurement effect and protect the spectrometer.

Command Format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel?

Instruction

This command sets the reference level for the Y-axis.
Gets reference level.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: dBm, dBmV, dBuV, dBuA, V, W

Parameter Range

Unit is dBm : -170 dBm ~ 23 dBm
Unit is dBmV : -123.01 dBmV ~ 69.99 dBmV
Unit is dBuV : -63.01 dBuV ~ 129.99 dBuV
Unit is dBuA : -96.99 dBuA ~ 96.01 dBuA
Unit is Volts : 707.11pV ~ 3.16 V
Unit is Watts : 0W ~ 199.53m W

ReturnFloat, unit: dBm

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:RLEVel 20 DBM

6.4.2

Attenuator

Set the value for the internal attenuator of the RF input. So that the large signal can be low distortionand the small signal can pass through the mixer with low noise.

Input attenuation can be set up to auto or manual mode.
Auto mode: the attenuation value is automatically adjusted according to the state of preamplifier
and the current reference level.

124

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

The maximum input attenuation can be set to 31 dB. When the set parameters do not meet theabove formula, you can adjust the reference level by yourselve.

Command format[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation?
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO?

Instructions

Sets/gets the attenuation value

Parameter type

IntegerParameter Range

0 dB ~ 50 dB

ReturnInteger , unitdB

Example:POWer:ATTenuation 10

6.4.3

RF Preamp

Control the state of the internal preamplifier (PA) located in the RF input signal path. When thesignal-under-measurement is small, turning on the preamplifier can reduce the displayed averagenoise level to aid distinguishing small signals from the noise.
The corresponding icon “PA” will appear at the left side of the screen when the preamplifier is turnedon.

Command format[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe]?

Instructions

Sets/gets the preset amplifier inside the switch spectrometer

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:POWer:GAIN ON

6.4.4

Scale

Set the logarithmic units per vertical grid division on the display. This function is only available when
the scale type is set to “log”.


By changing the scale, the displayed amplitude range is adjusted.

Current signal amplitude range that can be displayed:
The Minimum range: Reference level –10 × current scale value.
The Maximum range: The reference level.

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision?

Instructions

Sets/gets the scale on which trace logarithms are displayed

Parameter type

Float

int.siglent.com

125

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Parameter Range

1 dB ~ 20 dB

ReturnFloat , unitdB

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:PDIVision 10 dB

6.4.5

Unit

The unit can be dBm, dBmV, dBuV, Volts and Watts. The default unit is dBm.
The conversion between units is as follows:
dBm = 10lg (Volts 2
1
×
)
R
1mW
Volts

dBμV = 20lg ( 1μV )Volts
dBmV = 20lg ()
1mV
Volts2
R
Where R represents the input impedance, the default is 50 ohms.
Watts =The impedance selection here only represents the numerical calculation, and does not represent theswitching of the actual impedance. After switching the input impedance, the display of the powerclass units will not change, and the amplitude and energy class units will change accordingly.

Command format:UNIT:POWer DBM|DBMV|DBUV|V|W:UNIT:POWer?

Instructions

Sets/gets the display unit of magnitude

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

DBM|DBMV|DBUV|DBUA|V|W

ReturnEnumeration: DBM|DBMV|DBUV|V|W

Example:UNIT:POWer DBMV

126

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

6.5

Trigger

The trigger type can be PvT, frequency template trigger (FMT), Free Run and External.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce IMMediate|PVT|EXTernal:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce?

Instructions

Setting the Trigger TypeGet trigger type

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

IMMediate: Free to trigger
PVT: pvttrigger
EXTernal:external trigger

ReturnEnumeration: IMM| PVT |EXT

Example:TRIGger:SOURce IMMediate

6.5.1

Free Run

Trigger conditions are met at any time, which means trigger signals are generated continuously.

6.5.2

PvT

When the detected video signal voltage exceeds the PvT trigger level, a trigger signal is generated.
6.5.2.1

Trigger Level

Set the trigger level when PVT is triggered. The trigger level line TL and the value of the trigger level
will be displayed on the screen.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:LEVel:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:LEVel?

Instructions

Set the PVT trigger level
Gets the PVT trigger level

Parameter type

Float , unit dBm

Parameter Range-300dBm ~ 50dBm

Return

Float

Example:TRIGger:LEVel:LEVel 0.5 dBm

6.5.2.2

Trigger Delay

Set the trigger delay when PVT is triggered

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:DELay:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:DELay?

Instructions

Set the PVT trigger delay
Gets the PVT trigger delay

Parameter type

Float , unitks , s , ms , us , ps , ns

int.siglent.com

127

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Parameter Range

0~500ms

Example:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel: DELay 20ms

6.5.3

External

In this mode, an external signal (TTL signal) is input from the [TRIGGER IN] connector at the rear
panel and trigger signals are generated when this signal fulfills the specified trigger edge condition.

6.5.3.1

Trigger Edge

Set the trigger edge in external trigger to the rising (Pos) or falling (Neg) edge of the pulse.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal:SLOPe?

Instructions

Set the trigger along the falling edge | along the rise
Get trigger edge

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

POSitive
NEGative

ReturnEnumeration:POS|NEG

Example:TRIGger:EXTernal:SLOPe POSitive

6.5.3.2

Trigger Delay

Set the trigger delay when external trigger is triggered

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal:DELay:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal:DELay?

Instructions

Set the EXTernal trigger delay
Gets the EXTernal trigger delay

Parameter type

Float , unitks , s , ms , us , ps , ns

Parameter Range

0~500ms

Return

Float

Example:TRIGger[:SEQuence]: EXTernal: DELay 20ms

128

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

6.5.4

FMT

Real-time frequency template limiting allows users to limit acquisition based on specific events in thefrequency domain. The user can customize the template shape and select the frequency templatemask type (greater than, less than, within and outside the template) according to the actual needs, or
set the template action (normal, beep and stop), and the defined frequency template can also be
saved as LIM file.
6.5.4.1

Template Editing

Mask TypeYou can customize the template shape and select the frequency template mask type (greater than,less than, within and outside the template) according to the actual needs.

Build
User can generate a template point table from the selected trace.

Point
Set frequency template points, which can be deleted or added.

6.5.4.2

Template Status

Template is effective or invalid.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FMT:STATe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FMT:STATe?

Instructions

Example Set the template trigger status
Gets the template trigger status

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|1

Example:TRIGger:FMT:STATe on

6.5.4.3

Template FMT Action

NormalDisplay the fmt area on the screen after Out of fmt mask

Beep
A beep is emitted after Out of fmt mask.

Stop
The waveform stops refreshing after Out of fmt mask.

int.siglent.com

129

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FMT:ACTion NORMal|BEEPer|STOP:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FMT:ACTion?

Instructions

Set the template trigger action | chirp | normal stop
Gets the template trigger action

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

NORMalBEEPerSTOP

ReturnEnumeration: NORM | BEEP| STOP

Example:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FMT:ACTion STOP

130

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

6.6

Trace

The sweep signal is displayed as a trace on the screen.

Command format:TRACe[1]|2|3 [:DATA]?

Instructions

Get trace data

ReturnStringExample:TRACe:DATA?

Command format:TRACe[:DATA]:SPECtrum?

Instructions

Obtain SPECtrum data

ReturnStringExample:TRACe: SPECtrum?

Command format:TRACe[:DATA]:PVT?

Instructions

Obtain PVT data

ReturnStringExample:TRACe: PVT?

6.6.1

Select Trace

The real-time spectrum analyzer allows for up to three traces to be displayed at the same time. Eachtrace has its own color (Trace A - Yellow, Trace B - Whtie, Trace C - Red). All traces can be set
parameter independently. As a default, analyzer will choose Trace A and set the type of the trace as
Clear Write.

6.6.2

Trace TypeSet the type of the current trace or disable it. The system calculates the sampled data using a
specific operation method according to the trace type selected and displays the result. Trace types
include Clear Write, Max Hold, Min Hold, View, Average and Blank.
Clear Write
Erases any data previously stored in the selected trace, and display the data sampled in real-time ofeach point on the trace.

Max Hold
Retain the maximum level for each point of the selected trace. Update the data if a new maximum
level is detected in successive sweeps.

Min Hold
Display the minimum value from multiple sweeps for each point of the trace and update the data if a

int.siglent.com

131

SSA5000A Series User Manual

new minimum is generated in successive sweeps.

Command format:TRACe[1]|2|3:TYPE WRITe|MAXHold|MINHold| AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3:TYPE?

Instructions

Sets/gets the display type of trace

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

WRITe: The trace is in normal mode, and the data is updated
MAXHold: Displays the maximum value of traces
MINHold: Displays the minimum trace value
AVERage: average

ReturnEnumeration: WRITE|MAXH|MINH| AVER

Example:TRAC1:TYPE MINH

6.6.3

Trace State

Blank
Disable the trace display and all measurements of this trace.

Average
Set the averages times of the selected trace. and set the average number of traces.
More averages can reduce the noise and the influence of other random signals; thus, highlighting thestable signal characteristics. The larger the averages times is, the smoother the trace will be.

Command format:TRACe[1]|2|3:DISPlay[:STATe]:TRACe[1]|2|3:DISPlay[:STATe]?

Instructions

Sets/gets the display state of the trace

Parameter type

Enumeration: ACTI |BLAN

Parameter Range

ACTIve: The trace is in normal mode, and data is updated

ReturnBLANk: clears trace data
Enumeration: ACTI | BLAN

Example:TRACe2:DISPlay BLANk:TRACe2:DISPlay?

6.6.4

Detect

The analyzer displays the sweep signal on the screen in the form of a trace. For each trace point, theanalyzer always captures all the data within a specific time interval and processes (Peak, Average,etc.) the data using the detector currently selected, then it displays the processed data (a single data
point) on the screen.
Select an appropriate detector type according to the actual application in order to ensure theaccuracy of the measurement.
The available types are Pos Peak, Neg Peak, Sample and Average. The default is Pos peak.
132

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Positive PeakFor each trace point, Positive Peak detector displays the maximum value of data sampled within thecorresponding time interval.
Negative PeakFor each trace point, Negative Peak detector displays the minimum value of data sampled within thecorresponding time interval.
SampleFor each trace point, Sample detector displays the transient level corresponding to the central time
point of the corresponding time interval. This detector type is applicable to noise or noise-like signal.
Average
For each trace point, Average detector displays the average value of data sampled within thecorresponding time interval.
Command format[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3[:FUNCtion][:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3[:FUNCtion]?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the trace detection type

Parameter type

Enumeration NEG|POS|SAMP|AVER|

Parameter Range

NEGative: NEGative peak value
POSitive: indicates a POSitive peak value
SAMPle: SAMPle

ReturnEnumeration: NEG|POS|SAMP|AVER

Example:DETector:TRAC1 AVERage

Command format[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe:PVTime[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe:PVTime?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the trace detection type

Parameter type

Enumeration NEG|POS|SAMP|AVER

Parameter Range

NEGative: NEGative peak value
POSitive: indicates a POSitive peak value
SAMPle: SAMPle

ReturnEnumeration: NEG|POS|SAMP|AVER

Example:DETector:TRACe:PVTime AVERage

Command format[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe:SPECtrogram[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe:SPECtrogram?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the trace detection type

Parameter type

Enumeration NEG|POS|SAMP|AVER

Parameter Range

NEGative
POSitive
SAMPleReturnEnumeration: NEG|POS|SAMP|AVER

Example:DETector:TRACe:SPECtrogram AVERage

int.siglent.com

133

SSA5000A Series User Manual

6.7

Marker & Peak

The marker appears as a rhombic sign (as shown below) for identifying points on a trace. You caneasily read the amplitude, frequency and sweep time of the marked point on the trace.
The analyzer allows for up to eight/four pairs of markers to be displayed at one time, but only one pairor a single marker is active every time.
You can use the numeric keys, knob or direction keys to modify the desired frequency or time as well
as view the readouts of different points on the trace.

6.7.1

Select Marker

Select one of the eight markers. The default is Marker1. When a marker is selected, you can set its
type, trace to be marked, readout type and other related parameters. The enabled marker will appear
on the trace selected through the Select Trace option and the readouts of this marker are also
displayed in the active function area and at the upper right corner of the screen.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X?

Instructions

Sets/gets the value of the marker point X axis
This command takes effect only when the marker mode is not OFF：:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE
If the marker readout type is frequency, the parameter is frequency.
When the marker readout type is time, the value is time. Reference
commands::CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:READout

Parameter type

frequency , Float , unit:Hz , kHz , MHz , GHz , default Hzor time , Float , unitus , ms , s , ks , default s

Parameter Range

0 Hz ~ max span or 10 ms ~ 1000 s

ReturnWhen the marker readout type is frequency, the reading is frequency, floating point
type, in Hz;
When the marker readout type is time, the reading is time, floating point type, in s;
When the marker readout type is cycle, the reading is cycle, floating point type, unit s;

Example:CALCulate:MARKer4:X 0.4 GHz:CALCulate:MARKer4:X 200 ms:CALCulate:MARKer4:X?

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:Y:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:Y?

Instructions

Read/Set the value of the Y-axis of the marker point, which can also be used to readthe marker noise in the marker function.
To execute this command, ensure that the marker is in the non-off state.
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range

None

ReturnFloat , unit dBm

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:Y?
Return: -25

134

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

6.7.2

Select Trace

Select the trace to be marked by the current marker. Valid selections include A, B, C.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:TRACe 1|2|3:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:TRACe?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the marker trace

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

1|2|3|4|5|6

ReturnEnumeration

ExampleCALCulate:MARK:TRAC 1

6.7.3

Marker Type

Marker supports 4 types: normal, differential, fixed, off. Depending on the type of cursor, the readingand position of the cursor are also different when the trace is refreshed.
6.7.3.1

NormalOne of the marker types. It is used to measure the X (Frequency or Time) and Y (Amplitude) valuesof a certain point on the trace. When selected, a marker with the number of the current marker (suchas “1”) appears on the trace.


If no active marker exists currently, a marker will be enabled automatically at the center
frequency of the current trace.

You can use the numeric keys, knob or direction keys to move the marker. The readouts of themarker will be displayed at the upper right corner of the screen.

6.7.3.2

Delta

One of the marker types. It is used to measure the delta values of X (Frequency or Time) and Y(Amplitude) between the reference point and a certain point on the trace. When selected, a pair ofmarkers appears on the trace: Fixed Related Marker (marked by a combination of the marker
number and letter “ + ”, such as “ 2+ ”) and the Delta Marker (marked by the “∆”, such as “ 1∆2 ”).


After the marker selects “Delta”, the original marker will become the delta measurement marker,
and the related marker of the incrementing sequence number will become the reference “fixed”
marker

The delta marker is in the "relative to" state, and its X-axis position can be changed; the related
marker is in the "fixed" state by default (the X-axis and Y-axis positions are fixed), but the X-axis
can be adjusted by changing to the "normal" state.

The first row in the upper right corner of the trace area shows the frequency (or time) difference
and amplitude difference between the two markers; the second row in the upper right corner of
the trace area shows the X axis and amplitude value of the related marker.

int.siglent.com

135

SSA5000A Series User Manual

6.7.3.3

Fixed

One of the marker types. When “Fixed” is selected, the X-axis and Y-axis of the marker will notchange by the trace and can only be changed through the menu. The fixed marker is marked with"+".
After the marker selects “Delta”, the original marker will become the delta measurement marker, andthe related marker of the incrementing sequence number will become the reference “fixed” marker.

6.7.3.4

Off

Turn off the marker currently selected. The marker information displayed on the screen and functions
based on the marker will also be turned off.
Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE POSition|DELTa|FIXed|OFF:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MODE?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the marker mode

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

POSition
DELTa
FIXed
OFF

ReturnEnumeration: POS|DELT|FIX|OFF

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:MODE POSition

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF

Instructions

Close all markers

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF

136

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

6.7.4

Relative To“Relative to” is used to measure the delta values of X (Frequency or Time) and Y (Amplitude)
between two markers which can mark on different traces.
After the marker selects “Delta”, the original marker will become the delta measurement marker, andthe related marker of the incrementing sequence number will become the reference “fixed” marker

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:REFerence 1|2|3|4:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:REFerence?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the marker relative toParameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8

ReturnEnumeration

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:REFerence 3

6.7.5

Peak->CFSet the current peak frequency to the center frequency.

6.7.6

Update Peak/Maximum Peak

Searches for maximum peaks and marks them with specified cursors.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum

Instructions

Marker searches for maximum peaks and marks them with the specified marker(If peak-to-peak value is on, peak-to-peak value search is carried out; otherwise,
single peak value search is carried out)

Example:CALCulate:MARKer4:MAXimum

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:NEXT

Instructions

Marker searches for the next peak and marks it with the specified marker

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:MAXimum:NEXT

6.7.7

Minimum Peak

Searches for minimum peaks and marks them with specified cursors.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MINimum

Instructions

Marker searches for the minimum peak and marks it with the specified marker

Example:CALCulate:MARKer4:MINimum

int.siglent.com

137

SSA5000A Series User Manual

6.7.8

Left Peak

Search for and mark the nearest peak which is located at the left side of the current peak and meetsthe peak search condition.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:LEFT

Instructions

Marker searches for left peaks and marks with the specified marker.

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:MAXimum:LEFT

6.7.9

Right Peak

Search for and mark the nearest peak which is located at the right side of the current peak and meetsthe peak search condition.
Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:RIGHt

Instructions

Marker searches for right peaks and marks with the specified marker.

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:MAXimum:RIGHt

6.7.10Peak PeakExecute peak search and minimum search at the same time and mark the results with delta pairmarkers. Wherein, the result of peak search is marked with the delta marker and the result of
minimum search is marked with the reference marker.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:PTPeak

Instructions

Performs a peak-to-peak search, marking with the specified marker

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:PTPeak

6.7.11Countinuous Peak

Enable or disable continuous peak search. The default is Off. When enabled, the system will always
execute a peak search automatically after each sweep in order to track the signal undermeasurement.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:CPSearch[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:CPSearch[:STATe]?

Instructions

Enable the continuous peak search function
Gets the status of the continuous peak search function switch

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:CPSEarch ON

138

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

6.7.12Marker to

6.7.12.1

M->CF

Set the center frequency of the analyzer to the frequency of the current marker.


If the Normal marker is selected, the center frequency will be set to the frequency of the current
marker.



If the Delta or Delta Pair marker is selected, the center frequency will be set to the frequency of
the Delta Marker.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:CENTer

Instructions

Sets/gets the value of the marker X axis to the center frequency .If the marker is notopen, this command automatically turns the marker on the center frequency.

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:CENTer

6.7.12.2

M->Start Freq

Set the start frequency of the analyzer to the frequency of the current marker.


If the Normal marker is selected, the start frequency will be set to the frequency of the current
marker.



If the Delta or Delta Pair marker is selected, the start frequency will be set to the frequency of
the Delta Marker.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:STARt

Instructions

Sets/gets the value of the marker X axis to the starting frequency, valid when themarker is on

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:STARt

6.7.12.3

M->Stop Freq

Set the stop frequency of the analyzer to the frequency of the current marker.


If the Normal marker is selected, the stop frequency will be set to the frequency of the current
marker.



If the Delta or Delta Pair marker is selected, the stop frequency will be set to the frequency of
the Delta Marker.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:STOP

Instructions

Sets/gets the value of the marker X axis to terminate frequency
If the corresponding marker is not open, sending this command will automatically
open the marker at the end frequency.

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:STOP

int.siglent.com

139

SSA5000A Series User Manual

6.8

Meas & Meas setup

The real-time spectrum analyzer Mode provides several observation window combinations, including
Density, spectrum+spectrogram, spectrogram, PvT, 3D+spectrogram.

Command format:DISPlay:VIEW[:SELect] {type}:DISPlay:VIEW[:SELect]?

Instructions

Sets the current display view.
Query the current view.

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

DENSity: Density spectrum
SSPectrum: Spectrum + spectrum
SPECtrogram: spectrum
PVT: Power time

Return

DENS|SSP| SPEC|PVTExample:DISP:VIEW DENS:DISP:VIEW?

6.8.1

Density

Figure 6-1 Density

The “Density” view provides a good understanding of the frequency band and signals.Since themeasurements are gap free and all signal samples are represented in the display, it is possible to see
most of the signals in the band at a glance or over a short measurement time.Individual display
updates combine thousands of spectra and shows the signal dynamics and unexpected behavior.

140

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

The “Density” view uses colour of bitmaps to represent the signal density. Density is defined as thenumber of probability that frequency and amplitude points are hit during the capture interval (Acq
Time).
In this view, the X axis represents frequency, the Y axis represents amplitude, and the colour
represents signal density.
By controlling the brightness of the historical signal point of the “Density” view, the afterglow effectcan be achieved.

6.8.2

Spectrogram

Figure 6-2 Spectrogram

In the “Spectrogram” display, the same spectral data is shown with a time dimension added to thespectrum display. “Spectrogram” records the relationship between the frequency-domaincharacteristics of each event and time.
In this view, the X axis represents frequency, the Y axis represents time, and the colour represents
signal amplitude.
The information area in the upper left corner of the “Spectrogram” display shows the real-time of thelatest spectral data (relative to the start measurement), the total number of generated waveform
frames, and the waveform display range.
In the "paused" state, the user can observe the historical trace by moving display trace (D1, D2), or
the historical range of the waveform data displayed in the waveform area by view start and view end.
In the run state, the view interval offset is 0 by default, that is, the latest historical data is displayed,

int.siglent.com

141

SSA5000A Series User Manual

while D1 and D2 are the latest trace by default.
Reading makers on traces D1 and D2, observe the position (time of occurrence) of thecorresponding traces in the historical data, as well as the frequency and amplitude of signals.
Compared with the latest trace, it can trace up to 50000 frames in the future. When the total numberof generated waveforms is more than 50000 frames, the historical data of more than 50000 frames
will be discarded.

6.8.3

Spectrum + Spectrogram

Figure 6-3 Spectrum + Spectrogram

The top view is spectrum which is shown as amplitude vs. frequency, and the bottom view sispectrogram which is mentioned above.
The display trace (D1, D2) specified in the spectrogram is shown as amplitude vs. frequency in the
spectrum.
The traces in the spectrum view will refresh when modifying the positions on the y-axis of display
trace (D1, D2) in the spectrogram, and when the frequency of the maker in the spectrum view ismodified, the maker in the spectrogram will also move on the x-axis.

142

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

6.8.4

PvT

Figure 6-4 PvT

In the time domain, after the input data (IQ data) of FFT is detected, the corresponding PvT data canbe obtained. The detection period is also the corresponding acquisition time. The Aladdin RTSA
supports up to 50000 PVT traces for cyclic storage, and each PvT trace corresponds to aspectrogram trace.

6.8.5

Meas setup

Open the parameter setting menu corresponding to the currently selected measurement window.
The menu of this key only displays the setting items related to the current measurement function.
Please view the relevant menu according to the current measurement window.

6.8.5.1

Average | Hold Times

Average|Hold Times N, which is the counter when the trace type in Density view is "Average", "MaxHold" and "Min Hold". In a single measurement (Single), and any valid trace type is "average", "maxhold" or "min hold", the sweep stops when the counter reaches N.
Larger average | hold times can reduce the influence of noise or other random signals, thereby
highlighting stable signal characteristics in the signal.

Command format

int.siglent.com[:SENSe]:AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:COUNt[:SENSe]:AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:COUNt?

143

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Instructions

Sets/gets the average number of traces

Parameter type

IntegerParameter Range

1 ~ 999

ReturnInteger

Example:AVERage:TRACe1:COUNt 10

Command format[:SENSe]:AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3:CLEar

Instructions

Restart the average.

Example:AVERage:TRACe2:CLEar

6.8.5.2

Persistence

Sets the time when a frequency / amplitude display point's brightness fades in the persistence
bitmap.


In finite mode, you can customize the afterglow duration. And the length of time that thebrightness of a point decays from 100% to 0%.

In infinite mode, the display brightness of each point is 100% without attenuation, but its
probability will change with the measurement time.

Command format:DISPlay:VIEW:DENSity:PERSistence:DISPlay:VIEW:DENSity:PERSistence?

Instructions

Set the duration of afterglow
Query the duration of the afterglow

Parameter type

Float , unit ks , s , ms , usParameter Range

0 s ~ 10 s

ReturnFloat , unit s

Example:DISP:VIEW:DENS:PERS 5s

Command format:DISPlay:VIEW:DENSity:PERSistence:INFinite:DISPlay:VIEW:DENSity:PERSistence:INFinite?

Instructions

Turn on or off afterglow Unlimited mode.
Query the setting status of unlimited afterglow mode.

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:DISP:VIEW:DENS:PERS:INF ON

6.8.5.3

Display Trace

Controls the frame number of the spectrum where traces D1 and D2 are displayed.


Ogram View Start, Ogram View Stop
This parameter sets the range of historical trace numbers to be displayed. It only works inSpectrum, Spectrum+Spectrum, PvT mode, and the measurement state is paused. The start
position is at the bottom of the view and the end position is at the top of the view. Limited by the144

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

size of the view frame, the start position and end position are linked.
For Spectral Mode: End Position – Start Position = 600.
For Spectrum + Spectrum Mode: End Position – Start Position = 298.
For PvT Mode: End Position – Start Position = 298.

Command format:DISPlay:VIEW:SPECtrogram:TRACe:STOP:DISPlay:VIEW:SPECtrogram:TRACe: STOP?

Instructions

Sets the termination trace for display
Query the termination trace displayed

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range

Return

Float

Example:DISP:VIEW:SPEC:TRAC:STOP 600:DISP:VIEW:SPEC:TRAC:STOP?

Select Display Trace
The two display traces are only used in the Spectrum, PvT, and Spectrogram+Spectrum
mode.
In the running state, they are always associated with the latest refreshed trace.
In the pause state, access to historical in-frame data is achieved by setting Display Trace Offset.
Select trace D1 or D2, D1 and D2 will be displayed in different colors. It takes effect underSpectrum, Spectrum+Spectrum, and PvT. Under Spectrum + Spectrum, PvT, the selectedtrace will be displayed in the foreground, and the other trace will be covered.

Trace offset
In the pause state, the control displays the historical trace numbers of traces D1 and D2. In
non-suspend mode, this number bit cannot be modified.

Command format:DISPlay:VIEW:SPECtrogram:TRACe:OFFSet:DISPlay:VIEW:SPECtrogram:TRACe: OFFSet?

Instructions

Sets the trace offset displayed
Query the trace offset displayed

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range
Return

Float

Example:DISP:VIEW:SPEC:TRAC:OFFSet 600:DISP:VIEW:SPEC:TRAC:OFFSet?

6.8.5.4

Color

Sets the color display scheme for RTSA.

Command format

int.siglent.com:DISPlay:VIEW:THEMe WARM | COLD | GRAY:DISPlay:VIEW:THEMe?

145

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Instructions

Sets/Gets the color display scheme.

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

WARM | COLD | GRAY

ReturnEnumeration

Example:DISPlay:VIEW:THEMe WARM

6.8.5.5

Global center frequency

Set whether the current CF acts on other scan modes at the same time.

Command format:INSTrument:COUPle:FREQuency:CENTer:INSTrument:COUPle:FREQuency:CENTer?

Instructions

Set global CF
Get global CF

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

Example:INSTrument:COUPle:FREQuency:CENTer 0:INSTrument:COUPle:FREQuency:CENTer?

6.8.5.6

Limit

RTSA masks allow users to limit acquisitions based on specific events in the frequency domain, thisfeature also only works in Density mode. The user can customize the mask data and select thefrequency template mask type (upper or lower) according to actual needs, and can also set the mask
action (normal, buzzer and stop), the user can define up to 6 different templates, the defined
frequency template can be saved as a LIM file.


Mask Enable
Open or close the current template.
Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FMT:STATe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FMT:STATe?

Instructions

Get/Set the mask state.

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|1

Example:TRIGger:FMT:STATe on

Template type
Set template type: upper/lower limit.



Edit the template
The user can choose to fit the template from the specified trace, specify the template to test the
specific trace, set the template points, set the frequency/amplitude interpolation method

146

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

between the template points, save and load the template points.
Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE UPPer|LOWer:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the restriction type

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

UPPer|LOWer

ReturnEnumeration

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:TYPE LOWer

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:X:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:X?

Instructions

Set the limit point template frequency offset
Gets the limit point template frequency offset

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range

0 ~ 26.5G

Return

Float

Example:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:X 1MHz

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:Y:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:Y?

Instructions

Sets the limit point template amplitude offset
Gets the limiter template amplitude offset

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range-350 dB~380 dB

Return

Float

Example:CALCulate:LLINe5:Offset:Y -10

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DATA val1,val2:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DATA?

Instructions

Sets/gets restricted data
(Clears previous data)

Parameter typeval1 : frequency : Float,
val2 : Ampl :Float

Parameter Range

val1 : related with Spanval2 : -400 dBm~330 dBm

Returnval1 : frequency : Float,
val2 : Ampl :Float

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:DATA 100,-20,200,-25(Add two points: (100 ,-20) and (200 ,-25)):CALC:LLINe1:DATA?

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:ADD val1,val2:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:POINt:DELete

Instructions

Add limit point
Delete limit points

Parameter typeval1 : frequency : Float,
val2 : Ampl : Float

int.siglent.com

147

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Parameter Range

val1 : related with Spanval2 : -400 dBm~330 dBm

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:ADD 100,-20:CALCulate:LLINe2:POINt:DELete 2

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe:ALL:DELete

Instructions

Delete specified restrictions
Delete all restrictions

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe:ALL:DELete

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TRACe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TRACe?

Instructions

Select the limit trace

Parameter type

IntegerParameter Range

1~6

Return

1~6

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:TRACe 3

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:INTerpolate:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:INTerpolate:TYPE?

Instructions

Set/Query the frequency difference type

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

LOG|LIN

Return

LOG|LIN

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:FREQuency:INTerpolate:TYPE LOG

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:CMODe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:CMODe?

Instructions

Set or query the frequency reference type

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

FIXed|RELAtive

ReturnFIXed|RELAtive

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:FREQuency:CMODe FIX

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE?

Instructions

Set or query the range difference type

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

LOG|LIN

Return

LOG|LIN

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1: AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE LOG

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6: AMPLitude:CMODe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6: AMPLitude:CMODe?

148

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Instructions

Set or query the amplitude reference type

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

FIXed|RELAtive

ReturnFIXed|RELAtive

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2: AMPLitude:CMODe FIX

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:COPY:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:COPY?

Instructions

Copy the limit

Parameter type

IntegerParameter Range

1~6

Return

1~6

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:COPY 5

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:BUILd:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:BUILd?

Instructions

Fitting a trace

Parameter type

IntegerParameter Range

1~6

Return

1~6

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2: BUILd 1:CALCulate:LLINe2: BUILd?

Template switch
All templates are valid or invalid.



Template limit action
Normal: Displays the restricted area on the screen after exceeding the restricted range.
Beep: A beep sounds when the limit is exceeded.
Stop: The waveform stops refreshing when it exceeds the limit range.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FMT:ACTion NORMal|BEEPer|STOP:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FMT:ACTion?

Instructions

Get/Set mask action

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

NORM | BEEP| STOP

ReturnNORM | BEEP| STOP

Example:TRIGger:FMT:ACTion STOP

int.siglent.com

149

SSA5000A Series User Manual

7

Modulation Analyzer Mode

MA mode includes digital modulation analysis (DMA) and analog modulation analysis (AMA). PressMode

key to select and add the expected mode to window management.

Press

Meas Setup

key to enter the corresponding measurement parameter configuration menu.

According to the actual needs, select the required parameter configuration options, obtain thecorresponding output waveform and observe the analysis results.

7.1

Digital Modulation Analysis (DMA)

Through digital signal analysis, a series of indicators such as error vector magnitude, magnitude
error, and phase error can be obtained.

7.1.1

Settings

7.1.1.1

Average|Hold times

Average|Hold Times N, is the counter when the trace type is "average", "max hold" and "min hold". Ina single measurement (Single), and any valid trace type is "average", "max hold" or "min hold", thesweep stops when the counter reaches N.
Larger (average|hold) times can reduce the influence of noise or other random signals, thereby
highlighting stable signal characteristics in the signal.

Command format[:SENSe]:AVERage[:STATe][:SENSe]:AVERage[:STATe]?

Instructions

Set the average measurement status
Query the average measurement status

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

ReturnEnumeration

Example:AVERage ON

Command format[:SENSe]:AVERage:COUNt[:SENSe]:AVERage:COUNt?

Instructions

Set the average number of measurements
Query the average number of measurements

Parameter type

IntegerParameter Range

1 ~ 1000

ReturnInteger

Example:AVERage:COUNt 20

7.1.1.2

Statistic

Turn on the statistics function, the measurement results will display the maximum and minimum
values of the statistics, turn off the statistics function, the measurement results will only display the150

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manualreal-time measurement value. Statistics are disabled by default.

After performing a remeasurement, the statistical results will be cleared and the statistics will berestarted. If the averaging function is turned on, the average calculation of the measurement results
will also be cleared and restarted.

Command format[:SENSe]:STATistic:STATe[:SENSe]:STATistic:STATe?

Instructions

Set digital demodulation measurement statistics status
Query the statistical status of digital demodulation measurements

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

ReturnEnumeration

Example:STATistic:STATeON

Command format:CALCulate:RESTart

Instructions

Restart the statistical measurements

Example:CALCulate:RESTart

int.siglent.com

151

SSA5000A Series User Manual

7.1.2

Demod

7.1.2.1

Demod Type & Format

Modulation types are as follows:
QAM modulation :8QAM , 16QAM , 32QAM , 64QAM , 128QAM , 256QAM

PSK modulation :BPSK , QPSK , 8PSK , DBPSK , DQPSK , D8PSK , pi/4 DQPSK ,pi/8 DQPSK , OQPSKFSK modulation :2FSK , 4FSK , 8FSK , MSK

ASK modulation :2ASK

Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:MODulation[:SENSe]:DDEMod:MODulation?

Instructions

Sets the digital demodulation type
Gets the digital demodulation type

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

ASK2
MSK
BPSK
QPSK
PSK8
DBPSK
DQPSK
DPSK8
OQPSK
PI4DQ
PI8D8
QAM16
QAM32
QAM64
QAM128
QAM256
FSK2
FSK4
FSK8
FSK16

ReturnEnumeration

Example:DDEMod:MODulation FSK8

152

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format:READ:DDEMod?

Instructions

Obtain digital demodulation results
if demod type is ASK it will return:
ASK err rms (% rms)
ASK err peak (% pk)
symbol position of ASK err peakcarrier power
carrier offset
ASK depth
If demod type is FSK it will return:
1.FSK err rms (% rms)
2.FSK err peak (% pk)
3.symbol position of FSK err peak
4. carrier power
5.carrier offset
6.FSK deviation
If If demod type is MSK,PSK,QAM it will return:
1. EVM rms (% rms)
2. EVM peak (% pk)
3. symbol position of EVM peak
4.magnitude error rms (% rms).
5. magnitude error peak (% pk)
6.symbol position of magnitude error peak
7.phase error rms (deg)8.phase error peak (deg pk)
9.symbol position of phase error peak
10. frequency error (Hz)
11. IQ offset
12. SNR(MER) (dB)
13. quadrature error (deg)
14. gain imbalance (dB)Parameter type

None

Parameter Range

None

ReturnStringExample:READ:DDEMod?

7.1.2.2

Symbol Rate

Set the analyzer symbol rate (symbols per second) to match the system (signal).
The symbol rate setting is limited by the analyzer maximum bandwidth (BW_max).

Command format:DDEMod[:FORMat]:SRATe:DDEMod[:FORMat]:SRATe?

Instructions

Sets the digital demodulation symbol rate
Read digital demodulation symbol rate

Parameter type

IntegerParameter Range

1000 ~ 25000000
The sign point is 4 , Maximum sign rate is 25e6
The sign point is 6 , Maximum sign rate is 25e6

int.siglent.com

153

SSA5000A Series User Manual
The sign point is 8 , Maximum sign rate is 18.75e6
The sign point is 10 , Maximum sign rate is 15e6
The sign point is 12 , Maximum sign rate is 12.5e6
The sign point is 14 , Maximum sign rate is 10.714285e6
The sign point is 16 , Maximum sign rate is 9.375e6
ReturnInteger

Example:DDEMod:SRATe 2000

7.1.2.3

Points / Symbol

Sets the number of points for demodulating each symbol. The settable values are 2, 4, 8, 10, 12, 14,
and 16.

Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod[:FORMat]:SYMBol:POINts[:SENSe]:DDEMod[:FORMat]:SYMBol:POINts?

Instructions

Sets digital demodulation symbol points
Query digital demodulation symbol points

Parameter type

Discrete

Parameter Range

4 , 6 , 8 , 10 , 12 , 14 , 16

ReturnDiscrete

ExampleDDEMod:SYMBol:POINts 14

7.1.2.4

Meas Interval

Set the length of digital demodulation analysis and display.

Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod[:FORMat]:RLENgth[:SENSe]:DDEMod[:FORMat]:RLENgth?

Instructions

Set digital demodulation measurement length
Get digital demodulation measurement length

Parameter type

IntegerParameter Range

16 ~ 4096

ReturnInteger

Example:DDEMod:RLENgth 200

7.1.2.5

Constelletion Setting

Edit the symbol order of constellation positions.

154

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

7.1.3

Filter

7.1.3.1

Meas Filter

Enable and select Meas Filter.
Meas Filters that can be set include:

Root Raised CosineRaised Cosine



Gauss



Half Sine

Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:FILTer[:MEASurement][:SENSe]:DDEMod:FILTer[:MEASurement]?

Instructions

Set up digital demodulation measurement filter
Obtain digital demodulation measurement filter

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

OFF
RRCosine
RECTangle
GAUSsian
HSIN

Return0|1

Example:DDEMod:FILTer HSIN

7.1.3.2

Ref Filter

Enable and select Ref Filter.
Ref Filters that can be set include:

Root Raised CosineRaised Cosine



Gauss



Half Sine

Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:FILTer:REFerence[:SENSe]:DDEMod:FILTer:REFerence?

Instructions

Sets the digital demodulation reference filter
Query digital demodulation reference filter

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

OFF
RRCosine
RECTangle
GAUSsian
HSIN

ReturnEnumeration

Example:DDEMod:FILTer:REFerenceOFF

int.siglent.com

155

SSA5000A Series User Manual

7.1.3.3

Filter Length

Sets the filter length used by the analyzer. This feature applies to MeasRef Filter and Ref Filter.

Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:FILTer:RLENgth[:SENSe]:DDEMod:FILTer:RLENgth?

Instructions

Set the filter length
Gets the filter length

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range

0~128

Return

Float

Example:DDEMod:FILT:RLENgth 5

7.1.3.4

Alpha/BT

Sets the filter alpha characteristic value of the Sqrt Nyquist raised cosine and root raised cosine
Nyquist filters used by the analyzer, or the BT value of the Gauss filter. This feature applies to Meas
Ref Filter and Ref Filter.

Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:FILTer:ABT[:SENSe]:DDEMod:FILTer:ABT?

Instructions

Set the filter alphaGets the filter alphaParameter type

Float

Parameter Range

0-1

Return

Float

Example:DDEMod:FILT:ABT 0.5

7.1.4

Burst/sync Search

7.1.4.1

Search Length

Specifies the time range (length) to search for signals.
The search length must satisfy Search Length ≥ 1.2 * Meas Interval / Symbol Rate. If modifying theMeas Interval or Symbol Rate causes the length not to meet the conditions, the analyzer willautomatically calculate and match the minimum value.

Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:SLENgth[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:SLENgth?

Instructions

Set the search length
Gets the search length

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range

1.28ms-4.672ms

Return

Float

Example:DDEMod:SYNC:SLENgth 0.5ms

156

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

7.1.4.2

Burst Search

Burst search measures the burst power (pulses) in a signal and uses this to segment and isolate thesignal for subsequent display and analysis. Using burst search, you can avoid the interference ofinvalid signals to the analysis process.

Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt[:STATe][:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt[:STATe]?

Instructions

Set the burst search switch
Query the burst search switch

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

ReturnEnumeration

Example:DDEMod:SYNC:BURS ON

7.1.4.3

Burst Search Threshold

Setting the thresholds for the rising and falling edges of the burst, in accordance with the peak powerof the measured signal.

Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt:THREshold[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt:THREshold?

Instructions

Set the burst search threshold
Gets the burst search threshold

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range-200dBm~200dBm

Return

Float

Example:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt:THREshold -10

7.1.4.4

Burst Min Length

Setting the min Length for the rising and falling edges of the burst

Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt:MINLength[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt:MINLength?

Instructions

Set the minimum burst length
Gets the burst minimum length

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range

10us~10ms

Return

Float

Example:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt:MINLength 0.5ms

7.1.4.5

Burst Min Gap

Setting the min gap for the rising and falling edges of the burst.
Represents the minimum distance (in "symbols") between adjacent bursts. The default value is 1

int.siglent.com

157

SSA5000A Series User Manual

symbol in order to make sure that the burst search finds bursts that are very close to each other.
However, in case the "capture buffer" does not contain very close bursts, it is recommended that you
increase the value. This makes the burst search faster and also more robust for highly distorted
signals.
Note that this parameter only influences the robustness of the burst search. It should not be used to
explicitly exclude certain bursts from the measurement. For example, setting the minimum gap length
to 100 "symbols" does not ensure that the burst search does not find bursts that have a very small
gap.

Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt:MINGap[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt:MINGap?

Instructions

Set the minimum burst interval
Gets the minimum burst intervalParameter type

Float

Parameter Range

10us~10ms

Return

Float

Example:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt:MINGap 0.5ms

7.1.4.6

Sync Search

Synchronization search is to search for synchronization codewords in the measured signal, and use
this to segment and isolate the signal for subsequent display and analysis.
The synchronous codeword is a string of symbols (coding), so its length must be an integer multipleof the number of bits (number of bits) of each symbol.

Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:SWORd[:STATe][:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:SWORd[:STATe]?

Instructions

Set the synchronization search switch
Query the synchronization search switch

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

ReturnEnumeration

Example:DDEMod:SYNC:SWORd ON

7.1.4.7

Sync Offset

Specifies the time (in symbols) between the start of the measurement data and the start of the sync
word. If positive, the sync word starts after the start of the measurement data. If negative, the sync
word starts before the start of the measurement data.

Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:SWORd:OFFSet[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:SWORd:OFFSet?

Instructions

Set the synchronous search offset
Gets the synchronous search offset

158

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual
Parameter type

IntegerParameter Range-10000~10000

ReturnInteger

Example:DDEMod:SYNC:SWORd:OFFSet 2

7.1.4.8

Sync Pattern

Edit and display sync codewords.

Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SEGMent:BER:PATTern[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SEGMent:BER:PATTern?

Instructions

Set the BERT symbol
Get BERT symbol

Parameter type

StringParameter Range

Binary bit, maximum 320 bits

ReturnStringExample:DDEMod:SEGMent:BER:PATTern “0011”

7.1.5

BERT

Bit error rate test function, that is, the analyzer uses the measurement result of the current
demodulation analysis and the preset reference signal to compare by bit to obtain the bit error rate.
Reference signals that can be preset in the editing interface and can be saved to a user profile (.stafile) and loaded.

Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SEGMent:BER:STATe[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SEGMent:BER:STATe?

Instructions

Setting the BERT switch
Querying the BERT switch

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

ReturnBoolean

Example:DDEMod:SEGMent:BER:STATe ON

Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SEGMent:BER:PATTern[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SEGMent:BER:PATTern?

Instructions

Setting the BERT pattern
Querying the BERT pattern

Parameter type

StringParameter Range

Binary bit

ReturnStringExample:DDEMod:SEGMent:BER:PATT “0011”

int.siglent.com

159

SSA5000A Series User Manual

7.2

Analog Modulation Analysis (AMA)

Used for modulation analysis of analog signals, a series of indicators such as carrier power,
modulation rate, THD can be obtained through analysis.
Analog modulation analysis includes AM, FM, PM modulation.
The modulation mode, IF bandwidth, and equivalent filter can be selected, and the data can beaveraged.

Command format:READ:ADEMod?

Instructions

Obtain the simulation demodulation result
if demod type is AM it will return:carrier_power
mod_rate
am_depth
sinadcarrier_offset
if demod type is FM it will return:carrier_power
mod_rate
fm_deviation
sinad
carrier_offset
if demod type is PM it will return:carrier_power
mod_rate
pm radians
sinadcarrier_offset

ReturnStringExample:READ:ADEMod?

160

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

7.2.1

Demod Type

Analog modulation analysis includes AM, FM, PM modulation.

Command format[:SENSe]:ADEMod:STYLe[:SENSe]:ADEMod:STYLe?

Instructions

Sets the analog demodulation type (cannot be set when not analog demodulation)
Get analog demodulation type (cannot be queried when not analog demodulation)

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

AM: analog AM
FM: analog frequency modulation
PM: Analog phase modulation

ReturnEnumeration：AM|FM|PM

Example:ADEMod:STYLe AM

7.2.2

IFBW

The IFBW specifies the size of the IF bandwidth of the analyzed signal. If the setting is incorrect, it
will affect the accuracy of the measurement results. The intermediate frequency bandwidth IFBW
should be as small as possible, which can improve the signal-to-noise ratio of demodulation. IFBW
can be set to: 1.2MHz, 960kHz, 600kHz, 480kHz, 300kHz, 240kHz, 120kHz, 96kHz and 60kHz.
For "AM" modulation analysis, the IFBW should be more than twice the modulation frequency; for"FM" modulation analysis, the IFBW should be more than twice the sum of the frequency offset plus
the modulation frequency.

Command format:CALCulate:IFBW:INDEx:CALCulate:IFBW:INDEx?

Instructions

Set the analog demodulation if bandwidth
Obtain analog demodulation intermediate frequency bandwidthParameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

0-8

Return0-8

Example:CALCulate:IFBW:INDEx 5

7.2.3

EqLPF

The EqLPF specifies the equivalent low-pass filter bandwidth of the analyzed signal. If the setting isincorrect, it will affect the accuracy of the measurement results. EqLPF is an additional low-pass filter,
which can be used to measure lower the modulation frequency of the modulation signal. The
bandwidth of EqLPF is fractional times that of IFBW, and there are 6 gears to choose from, namely
IFBW/6, IFBW/20, IFBW/60, IFBW/200, IFBW/600 and IFBW/2000.
The bandwidth of the EqLPF should be as small as possible, which can improve the signal-to-noise
ratio of demodulation, but at the same time, it should be greater than or equal to the modulation
int.siglent.com

161

SSA5000A Series User Manualfrequency.

Command format:CALCulate:EQLPf:INDEx:CALCulate:EQLPf:INDEx?

Instructions

Set up analog demodulation equalization filter
Obtain analog demodulation equalization filter

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

0-6

Return

0-6

Example:CALCulate:EQLPf:INDEx 2

7.2.4

AverageTurn on or off the averaging option for measurement results, and you can set the number of items
involved in the averaging calculation. When the averaging option is turned off, the “Average” columnof the measurement results becomes “Current”. The larger the average number, the more stable the“average” value.

162

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

7.3

Freq

7.3.1

Freq & Span

In MA mode, only the center frequency can be configured.
Span cannot be set and is only used to show the equivalent channel bandwidth under the current
configuration.

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer?

Instruction

Sets the center frequency.
Gets the center frequency.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range

0 Hz ~ 28 GHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer 300 MHz

7.3.2

CF Step

The frequency step is the length of using the direction keys to step when the center frequency is set.
Pay attention to the following points during use:
Changing the value of the center frequency in fixed steps can achieve the purpose of switching themeasurement channels quickly and continuously.

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement][:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement]?

Instruction

Sets frequency step.
Gets frequency step.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range

1 Hz ~ 100 MHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement] 20 MHz

int.siglent.com

163

SSA5000A Series User Manual

7.4

BW

7.4.1

EQBW

The MA mode does not support configuring the resolution bandwidth, and only displays theequivalent resolution bandwidth.

Command Format[:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution]?

Instruction

Querys equalization BW.

Parameter Type

None

Parameter Range

None

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:BWIDth?

7.4.2

Window

The EQBW filter offers several different window functions that you can switch in real-time based onyour measurement needs. The available window functions include Rectangular window, Hamming
window, Hanning window, Flattop window, Blackman window. The Flattop window is used by default.

Command Format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:FFT:WINDow:TYPE[:SENSe]:DDEMod:FFT:WINDow:TYPE?

Instruction

Sets window function.
Gets window function.

Parameter Type

Enumeration
RECTangular
HAMMing :HANNing
FLATtop
BLACkmanParameter Range

None

ReturnEnumeration
RECT
HAMM
HANN
FLAT
BLAC

Example:DDEMod:FFT:WINDow:TYPE BLAC

164

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

7.5

Sweep

7.5.1

Measure/Sweep Control (Single/Continue/Restart)

Sweep/Measure:
Single/Continue controls the analyzer to perform a single sweep/measurement or continuous
sweep/measurement.
Restart:Restart the current sweep or measurement. In particular, in the continue mode, modifying someparameters will equivalently perform a restart sweep or measurement.

Command Format:INITiat[:IMMediate]

Instruction

Restart the current sweep.
:INITiate:RESTart and :INITiate:IMMediate perform exactly the same function.

Parameter Type

None

Parameter Range

None

ReturnNone

Default

None

Menu
Example:INITiate:IMMediate

Command Format:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF|ON|0|1:INITiate:CONTinuous?

Instruction

Sets continuous sweep mode on-off.
Gets continuous sweep mode state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF

Command Format

ABORt

Instruction

This command is used to stop the current measurement. It aborts thecurrentmeasurement as quickly as possible, resets the sweep and trigger systems,
and puts the measurement into an "idle" state.
If the analyzer is set for Continuous measurement, it sets up the measurement andinitiates a new data measurement sequence with a new data acquisition (sweep)
taken once the trigger condition is met.
If the analyzer is set for Single measurement, it remains in the "idle" state until
an :INIT:IMM command is received.

Parameter Type

None

Parameter Range

None

ReturnNone

Default

None

Menu

None

Example

INIT;ABORt

int.siglent.com

165

SSA5000A Series User Manual

7.6

Trigger

7.6.1

Trigger Source

The analyzer provides a variety of trigger sources to suit different triggering needs.
Free Run
Free trigger is the default use mode of the analyzer, at this time, the spectrum analyzer loops andcontinuously scans.

Video
Using the video trigger mode, a transient signal with a very short time can be captured. In thisworking mode, the signal will be triggered and displayed on the screen only when the rising or fallingedge of a signal touches the Trigger Level.

External
External triggering provides more abundant triggering functions. If you want to realize periodic
triggering and delayed triggering, you can choose the working mode of external triggering. In thismode, the trigger is controlled by the rising edge or falling edge of the external input signal, and asquare wave signal of a certain frequency can be used for periodic triggering, and the trigger delay
time can be adjusted by setting the trigger delay.

PeriodWhen Periodic is selected, the analyzer uses the built-in period timer signal as a trigger. The trigger
event is set by the period timer parameter, which is modified by the offset and periodic sync Src.
Use this trigger when there is a periodic signal but no reliable signal to trigger. You can synchronize
the periodic signal to an external event (using the periodic sync Src) to get closer to a reliable trigger
signal.
If no synchronization source is selected, then the internal timer will not be synchronized with any
external timed events.

Command format:TRIGger:SOURce:TRIGger:SOURce?

Instructions

sets the trigger source.
gets the trigger source.

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range"IMMediate ", "VIDeo ", "EXTernal ","FRAMe"

Return"IMM", "VID", "EXT" ,"FRAMe"

Example:TRIGger:SOURce VID

166

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

7.6.2

Trigger Level

Sets the amplitude level of the video trigger (only absolute levels are supported). A trigger occurs
when the slope of the video signal crosses this level.
When the selected trigger source is video trigger, the trigger level will be displayed as an orange line,
and the right end of the line will be displayed as:
Trig Line: xxxx dBm

Command format:TRIGger: {type}:LEVel:TRIGger: {type}:LEVel?

Instructions

sets the trigger level.
gets the trigger level.
{type}: "VIDeo", "EXTernal"

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range-300~50dB

Return

Float

Example:TRIGger:VIDeo:LEVel -20

7.6.3

Trigger Slope

Set the external trigger and video trigger trigger polarity. The options are rising edge trigger andfalling edge trigger.

Command format:TRIGger: {type}:SLOPe:TRIGger: {type}:SLOPe?

Instructions

sets the trigger edge.
gets the trigger edge.
{type}: " VIDeo ", " EXTernal "Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range"POS", "NEG"

Return"POS", "NEG"

Example:TRIGger: EXTernal:SLOPe:TRIGger: VIDeo:SLOPe?

7.6.4

Trigger Delay

Set trigger delay, negative delay can be set.
The maximum duration of negative delay = 500M/(symbol rate*symbol points*8)

Command format:TRIGger:{type}:DELay:TRIGger:{type}:DELay?
:TRIGger:{type}:DELay:STATe:TRIGger:{type}:DELay:STATe?

Instructions

sets the trigger delay and state.
gets the trigger delay and state.

int.siglent.com

167

SSA5000A Series User Manual{type}:" VIDeo ", " EXTernal " ,"FRAMe"
Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range-500ms-500ms

Return

Float

Example:TRIGger:EXTernal:DELay 5e-3
:TRIGger:FRAMe:DELay?

7.6.5

Zero Span Trigger Delay Compensation (External Trigger )Under normal circumstances, after the trigger is generated, the displayed data and the data at thesame time as the trigger are displayed, but because the processing time of the trigger path and thedata path are different, the data displayed at the trigger time is the previous data. This does not affectthe integrity of the data and will not cause data loss at the trigger point. However, in some cases, it isnecessary to display the zero point of the screen coordinates as the input signal information of thetrigger point. At this time, the function of zero-span trigger delay compensation is required.

7.6.6

Period (Period)

Set the trigger period.

Command format:TRIGger:FRAMe:PERiod:TRIGger:FRAMe:PERiod?

Instructions

Set/Query Period Trigger period

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range

100ns~10s

Return

Float

Example:TRIGger:FRAMe:PERiod 1s

7.6.7

Offset Time(Period)

Adjusts the cumulative offset between the periodic trigger clock and the trigger event. The periodic
trigger clock cannot be seen on the software, only the trigger event can be seen. So if you want toadjust the time of the trigger event, you can only adjust the offset between the periodic trigger clock
and the trigger event, but the absolute value of the internal offset is unknown, and each modification
to the offset is based on the previous Do accumulation.

Command format:TRIGger:FRAMe:OFFSet:TRIGger:FRAMe:OFFSet?

Instructions

Set/Query Period Trigger period offset

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range

0s~10sReturn

Float

Example:TRIGger:FRAMe:OFFSet 1s

168

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

7.6.8

Reset Offset Display (Period)

The reset period triggers the time offset display. Modifying this parameter does not modify theabsolute value of the internal offset.

Command format:TRIGger:FRAMe:OFFSet:DISPlay:RESet

Instructions

Reset Period trigger offset return to zero

Example:TRIGger:FRAMe:OFFSet:DISPlay:RESet

7.6.9

Sync Source (Period)

Set the sync source.

Figure 7-1 Sync Source trigger

Command format:TRIGger:FRAMe:SYNC:TRIGger:FRAMe:SYNC?

Instructions

Set/Query the type of periodic synchronization

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range"OFF", "EXT"

Return"OFF", "EXT"Example:TRIGger:FRAMe:SYNC EXT

int.siglent.com

169

SSA5000A Series User Manual

7.6.10Auto Trigger

Automatic triggering is an auxiliary triggering method used in non-Free run mode. When the userneeds continuous triggering but the triggering conditions of the selected triggering type are notsatisfied, automatic triggering can be used. After using the automatic trigger, the count starts after ameasurement is completed. If the count does not reach the set value and the trigger condition of theselected trigger is satisfied, the count of the automatic trigger will be cleared and the count will berestarted after the next measurement. If the count reaches the set value and the trigger condition of
the selected trigger is not met, the forced trigger condition is met, and then the measurement isperformed according to the normal trigger process.

Command format:TRIGger:ATRigger:STATe:TRIGger:ATRigger:STATe?

Instructions

Set or query the automatic trigger switch

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

Example:TRIGger:ATRigger:STATe 1

Command format:TRIGger:ATRigger:TRIGger:ATRigger?

Instructions

Set or query the automatic trigger time

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range

1us~100s

Return

Float

Example:TRIGger:ATRigger 1s

7.6.11

Hold OffIn trigger inhibition, hold represents inhibition and off represents release. Trigger hold-off can beused for other trigger modes other than Free run mode. Intuitively, trigger hold-off can be understoodas the strictening of trigger conditions, that is, the occurrence of a trigger must not only satisfy thetrigger condition of the selected trigger, but also satisfy the additional conditions in trigger hold-off.

NormalIn normal mode, the count is performed before the trigger, and the next trigger can only be generated
after the count meets the set requirements.
Above
For the rising edge of the video trigger (external trigger), it is required that after the trigger, the actuallevel is still higher than the trigger level (trigger threshold) for at least a specified time.
For the falling edge of video trigger (external trigger), it is required that the actual level is higher than170

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

the trigger level (trigger threshold) for a single accumulation time exceeding the specified time before
triggering.
For the periodic trigger, the trigger moment is high level, the duration is a time period, and the othertime is low level, which can be inferred according to other triggers.
Below
For the rising edge of video trigger (external trigger), it is required that the actual level is lower than
the trigger level (trigger threshold) for a single accumulation time exceeding the specified time before
triggering.
For the falling edge of the video trigger (external trigger), it is required that the actual level is still
lower than the trigger level (trigger threshold) after triggering for at least a specified time.
The periodic trigger can be pushed in the same way.

Command format:TRIGger:HOLDoff:STATe:TRIGger:HOLDoff:STATe?

Instructions

Set or query the trigger holdoff switch

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

Example:TRIGger:HOLDoff:STATe 1

Command format:TRIGger:HOLDoff:TRIGger:HOLDoff?

Instructions

Set or query the trigger holdoff time

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range

0~500ms

Return

Float

Example:TRIGger:HOLDoff 0.01s

Command format:TRIGger:HOLDoff:TYPE:TRIGger:HOLDoff:TYPE?

Instructions

Set or query the trigger holdoff type

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range"NORMal","ABOVe","BELOw"

Return"NORMal","ABOVe","BELOw"

Example:TRIGger:HOLDoff:TYPE ABOVe

int.siglent.com

171

SSA5000A Series User Manual

7.7

Ampt

7.7.1

Attenuator & RF Preamp

According to the amplitude of the input signal, the user can set the corresponding RF front-end
attenuator and amplifier, the purpose of which is to avoid display distortion when inputting large
signals and reduce noise when inputting small signals.

Command Format[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation?

Instruction

Sets the input attenuator.
Gets the input attenuator.

Parameter Type

Integer, unit: dB

Parameter Range

0 dB ~ 51 dB

ReturnInteger, unit: dB

Example[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation 30 dB

Command Format[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO?

Instruction

Sets the input attenuator.
Gets the input attenuator.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO ON

7.7.2

Ref Level & Scale

Displays and configures the reference and scale of the currently selected window. The unit is basedon the unit of the trace data.
Auto Scale and Auto Scale All can be used to adjust the scale of the current and all windows
adaptively to the waveform data.

Command Format:TRACe1|2|3|4:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:TRACe1|2|3|4:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel?

Instruction

This command sets the reference level for the Y-axis.
Gets reference level.
The command is valid if the measurement mode is ASK, FSK, MSK, PSK, QAM andthe data format is not Syms/Errs.

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

If the display type is Log Mag: -1000 ~ 1000
If the display type is Lin Mag: -1000 ~ 1000
If the display type is Real: -1000 ~ 1000
If the display type is Imag: -1000 ~ 1000
If the display type is I-Q: -1000 ~ 1000
If the display type is Constellation: -1000 ~ 1000172

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual
If the display type is I-Eye: -1000 ~ 1000
If the display type is Q-Eye: -1000 ~ 1000
If the display type is Wrap Phase: -1000 ~ 1000
If the display type is Unwrap Phase: -1000 ~ 1000
If the display type is Trellis-Eye: -1e5 ~ 1e9
ReturnFloat

Default
Example:TRACe4:Y:RLEVel 2

Command Format:TRACe1|2|3|4:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:TRACe1|2|3|4:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision?

Instruction

This command sets the per-division display scaling for the y-axis.
Gets Scale/Div when scale type.
The command is valid if the measurement mode is ASK, FSK, MSK, PSK, QAM andthe data format is not Syms/Errs.

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range
Return

Float

Example:TRACe4:Y:PDIVision 2

Command Format:TRACe1|2|3|4[:Y]:AUToscale

Instruction

Sets auto scale.

Parameter Type

None

Parameter Range

None

ReturnNone

Example:TRACe2:AUToscale

int.siglent.com

173

SSA5000A Series User Manual

7.8

Trace

7.8.1

Select Trace

Select the current trace you want to select. After a trace is selected, parameters such as thereference level of the trace can be adjusted. You can also touch the screen and click the window
where the trace is located to select the trace.
After the trace is selected, the mark ">" is displayed to the left of the trace mark.

Command Format:CALCulate:PARameter:COUNt:CALCulate:PARameter:COUNt?

Instruction

Sets trace number.
Gets trace number.

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

1~4

ReturnInteger

Example:CALCulate:PARameter:COUNt 4

7.8.2

LayoutSelect the layout of the screen windows. The layout types are as follows:Single

Stacked 2Grid 1,2

Grid 2x2

Command Format:DISPlay:LAYout

Instruction

Sets trace layout on screen.
Currently, one row, two columns are not supported (1, 2)

Parameter Type

Integer (rows, columns)

Parameter Rangerows 1 ~ 2columns 1 ~ 2ReturnExample7.8.3:DISPlay:LAYout

2,2

Trace Display and Layout（DMA）

Window layout:
You can choose to display 1 to 4 windows, and each window can specify the trace data type.
Symbol table:
Displays the demodulated digital symbol code, which can be expressed in binary or hexadecimal.

174

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

7.8.4

Trace Display and Layout（AMA）

Display up to 3 windows, each window displays different traces, respectively:
Time domain waveform;Frequency domain waveform;

Demodulation result parameters.

7.8.5

Select Trace

Select the trace in order to set the corresponding trace parameters. You can also select the trace byclicking on the trace mark displayed in the left status bar of the screen.

7.8.6

Num of Traces

Set the upper limit of displayed trace numbers. Up to four traces can be displayed simultaneously inthe screen window.

7.8.7

Data

Select the displayed data of the trace.
Command Format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:DATA:NAME:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:DATA:NAME?

Instruction

Sets trace format.
Gets trace format.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

TIME: time
SPECtrum: spectrum
MTIMe: IQ meas time
MSPEctrum: IQ meas spectrum (FFT of IQ Meas Time.)
RTIMe: IQ Reference time (Reconstructed ideal time waveform to compare IQ MeasTime against)
RSPEctrum: IQ Reference spectrum (FFT of IQ Reference time.)
MERRor: IQ Mag Err (Difference in length of the IQ Meas Time vector and IQ Ref
Time vectorat each point in time.)
PERRor: IQ Phase Err (Difference in phase of the IQ Meas Time vector and IQ Ref
Time vector at each point in time.)
EVTime: Error Time (Vector difference between IQ Meas Time and IQ Ref Time ateach pointin time.)
EVSPectrum: Error Vector Spec
SYMSerrs: Syms/Errs
RAWtime: Raw data

ReturnEnumeration

Example:TRACe:DATA:NAME SYMS

int.siglent.com

175

SSA5000A Series User Manual

7.8.8

FormatSelect the displayed format of the trace.

Command Format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:FORMat[:Y]:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:FORMat[:Y]?

Instruction

Sets trace format
Gets trace format

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

MLOG: Log Mag
MLINear: Lin Mag
REAL: RealIMAGinary: Imag
IQ: I-Q
CONStln: Constellation
IEYE: I-Eye
QEYE: Q-Eye
WPHAse: Wrap Phase
UWPHase: Unwrap Phase
TRELlis: Trellis-Eye

Return

MLOG
MLIN
REAL
IMAG
IQ
CONS
IEYE
QEYE
WPHA
UWPH
TREL

Example:TRACe:FORMat

176

MLIN

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

7.8.9

Eye Length

Set the length of the Eye diagram.

Command Format:TRACe:DEMod:EYE:LENGth:TRACe:DEMod:EYE:LENGth?

Instruction

Sets eye length.
Gets eye length.

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

2 ~ 40ReturnInteger

Example:TRACe:DEMod:EYE:LENGth 4

7.8.10

Symbol Table

Display the demodulation digital symbols (binary or hex).

Command Format:TRACe:DEMod:TABLe:FORMat:TRACe:DEMod:TABLe:FORMat?

Instruction

Displays format of Symbol Table data.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

BINary|HEXadecimal

ReturnEnumeration BIN|HEX

Example:TRACe:DEMod:TABLe:FORMat HEX

int.siglent.com

177

SSA5000A Series User Manual

7.9

Marker

7.9.1

Select Marker & Select Trace

To operate a marker, it must first be selected as the marker for the current operation. When there are
multiple active marker, the marker currently operating in the waveform area will be displayed at thefront, while other marker will be hollowed out (filled in black). At this time, the upper right corner of the
waveform area will also display the reading of the current marker. To query the readings of all active
marker, open the marker table ([Marker Settings]:[ Marker Table]).
A marker can only be associated with one trace. When adding a marker, if it is not manually selected,
the marker will be associated with the currently activated trace by default (refer to the trace setting).

7.9.2

Marker Type

Marker supports 2 types : normal,delta,off. Depending on the type of marker, the reading and positionof the marker are also different when the trace is refreshed:

normal: The marker is attached to a trace point, the vertical position of the marker is refreshedsynchronously with the trace refresh, and the reading is the reading of the trace point.



delta: delta marker use a pair of marker to identify the frequency (time) and amplitude difference
between two trace points.
After selecting "delta", a pair of marker will appear on the trace: a fixed reference marker(marked by a marker number and "+", such as "1+") and a difference marker (marked by arelative marker number and a symbol "∆") ” identifier, such as “1∆2”). At this time, the reading in
the upper right corner of the waveform area also displays the frequency (or time) difference andamplitude difference between the difference marker and the reference marker, respectively.
After the marker selects "delta", the original marker will become the difference measurement
marker. If it is not specified, the marker with the current marker number increasing by default will
become the reference "fixed" marker.
The delta marker is in the "relative" state, similar to the "normal" marker, and its X-axis position
can be changed; the reference marker is in the "fixed" state by default (the X-axis and Y-axis
positions are fixed), but can be changed to "normal" by changing state and the X axis can be
adjusted.



off: close marker.

Notice:When opening a marker or modifying parameters, if the marker has never been opened or themarker position exceeds the current span range, the horizontal position of the marker will be thecenter frequency, that is, the center of the waveform area.
A marker's relative marker has one and only one and cannot be itself. A marker can be the relative
marker of multiple marker at the same time.
178

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

When closing a marker, the marker type of other relative markre that it is a relative marker willautomatically change to normal.
Command Format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:ENABle OFF|ON|0|1:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:ENABle?

Instruction

Sets marker state.
Gets marker state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:TRACe1:MARKer1:ENABle ON

Command Format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:TYPE POSition|DELTa|OFF:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:TYPE?

Instruction

Sets marker mode.
Gets marker mode.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

POSition
DELTa
OFF

ReturnEnumeration: POS|DELT|OFF

Example:TRACe:MARKer:TYPE POSition

7.9.3

Marker X

Set the horizontal position parameter of the current marker.
When the [marker Type] of the current marker is [Off], the marker frequency/marker time cannot be
set.
Command Format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X?

Instruction

Sets marker X value.
Gets marker X value.
This command only works when marker is not off.

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range
Return

Float

Example:TRACe:MARKer:X 200:TRACe:MARKer:X?

Command Format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:Y?

Instruction

Gets marker Y value.

Parameter Type

None

Parameter Range

None

Return

Float

Example:TRACe:MARKer:Y?

int.siglent.com

179

SSA5000A Series User Manual

7.9.4

Reset Delta

Pressing this control is exactly the same as pressing the “Delta” selection on the Marker Mode radio
button. The selected marker becomes a Delta Marker . If the selected marker is already a Delta
marker, the reference marker is moved to the current position of the selected marker, thus resetting
the Delta to zero.

7.9.5

Relative To“Relative to” is used to measure the delta values of X (Frequency or Time) and Y (Amplitude)
between two markers which can mark on different traces.
After the marker selects “Delta”, the original marker will become the delta measurement marker, andthe related marker of the incrementing sequence number will become the reference “fixed” marker

Command Format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:REFerence:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:REFerence?

Instruction

Sets reference marker.
Gets reference marker.
Cannot set the current marker to the reference marker.

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

1~4

Return

1~4

Example:TRACe:MARKer:REFerence 3

7.9.6

Marker Couple

When this function is On, moving any marker causes an equal X Axis movement of every othermarker which is Off.

Command Format:CALCulate[:SELected]:MARKer:COUPle OFF|ON|0|1:CALCulate[:SELected]:MARKer:COUPle?

Instruction

Sets marker couple state.
Gets marker couple state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:COUPle

180

ON

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

8

EMI Measurement Mode

The user interface for EMI Measurement mode has three display regions showing information
regarding different setting menus as shown in the figure below.

Figure 8-1 EMI Measurement User InterfaceRegion 1#: Spectrum and setting information of scanning.



Region 2#: Meter graphs, metrics and related setting information.

Region 3#: Signal list with suspect signals populated by searching.

Meas is the default menu of EMI measurement mode as shown in the Figure 6-2. Sequence is very
important for understanding the philosophy of EMI measurement operation because it aligns with the
CISPR test flow. Figure 6–3 shows the EMI test flow recommended by CISPR 16-2-3. A completeroutine measurement consists of a series of routines, i.e. scanning, search and final measurement.
First, the measurement scans the band based on Scan Config settings specified and activated by
the user to capture interference spectrum. You can have up to three traces running with different
detectors and trace types. You can enable limit lines that the spectrums need to meet, and optionally
include a limit margin.
Next, the measurement searches for the peak signal to build a list of peaks called a “signal list”. The

int.siglent.com

181

SSA5000A Series User Manual

search is based on the defined peak excursion and peak threshold under menu Search. A crossmark is added onto the trace for each peak signal found.

Figure 8-2 CISPR-recommended EMI test flow

Figure 8-3 Meas Menu

For each of the peak signals found, the instrument is tuned to the signal frequency in zero span anddwells for the specified dwell time under menu Meas. Each signal in the list is updated with the final
detector and delta limit values when the final measurement is completed.
In some cases, you may not want to run the complete measurement, so you have the flexibility tocontrol the measurement routines. You can choose to just run scan, search, or the final
measurement for only certain specific signals in the signal list under menu Sequence.

The meters window on the right shows the instantaneous amplitude of each of up to three detectors.
Similar to the final measurement, meter consists of making a zero span measurement on thespecified meter frequency using independent detectors and dwell times in menu Meter. Meter
measurement is invalid during scan or a final measurement.

182

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

8.1

Frequency & Span

8.1.1

Meter Frequency

Set the frequency of the meter measurement. The meter frequency value is displayed at the bottomof the meter window.
The frequency of the meters can be at any position, even outside the span displayed on thescreen.

8.1.2

Scan Frequency Mode

Set the scan frequency mode to CISPR standard or user customization.

8.1.3

CISPR Band

Select the scan frequency band base on CISPR standard.

8.1.4

Midspan Frequency

Set the frequency at the midspan of scan.
Modifying the center frequency will modify both the start frequency and stop frequency when the
span is constant (except when the start frequency or stop frequency reaches the boundary).

8.1.5

Start Frequency

Set the start frequency of scan. The start and stop frequencies are displayed at the bottom of the grid
respectively.
The span and center frequency vary with the start frequency when the Span does not reach theminimum. For more details, please refer to “Span”.

8.1.6

Stop Frequency

Set the stop frequency of scan. The start and stop frequencies are displayed at the lower right sidesof the grid respectively.
The span and center frequency vary with the stop frequency. The change of the span will affectother system parameters. For more details, please refer to “Span”.

8.1.7

Span

Set the frequency range of scan.
The start and stop frequency vary with the span when the center frequency is constant.

int.siglent.com

183

SSA5000A Series User ManualThe span can be set down to 100 Hz and up to the full span described in Specifications. Whenthe span is set to the maximum, the analyzer enters full span mode.

Modifying the span may cause an automatic change in RBW if they are in Auto mode.

8.1.8

X Axis Scale

Set the scale type of X-axis to Linear (Lin) or Logarithmic (Log) scale.
In Log scale type, the frequency scale of X-axis is displayed in the logarithmic form.

Command Format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:SPACing:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:SPACing?

Instruction

Sets the The x type
Gets the The x type

Parameter Typeenumeration

Return

LOG/LIN

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X:SPACing LOG:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X:SPACing?

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:OFFSet[:SENSe]:FREQuency:OFFSet?

Instruction

Sets the frequency offset of the spectrum analyzer.
Gets the frequency offset.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range-100 GHz ~ 100 GHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:FREQuency:OFFSet 1 GHz

8.2

BW

Set the Resolution BW of the analyzer. Any change of this parameter will stop the running sequence.

8.2.1

Meter RBW

Set the RBW of meters measurement.

8.2.2

Scan RBW

Set the RBW of scan.


RBW can only be set to 200 Hz, 9 kHz, 120 kHz and 1 MHz with a 6dB shape factor.



Set up RBW will affect sweep points for scanning. For more detail, please refer to Sweep ->Sweep Points.

184

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

8.3

Sweep

8.3.1

Sweep Config

8.3.1.1

RBW / Step

The parameter RBW/Step specifies the scanning step and the number of scanning points under the
specified span.

8.3.1.2

Auto RDS

RDS means RBW divided by Step.
Auto RDS specifies RBW/Step value by span and rbw value.

8.3.1.3

Points

Display the number of scan points under the current configuration. This parameter cannot be
modified.

8.3.1.4

Dwell Time

Specify the dwell time at each scan point.

8.3.1.5

Sweep Time

Display the time to complete a scan under the current configuration. This parameter cannot be
modified.

8.3.2

Sweep Control

8.3.2.1

Scan Single/Continue

Set analyzer to perform single or continuous scan.

8.3.2.2#(Number) of Scan

Specify the number of scans in the sequence or single process.

8.3.2.3

Meter Single/Continue

Set analyzer to perform single or continuous meter process.

int.siglent.com

185

SSA5000A Series User Manual

8.4

Amplitude

Set the amplitude parameters of the analyzer. Through modifying these parameters, signals undermeasurement can be displayed in a proper mode for easier observation and minimum error. Anychange of Ref Level, Attenuator Value, Preamp mode and Ref Offset will restart sweep.

8.4.1

Ref Level

Set the maximum power or voltage that can be currently displayed in the trace window. The value isdisplayed at the upper left corner of the screen grid.
The maximum reference (Ref) level available is affected by the maximum mixing level; input
attenuation is adjusted under a constant maximum mixing level in order to fulfill the following
condition:

Note: the maximum reference level of different machine models may be different, please refer to thedata manual specifically.

Command Format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel?

Instruction

This command sets the reference level for the Y-axis.
Gets reference level.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: dBm, dBmV, dBuV, dBuA, V, W

Parameter Range

Unit is dBm: -170 dBm ~ 23 dBm
Unit is dBmV: -123.01 dBmV ~ 69.99 dBmV;
Unit is dBuV: -63.01 dBuV ~ 129.99 dBuV;
Unit is dBuA: -96.99 dBuA ~ 96.01 dBuA;
Unit is Volts:707.11pV ~ 3.16 V
Unit is Watts: 0W ~ 199.53m W

ReturnFloat, unit: dBm

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:RLEVel 20 DBM

8.4.2

Attenuator

Set the value for the internal attenuator of the RF input. So that the large signal can be low distortionand the small signal can pass through the mixer with low noise.

Input attenuation can be set up to auto or manual mode.
Auto mode: the attenuation value is automatically adjusted according to the state of preamplifier
and the current reference level.

The maximum input attenuation can be set to 50dB, resolution: 2dB. When the set parameters
do not meet the above formula, you can adjust the reference level.

186

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation?

Instructions

Sets/gets the attenuation value

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

0 dB ~ 50 dB (Even gears only)

ReturnInteger , unit dB

Example:POWer:ATTenuation 10

Command format[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO?

Instructions

Sets/gets the auto attenuation value switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO ON

8.4.3

RF Preamp

Control the state of the internal preamplifier (PA) located in the RF input signal path. When thesignal-under-measurement is small, turning on the preamplifier can reduce the displayed noise level
and aid distinguishing small signals from the noise.
The corresponding icon “PA” will appear at the left side of the screen when the preamplifier is turnedon.

Command format[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe]?

Instructions

Sets/gets the preset amplifier inside the switch spectrometer

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:POWer:GAIN ON

8.4.4

Y Axis Unit

Sets the display unit of magnitude.

Command format:UNIT:POWer DBM|DBMV|DBUV|V|W:UNIT:POWer?

Instructions

Sets/gets the display unit of magnitude

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

DBM|DBMV|DBUV|DBUA|V|W

ReturnEnumeration: DBM|DBMV|DBUV|V|W

Example:UNIT:POWer DBMV

int.siglent.com

187

SSA5000A Series User Manual

8.4.5

Y Axis Scale TypeSet the scale type of the Y-axis to Lin or Log. The default is Log.
In Lin mode, the vertical Scale value cannot be changed. The Display area is set for reference
level of 0%.



In Log scale type, the Y-axis denotes the logarithmic coordinate. The value shown at the top of
the grid is the reference level and each grid represent the scale value. The unit of Y-axis willautomatically switch to the default unit (dBm) in Log scale type when the scale type is changed
from Lin to Log.

In Lin scale type, the Y-axis denotes the liner coordinate; the values shown at the top of the gridand the bottom of the grid are the reference level and 0 V. The scale setting function is invalid.
The unit of Y-axis will automatically switch to the default unit (Volts) in Lin scale type when thescale type is charged from Log to Lin.

The scale type does not affect the setting of Y-axis unit.

Set the unit of the Y-axis to dBm, dBmV, dBuV, dBuA, Volts (RMS) or Watts. Default is dBm.
The conversion relationships between units are as follows.

Where, R denotes the reference impedance. The default value is 50Ω and can be adjusted bypressing “Correction -> RF input”. The “75 Ω” impedance is just a numeric value, not a real
impedance. Setting the RF input to 75 Ω will not change the actual input impedance. A 75 Ω
feed-through adapter is required to match 75 Ω circuits to the 50 Ω input of the analyzer.

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision?

Instructions

Sets/gets the scale on which trace logarithms are displayed

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

0.1 dB ~ 20 dB

ReturnFloat , unit dB

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:PDIVision 10 dB

188

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing LINear|LOGarithmic:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the scale display type

Parameter Type

Enumeration: LINear |LOGarithmic

ReturnEnumeration: LIN|LOG

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SPACing LINear

8.4.6

Ref Offset

Assign an offset to the reference level to compensate for gains or losses generated between thedevice under measurement and the analyzer.
The change of this value changes both the reference level readout and the amplitude readout of themarker; but does not impact the position of traces on the screen.

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:RLEVel:OFFSet:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:RLEVel:OFFSet?

Instructions

Sets/gets the frequency offset

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-100 dB~100 dB

ReturnFloat , unitdB

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:RLEVel:OFFSet 2

int.siglent.com

189

SSA5000A Series User Manual

8.5

Trigger

The analyzer provides a variety of trigger functions, users can choose from the trigger menu.

8.5.1

Trigger Source

The analyzer provides a variety of trigger sources to suit different trigger requirements.
Free Run
Free trigger is the default mode of the analyzer, in which the spectrum analyzer sweeps circularly
and continuously.
Video
When the user wants to capture an instantaneous signal that appears for a very short time, the video
trigger mode can be adopted . In this working mode, only when the rising edge or falling edge of asignal touches the Trigger Level, the signal will be triggered and displayed on the screen.
External
External trigger provides users with richer trigger functions. If users want to realize the periodic
trigger and delay trigger spectrum analyzer, they can choose the external trigger mode. In this mode,
it is triggered by the rising or falling edge of the external input signal. The square wave signal with acertain frequency can be periodically triggered, and the delay time can be adjusted by setting the
Trigger Delay option.
Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce?

Instructions

sets the trigger source.
gets the trigger source.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range"IMMediate ", "VIDeo ", "EXTernal "Return"IMM", "VID", "EXT"Example:TRIGger:SOURce VID

8.5.2

Trigger Level

Sets the amplitude level for the video trigger (absolute level only supported). When the video signal
crosses the voltage level with the selected slope, it is triggered.
Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]: {type}:LEVel:TRIGger[:SEQuence]: {type}:LEVel?

Instructions

sets the trigger level.
gets the trigger level.
{type}: "VIDeo", "EXTernal"

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-300 dBm ~50 dBm

Return

Float

Example:TRIGger:VIDeo:LEVel -20

190

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

8.5.3

Trigger Slope

Set the trigger polarity for external trigger, video trigger. The options are rising edge trigger and fallingedge trigger.
The same trigger source uses the same trigger edge for both gating and triggering.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]: {type}:SLOPe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]: {type}:SLOPe?

Instructions

sets the trigger edge.
gets the trigger edge.
{type}: " VIDeo ", " EXTernal "Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range"POS", "NEG"

Return"POS", "NEG"

Example:TRIGger: EXTernal:SLOPe:TRIGger: VIDeo:SLOPe?

8.5.4

Trigger Delay

When scanning is at zero span, negative delay can be set. The time range of negative delay isrelated to the number of sweep points and sweep time:
Maximum negative delay time = [ 496M / ( sweep points * 64 ) - 5] * sweep time
Maximum positive delay time =500ms

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay?

Instructions

sets the trigger delay
gets the trigger delay{type}:" VIDeo ", " EXTernal " ,"FRAMe"

Parameter Type

Float

Return

Float

Example:TRIGger:EXTernal:DELay 5e-3
:TRIGger:FRAMe:DELay?

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay:STATe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay:STATe?

Instructions

sets the trigger delay state.
gets the trigger delay state.
{type}:" VIDeo ", " EXTernal " ,"FRAMe"

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:TRIGger:EXTernal: DELay:STATe 1

int.siglent.com

191

SSA5000A Series User Manual

8.6

Trace

The scan signal is displayed as a trace on the screen.

Command format:TRACe[1]|2|3| [:DATA]?

Instructions

Get trace data

ReturnStringExample:TRACe:DATA?

Command format:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA]ASCii|REAL32| REAL:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA]?

Instructions

Sets/gets the format of trace data read

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

ASCii
REAL32 Floating 32-bit
REAL Floating 64-bit

ReturnEnumeration: ASCii|REAL| REAL32

Example:FORMat ASCii

8.6.1

Select Trace

The analyzer allows for up to four traces to be displayed at the same time. Each trace has its own
color. All traces can be set parameter independently. As a default, analyzer will choose Trace 1 andset the type of the trace as Clear Write.

Command format

TRACe:SELEct
TRACe:SELEct?

Instructions

Sets/gets the current trace

Parameter Type

EnumerationTRACE1-3

ReturnEnumeration: TRACE1-3

ExampleTRACe:SELEct TRACE3

8.6.2

Trace TypeSet the type of the current trace or disable it. The system calculates the sampled data using a
specific operation method according to the trace type selected and displays the result. Trace types
include Clear Write, Max Hold, Min Hold, View, Average and Blank. The corresponding icon of the
trace type will be displayed in the status bar at the left of the screen, as shown in the figure below.
Clear Write
Erases any data previously stored in the selected trace, and display the data sampled in real-time ofeach point on the trace.

Max Hold192

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Retain the maximum level for each point of the selected trace. Update the data if a new maximum
level is detected in successive sweeps. Max Hold is very effective when measuring events that may
take successive scans to measure accurately. Some common applications include FM Deviation, AM
NRSC, and frequency hopping or drift.
Min Hold
Display the minimum value from multiple sweeps for each point of the trace and update the data if a
new minimum is generated in successive sweeps.

Average
Set the averages times of the selected trace.
More averages can reduce the noise and the influence of other random signals; thus highlighting thestable signal characteristics. The larger the averages times is, the smoother the trace will be.
Enabling averaging will take more time to collect the full spectral information because the analyzer
needs to sweep the set average count. The displayed data is averaged in a first-in-first-out fashion.

Command format:TRACe[1]|2|3:TYPE WRITe|MAXHold|MINHold| AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3:TYPE?

Instructions

Sets/gets the display type of trace

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

WRITe: Trace is in normal mode. Update data
MAXHold: Displays the maximum value of traces
MINHold: Displays the minimum value of trace
AVERage: Displays the average value of trace

ReturnEnumeration: WRITE|MAXH|MINH| AVER

Example:TRAC1:TYPE MINH

8.6.3

Trace State

There are four trace states: active, view, blank, and background. Different trace states indicate therefresh and display states of traces:
ActiveRefreshed and displayed trace data.
View
The trace data will not be refreshed, and the current latest trace will be displayed in a fixed frame.

Blank
Trace data is no longer refreshed or displayed

Backgroundint.siglent.com

193

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Refreshed trace data but no display.

Command format:TRACe[1]|2|3:DISPlay[:STATe]:TRACe[1]|2|3:DISPlay[:STATe]?

Instructions

Sets/gets the display status of the trace

Parameter Type

Enumeration: ACTI|VIEW|BLAN| BACKParameter Range

ACTIve: Trace is in normal mode. Update data
VIEW: Stops updating trace to display current trace data
BLANk: Clear trace data
BACKground: Set as background

ReturnEnumeration: ACTI|VIEW|BLAN| BACKExample:TRACe2:DISPlay BLANK:TRACe2:DISPlay?

8.6.4

Detect

The analyzer displays the sweep signal on the screen in the form of a trace. For each trace point, theanalyzer always captures all the data within a specific time interval and processes (Peak, Average,etc.) the data using the detector currently selected, then it displays the processed data (a single data
point) on the screen.
Select an appropriate detector type according to the actual application in order to ensure theaccuracy of the measurement.
The available types are Pos Peak, Neg Peak, Sample, Normal, Average and Quasi Peak. The
default is Pos peak.
Positive PeakFor each trace point, Positive Peak detector displays the maximum value of data sampled within thecorresponding time interval.

Negative PeakFor each trace point, Negative Peak detector displays the minimum value of data sampled within thecorresponding time interval.

SampleFor each trace point, Sample detector displays the transient level corresponding to the central time
point of the corresponding time interval. This detector type is applicable to noise or noise-like signal.

NormalNormal detector (also called ROSENFELL Detector) displays the maximum value and the minimum
value of the sample data segment in turn: Odd-numbered data points display the maximum value
and even-numbered data points display the minimum value. In this way, the amplitude variation194

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

range of the signal is clearly shown.

Average
For each trace point, Average detector displays the average value of data sampled within thecorresponding time interval.

Command format[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3|[:FUNCtion][:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3[:FUNCtion]?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the trace detection type

Parameter Type

Enumeration NEG|POS|SAMP|AVER|NORMAL

Parameter Range

NORMAL: standard
NEGative: Negative peak
POSitive: positive peak
SAMPle:The sampling
AVERage: average,

ReturnEnumeration: NEG|POS|SAMP|AVER|NORMAL

Example:DETector:TRAC1 AVERage

Command format[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3:AUTO 0|1[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3:AUTO?
[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe:AUTO:ALL

Instructions

Set/get trace automatic detection switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

Example:DETector:TRACe3:AUTO 1:DETector:TRACe:AUTO:ALL

int.siglent.com

195

SSA5000A Series User Manual

8.7

Marker & Peak

The marker appears as a rhombic sign (as shown below) for identifying points on a trace. You caneasily read the amplitude, frequency and sweep time of the marked point on the trace.
The analyzer allows for up to eight/four pairs of markers to be displayed at one time, but only
one pair or a single marker is active every time.

You can use the numeric keys, knob or direction keys to modify the desired frequency or time aswell as view the readouts of different points on the trace.

8.7.1

Select Marker

Select one of the eight markers. The default is Marker1. When a marker is selected, you can set its
type, trace to be marked, readout type and other related parameters. The enabled marker will appear
on the trace selected through the Select Trace option and the readouts of this marker are also
displayed in the active function area and at the upper right corner of the screen.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:SELEct:CALCulate:MARKer:SELEct?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the current marker

Parameter Type

Enumeration1-8

ReturnEnumeration: 1-8

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:SELEct 5

8.7.2

Select Trace

Select the trace to be marked by the current marker. Valid selections includeTrace1,2,3.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:TRACe 1|2|3:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:TRACe?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the marker trace

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

1|2|3|4|5|6

ReturnEnumeration

ExampleCALCulate:MARK:TRAC 1

8.7.3
8.7.3.1

Marker Type
NormalOne of the marker types. It is used to measure the X (Frequency or Time) and Y (Amplitude) valuesof a certain point on the trace. When selected, a marker with the number of the current marker (suchas “ 1 ”) appears on the trace.


If no active marker exists currently, a marker will be enabled automatically at the center
frequency of the current trace.

196

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

You can use the numeric keys, knob or direction keys to move the marker. The readouts of themarker will be displayed at the upper right corner of the screen.

The readout resolution of the X-axis (frequency or time) is related to the span. For higher
readout resolution, reduce the span.

8.7.3.2

Delta

One of the marker types. It is used to measure the delta values of X (Frequency or Time) and Y(Amplitude) between the reference point and a certain point on the trace. When selected, a pair ofmarkers appears on the trace: Fixed Related Marker (marked by a combination of the marker
number and letter “ + ”, such as “ 2+ ”) and the Delta Marker (marked by the “∆”, such as “ 1∆2 ”).
After the marker selects “Delta”, the original marker will become the delta measurement marker,

and the related marker of the incrementing sequence number will become the reference “fixed”
marker

The delta marker is in the "relative to" state, and its X-axis position can be changed; the related
marker is in the "fixed" state by default (the X-axis and Y-axis positions are fixed), but the X-axis
can be adjusted by changing to the "normal" state.

The first row in the upper right corner of the trace area shows the frequency (or time) difference
and amplitude difference between the two markers; the second row in the upper right corner of
the trace area shows the X axis and amplitude value of the related marker.



Delta reset. It is only valid when the current marker is a differential marker. If the marker type ofthe relative marker of the current marker is normal or differential, change the horizontal positionof the relative marker to the horizontal position of the current marker; if the marker type of therelative marker is fixed, change the horizontal position and vertical position of the relative marker
to the current one. The horizontal and vertical position of the marker.

8.7.3.3

Fixed

One of the marker types. When “Fixed” is selected, the X-axis and Y-axis of the marker will notchange by the trace and can only be changed through the menu. The fixed marker is marked with"+".
After the marker selects “Delta”, the original marker will become the delta measurement marker, andthe related marker of the incrementing sequence number will become the reference “fixed” marker

8.7.3.4

Off

Turn off the marker currently selected. The marker information displayed on the screen and functions
based on the marker will also be turned off.

Command format

int.siglent.com:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE POSition|DELTa|FIXed|OFF:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MODE?

197

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Instructions

Sets/Gets the marker mode

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

POSition
DELTa
FIXed
OFF

ReturnEnumeration: POS|DELT|FIX|OFF

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:MODE POSition

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe OFF|ON|0|1:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe?

Instructions

Sets/gets the marker switch status

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:STATe ON

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF

Instructions

Close all markers

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8 [:SET]:RESEt:DELTa

Instructions

Difference marker resets to 0
Only valid when the current cursor is a differential marker

Example:CALCulate:MARKer2:RESEt:DELTa

8.7.4

Marker Postion

Displays and sets the position of the marker. Only the x-axis position can be set.
Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X?

Instructions

Sets/gets the value of the marker point X axis
This command takes effect only when the marker mode is not OFF::CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE
If the marker readout type is frequency, the parameter is frequency.
When the marker readout type is time, the value is time. Reference
commands::CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:READout

Parameter Typefrequency , Float , unitHz , kHz , MHz , GHz ,efault Hzor time , Float , unitus , ms , s , ks , default s

Parameter Range

0 Hz ~ max span or 10 ms ~ 1000 s

ReturnWhen the marker readout type is frequency, the reading is frequency, floating point
type, in Hz;
When the marker readout type is time, the reading is time, floating point type, in s;
When the marker readout type is cycle, the reading is cycle, floating point type, unit s;

Example:CALCulate:MARKer4:X 0.4 GHz:CALCulate:MARKer4:X 200 ms:CALCulate:MARKer4:X?

198

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:Y:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:Y?

Instructions

Read the value of the Y-axis of the marker point, which can also be used to read themarker noise in the marker function.
To execute this command, ensure that the marker is in the
onstate.:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

None

ReturnFloat , unitdBm

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:Y?
Return: -25

8.7.5

Relative To“Relative to” is used to measure the delta values of X (Frequency or Time) and Y (Amplitude)
between two markers which can mark on different traces.
After the marker selects “Delta”, the original marker will become the delta measurement marker, andthe related marker of the incrementing sequence number will become the reference “fixed” marker

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:REFerence 1|2|3|4:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:REFerence?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the marker relative toParameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8

ReturnEnumeration

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:REFerence 3

8.7.6

Readout Type

Select a desired readout type for the X-axis for the marker. Different markers can use different
readout types. This setting will change the readout type and affect the marker readings in the activefunction area and at the upper right corner of the screen, but will not change the actual value.

Frequency
In this type, Normal marker shows the absolute frequency. Delta markers and Delta Pair markers
show the frequency difference between the delta marker and reference marker. The default readout
mode in non-zero span is “Frequency”.
Note: This type is invalid in Zero span.
PeriodIn this type, the Normal marker shows the reciprocal of frequency; while Delta marker and Delta Pairmarker show the reciprocal of frequency difference. When the frequency difference is zero, theint.siglent.com

199

SSA5000A Series User Manual

reciprocal is infinite and 100 Ts is displayed.
Note: This type is invalid in Zero span.

Time
In this type, the Normal marker shows the time difference between the marker and the start of thesweep; while Delta marker and Delta Pair marker show the sweep time difference between the deltamarker and reference marker.
The default readout mode in Zero span is Time.

Inverse TimeIn this type, the Normal marker Inverse Time = 1 / Time ;while Delta marker and Delta Pair marker s
Inverse Time = 1 / Δ Time.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:READout
FREQuency | TIME | PERiod | INTIme:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:READout?

Instructions

Sets/gets the marker in X-axis reading mode

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

FREQuency: frequency
TIME
PERiodINVERSE_TIME

ReturnEnumeration: FREQ|TIME|PER| INTIme

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:X:READout FREQuency

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:READout:AUTO 0|1:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:READout:AUTO?

Instructions

Sets/gets the marker in X-axis reading mode auto

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:X:READout:AUTO 1

8.7.7

Marker Lines

Mark the marker with the intersection of horizontal and vertical lines, which is more convenient toquery the marker position in the waveform area.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:LINE:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:LINE:STATe?

Instructions

Sets/gets the marker line switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

200

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer2:X:LINE:STATe 1:CALCulate:MARKer2:X:LINE:STATe?

8.7.8

Marker ->8.7.8.1

M->CF

Set the center frequency of the analyzer to the frequency of the current marker.


If the Normal marker is selected, the center frequency will be set to the frequency of the current
marker.



If the Delta or Delta Pair marker is selected, the center frequency will be set to the frequency of
the Delta Marker.



The function is invalid in Zero span.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:CENTer

Instructions

Sets/gets the value of the marker X axis to the center frequency .If the marker is notopen, this command automatically turns the marker on the center frequency.

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:CENTer

8.7.8.2

M -> CF Step

Set the center frequency step of the analyzer to the frequency of the current marker.


If the Normal marker is selected, the center frequency step will be set to the frequency of thecurrent marker.



If the Delta or Delta Pair marker is selected, the center frequency step will be set to thefrequency of the Delta Marker.



The function is invalid in Zero span.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:STEP

Instructions

Sets/gets the value of the marker X axis to mid-frequency step
If the marker is not open, this command automatically turns the marker on the center
frequency.

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:STEP

8.7.8.3

M -> Start Freq

Set the start frequency of the analyzer to the frequency of the current marker.


If the Normal marker is selected, the start frequency will be set to the frequency of the current
marker.



If the Delta or Delta Pair marker is selected, the start frequency will be set to the frequency of
the Delta Marker.



The function is invalid in Zero span.

int.siglent.com

201

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:START

Instructions

Sets/gets the value of the marker X axis to the starting frequency, valid when themarker is on

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:START

8.7.8.4

M -> Stop Freq

Set the stop frequency of the analyzer to the frequency of the current marker.


If the Normal marker is selected, the stop frequency will be set to the frequency of the current
marker.



If the Delta or Delta Pair marker is selected, the stop frequency will be set to the frequency of
the Delta Marker.



The function is invalid in Zero span.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:STOP

Instructions

Sets/gets the value of the marker X axis to terminate frequency
If the corresponding marker is not open, sending this command will automatically
open the marker at the end frequency.

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:STOP

8.7.8.5

M ->Ref Level

Set the reference level of the analyzer to the amplitude of the current marker.


If the Normal marker is selected, the reference level will be set to the amplitude of the current
marker.



If the Delta or Delta Pair marker is selected, the reference level will be set to the amplitude of
the Delta Marker.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:RLEVel

Instructions

Sets/gets the value of the marker Y-axis as a reference level
If the marker is not open, this command automatically turns the marker on the center
frequency.

Example:CALCulate:MARKer2:RLEVel

8.7.8.6

ΔM->SpanSet the span of the analyzer to the frequency difference between the two markers in Delta marker
type.


If the Normal marker is selected, this function is invalid.



The function is invalid in Zero span.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:DELTa[:SET]:SPAN

Instructions

Sets/gets the difference between the marker and the X axis to sweep widthThis command takes effect only when the marker mode is DELTa

202

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE
Example8.7.8.7:CALCulate:MARKer2:DELTa:SPAN

ΔM->CF

Set the center frequency of the analyzer to the frequency difference between the two markers in
Delta marker type.


If the Normal marker is selected, this function is invalid.



The function is invalid in Zero span.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:DELTa[:SET]:CENTer

Instructions

Sets/gets the difference between the marker and the X axis to the center frequency
This command takes effect only when the marker mode is DELTa:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE

Example:CALCulate:MARKer3:DELTa:CENTer

8.7.9

Peak Search

Open the peak search setting menu and execute peak search.
8.7.9.1

Peak Search

Next Search
Execute peak search and mark the peak.

Minium PeakExecute minimum search and mark the minium peak.

Next Peak
Search for and mark the peak whose amplitude is closest to that of the current peak and which meetsthe peak search condition.

Next Left Peak
Search for and mark the nearest peak which is located at the left side of the current peak and meetsthe peak search condition.

Next Right Peak
Search for and mark the nearest peak which is located at the right side of the current peak and meetsthe peak search condition.

Peak PeakExecute peak search and minimum search at the same time and mark the results with delta pairint.siglent.com

203

SSA5000A Series User Manual

markers. Wherein, the result of peak search is marked with the delta marker and the result of
minimum search is marked with the reference marker.
Peak -> CF
Execute peak search and set the center frequency of the analyzer to the frequency of the peak. The
function is invalid in Zero Span.
Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum

Instructions

Marker searches for peaks and marks them with the specified marker(If peak-to-peak value is on, peak-to-peak value search is carried out; otherwise,
single peak value search is carried out, refer to thecommand:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:PTPeak:STATe
Search criteria include peak type, absolute threshold, and relative offset:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:MODE:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion)

Example:CALCulate:MARKer4:MAXimum

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MINimum

Instructions

Marker searches for the minimum peak and marks it with the specified marker

Example:CALCulate:MARKer4:MINimum

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:NEXT

Instructions

Marker searches for the next peak and marks it with the specified marker(Based on the set search criteria, including peak type, absolute threshold, andrelative offset, see the following
command:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:MODE:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion)

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:MAXimum:NEXT

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:LEFT:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:RIGHt

Instructions

Marker searches for left/right peaks and marks with the specified marker(Based on the set search criteria, including peak type, absolute threshold, andrelative offset, see the following command:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:MODE:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion)

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:MAXimum:LEFT

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:PTPeak

Instructions

Performs a peak-to-peak search, marking with the specified marker

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:PTPeak

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum[:SET]:CENTer

Instructions

Execute peak search and set the center frequency of the analyzer to the frequency ofthe peakExample:CALCulate:MARKer1:MAXimum:CENTer

204

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

8.7.9.2

Peak Config

Define the conditions of peak search for various peak searches. A real peak should meet therequirements of both the “Peak Threshold” and “Peak Excursion”.
Peak Threshold
Assign a minimum for the peak amplitude. Peaks whose amplitudes are greater than the specified
peak threshold are treated as real peaks. The actual minimal peak threshold is -200dBm when shut
down the Peak Threshold.
Peak Excursion
Set the excursion between the peak and the minimum amplitude on both sides of it. Peaks whose
excursions are beyond the specified excursion are treated as real peaks. The actual minimal peakexcursion is 0dBm when shut down the Peak Excursion.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold?

Instructions

Sets/gets the absolute threshold for the peak search criteria

Parameter Type

Float , unitdBm

Parameter Range-200.0 dBm~ 200.0 dBm

ReturnFloat , unitdBm

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:STATe?

Instructions

Set or obtain the absolute threshold switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:CPSEarch ON

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion?

Instructions

Sets/gets a relative threshold for the peak search criteria

Parameter Type

Float , unitdB

Parameter Range

0 ~ 200.0 dB

ReturnFloat , unitdB

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion 10

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion:STATe?

Instructions

Set and obtain the relative threshold switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion:STATe ON

int.siglent.com

-50

205

SSA5000A Series User Manual

8.7.9.3

Count Peak

Enable or disable continuous peak search. The default is Off. When enabled, the system will always
execute a peak search automatically after each sweep in order to track the signal undermeasurement.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:CPSearch[:STATe]:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:CPSearch[:STATe]?

Instructions

Enable the continuous peak search function
Gets the status of the continuous peak search function switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:CPSEarch ON

206

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

8.8

Limits

The analyzer supports Pass/Fail test function. In this function, the measured curve will be comparedwith the pre-edited curve. If the related rules are met, the result is “Pass”, else the result is “Fail”.

8.8.1

Slect Limit

Activate/Select a limit.

8.8.2

Limit State

Enable or disable slected limit.

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3:STATe OFF|ON|0|1:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3:STATe?

Instructions

Sets/gets the restricted stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:STATe OFF

8.8.3

Limit Margin

Set the margin for selected limit.
When trace is between limit and margin, it will be displayed as Fail Margin.

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MARGin:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MARGin?

Instructions

Sets/gets the limit margin value

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-100 dB ~ 100dB

Return

Float

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:MARGin 10:CALCulate:LLINe2:MARGin?
:CALCulate:LLINe2:MARGin:STATe 0

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MARGin:STATe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MARGin:STATe?

Instructions

Sets/gets the restricted stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:MARGin:STATe OFF

int.siglent.com

207

SSA5000A Series User Manual

8.8.4

Limit TypeSet the limit type as upper / lower . The limit 1,3,5 is default as the lower and 2,4,6 as the lower

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE UPPer|LOWer:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the restriction type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

UPPer|LOWer

ReturnEnumeration

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:TYPE LOWer

8.8.5

Limit Edit

Edit the properties of slected limit.

Figure 8-4 limit edit

Table 8-1 Limit1 Edit Menu
Function

Explanation

Type

Select upper or lower limit type. The default value is Upper.

Mode

Select limit line or limit point. The default value is Line.
Set the number of the point to be edited if you selected the point type, and therange is 1 ~ 100.

Add point208

Add a new point for editing.

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

X-axisEdit the X-axis value (frequency or time) of the current point.

Amplitude

Edit the amplitude of the current point or line.

Del Point

Delete the point whose number is selected in Mode.

Del All

Delete all the points.

Save/Load

Save or load the limit file.

X OffsetSet offsets of X axis.

Y OffsetSet offsets of Y axis

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:X:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:X?

Instructions

Set the limit point template frequency offset
Gets the limit point template frequency offset

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

0 ~ 26.5G

Return

Float

Example:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:X 1MHz

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:Y:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:Y?

Instructions

Sets the limit point template amplitude offset
Gets the limiter template amplitude offset

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-350 dB~380 dB

Return

Float

Example:CALCulate:LLINe5:Offset:Y -10

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DATA val1,val2:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DATA?

Instructions

Sets/gets restricted data
(Clears previous data)

Parameter Type

val1: frequency : Float,
val2: Ampl: Float

Parameter Range

val1: related with Spanval2: -400 dBm~330 dBm

Returnval1: frequency : Float,
val2: Ampl: Float

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:DATA 100,-20,200,-25 (Add two points (100, -20) and (200, -25)):CALC:LLINe1:DATA?

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:ADD val1,val2:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:POINt:DELete

Instructions

Add limit point
Delete limit points

int.siglent.com

209

SSA5000A Series User Manual
Parameter Type

val1:frequency : Float,
val2: Ampl: Float

Parameter Range

val1: related with Spanval2: -400 dBm~330 dBm

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:ADD 100,-20:CALCulate:LLINe2:POINt:DELete 2

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe:ALL:DELete

Instructions

Delete specified restrictions
Delete all restrictions

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe:ALL:DELete

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TRACe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TRACe?

Instructions

Select the limit trace

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

1~6

Return

1~6

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:TRACe 3

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:INTerpolate:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:INTerpolate:TYPE?

Instructions

Set/Query the frequency difference type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

LOG|LIN

Return

LOG|LIN

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:FREQuency:INTerpolate:TYPE LOG

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:CMODe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:CMODe?

Instructions

Set or query the frequency reference type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

FIXed|RELAtive

ReturnFIXed|RELAtive

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:FREQuency:CMODe FIX

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE?

Instructions

Set or query the range difference type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

LOG|LIN

Return

LOG|LIN

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1: AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE LOG

210

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6: AMPLitude:CMODe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6: AMPLitude:CMODe?

Instructions

Set or query the amplitude reference type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

FIXed|RELAtive

ReturnFIXed|RELAtive

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2: AMPLitude:CMODe FIX

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:COPY:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:COPY?

Instructions

Copy the limit

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

1~6

Return

1~6

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:COPY 5

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:BUILd:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:BUILd?

Instructions

Fitting a trace

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

1~6

Return

1~6

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2: BUILd 1:CALCulate:LLINe2: BUILd?

int.siglent.com

211

SSA5000A Series User Manual

8.8.6

Limit Test

Enable or disable the limit test function.

Figure 8-5 test results

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe:TEST:CALCulate:LLINe:TEST?

Instructions

Sets/gets the status of the test switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe:TEST 1

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FAIL?

Instructions

Query limit test results.

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:FAIL 1

8.8.7

Setup

Fail to stop
Turn on or off the Fail to stop function. If the function is on, the analyzer will stop sweep and retain thetest result when the test result is “Fail”.

Buzzer212

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Turn on or off the buzzer. When the buzzer is on, it beeps when the test result is “Fail”.

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:BEEP:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:BEEP?

Instructions

Sets/gets the restricted buzzer

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:BEEP OFF

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe:FAIL:STOP:CALCulate:LLINe:FAIL:STOP?

Instructions

The set/query limit test stops if it fails

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe:FAIL:STOP OFF

int.siglent.com

213

SSA5000A Series User Manual

8.9

Meas & Meas Setup

8.9.1

Average TypeChoose one of the following averaging types: log power (video), power (RMS), or voltage averaging.
When trace average is on, the average type is shown on the left side of the display.

Figure 8-6 Average Type

Log Power
Select the logarithmic (decibel) scale for all filtering and averaging processes. This scale is"Video" because it is the most common display and analysis scale for the video signal within
analyzer. This scale is excellent for finding Sine/CW signals near noise.

Power Average
In this average type, all filtering and averaging processes work on the power (the square of themagnitude) of the signal, instead of its log or envelope voltage. This scale is best for real-time
power measurement of complex signals.



Voltage Average
In this Average type, all filtering and averaging processes work on the voltage of the envelope ofthe signal. This scale is suitable for observing rise and fall behavior of AM or pulse-modulated
signals such as radar and TDMA transmitters.

Command format[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE LOGPower|POWer|VOLTage[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE?

Instructions

Set/Query the average type

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

LOGPower
POWer
VOLTage

ReturnEnumeration: LOGP|POW|VOLT

ExampleAVERage:TYPE VOLTage214

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE:AUTO 0|1|ON|OFF[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE:AUTO?

Instructions

Set/query the average type automatically

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:AVERage:TYPE:AUTO 1

8.9.2

Meas Control

8.9.2.1

Sequence

Display the menu controls that enable you to configure the measurement sequence. You need topress Restart Seq to start the selected measurement sequence. The default is Scan Only.
Scan Only
Scan the band based on Scan Config settings.
Seach Only
Search for the peak signal on current traces to populate the signal list.
Scan, Search & Measure
The complete measurement includes scan, peak search and final measurement. After doing peaksearch, the signal list will be cleared and populated with the new search result. It will do final
measurement on all signals in the signal list and update the information of the signal list.
Scan & Search
A combination of scan and peak search.
Search & Meas
A combination of peak search and final measurement.
Meas
Do final measurement on the selected signals of the signal list based on Meas settings. You canchoose Current Signal, All Signals or Marked Signals to be selected under menu Meas -> Meas
Signal.

8.9.2.2

Restart Secquence

Start or restart the scan, search or final measurement depending on the sequence selected. Whenstarted, the label on the menu changes to Stop Sequence. The Meters measurement would beinvalid during sequence running.

8.9.2.3

Restart Meas

Start or restart the measure only.

int.siglent.com

215

SSA5000A Series User Manual

8.9.2.4

Restart Meter

Start or restart the measure meter.

8.9.3

Scan

A group of menus let you configure for scan quickly and easily.

8.9.4

Measure8.9.4.1

Signal mode

Set the remeasure type, either on a current signal, all signals, or the marked signal in the signal list.
Current Signal: You could set the current signal under menu List Operation-> Select Signal.

All Signals: Do final measurement on all signals in the signal list.

Marked Signal: You could mark one or more signals to do final measurement under menu List
Operation-> Mark Signal.

8.9.4.2

Meas Detector

Set the selected detector to be used for final measuremen.

8.9.4.3

Meas Enable

Enable / disable the measurement.

8.9.4.4

Dwell Time

Set the dwell time for detectors.

8.9.4.5

Select Limit

Select the limit used by each detector to get the limit delta value.

216

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

8.9.5

List Operation

8.9.5.1

Select Signal

Select one of the signals as current signal in the signal list. When a signal is selected, you can mark,unmark or delete it from the signal list. It will be relative to 1.4.5.1 Meas Signal.

8.9.5.2

Mark Signal

Mark the current signal.

8.9.5.3

Clear markUnmark the current signal.

8.9.5.4

Mark AllMark all the signals in the signal list.

8.9.5.5

Clear All Mark

Unmark all the signals in the signal list

8.9.5.6

Delete Signal

Delete the current signal in the signal list.

8.9.5.7

Delete All

Delete all signals in the signal list.

8.9.5.8

Delete Marked

Delete all marked signals in the signal list.

8.9.5.9

Sort By

Sort all signals in the signal list by the specific order. You can sort based on the frequency, detector
1/2/3, detector vs. limit delta or timestamp in ascending or descending order.
Every new signal will be added at the end of the list until you sort the signal list.

int.siglent.com

217

SSA5000A Series User Manual

8.9.6

Meter

A group of menus let you configure for meter measurement quickly and easily
8.9.6.1

Reset Peak Hold

Reset the maximum hold value of the meter and start accumulating again.

8.9.6.2

Select Meter

Select one of the three meters. When a meter is selected, you can set its detector and limit configure.

8.9.6.3

Meter Enable

Enable/disable the meter measurement.

8.9.6.4

Meter Detector

Set the selected detector to be used for meter measurement.

8.9.6.5

Dwell Time

Set the dwell time for meter measurement.

8.9.6.6

Meter Limit

Edit the properties of meter limit
Function

Explanation

Limit

Turn on or off the meter limit.

Value

Set the meter limit value.

Limit1 to Value

Use Limit1 line as meter limit at the current meter’s frequency.

Limit2 to Value

Use Limit2 line as meter limit at the current meter’s frequency.

Limit3 to Value

Use Limit3 line as meter limit at the current meter’s frequency.

8.9.7

GlobalThe Swept SA measurement lets you perform “traditional” Spectrum Analysis, that is, Swept andZero Span measurements, as well as “Swept FFT” analysis (FFT analysis presented as though it
were swept).

218

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

9

Pulse Measurement Mode

The PULSE mode function is mainly used to measure the width, amplitude, and time parameters ofpulses.

Command format

INSTrument:MEASure
INSTrument:MEASure?

Instruction

Sets/Gets the Measurement mode

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

PULSE

ReturnEnumeration: PULSE

Example

INSTrument:MEASure PULSE
INSTrument:MEASure?

int.siglent.com

219

SSA5000A Series User Manual

9.1

Frequency

9.1.1

Frequency

Set the frequency related parameters and functions of the spectrum analyzer.

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer?

Instruction

Sets/Gets the center frequency.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range

Zero Span:0 ~ 7.5 GHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:FREQuency:CENTer 0.2 GHz:SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer 0.2 GHz

9.1.2

Freq Offset

The frequency offset value is used to indicate the frequency conversion between the tested device
and the spectrograph input.
This parameter does not affect any hardware settings of the spectrograph, only changes the center
frequency display value.

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:OFFSet[:SENSe]:FREQuency:OFFSet?

Instruction

Sets the frequency offset of the spectrum analyzer.
Gets the frequency offset.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range-100 GHz ~ 100 GHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:FREQuency:OFFSet 1 GHz

9.1.3

Freq Step

The frequency step is the length of the center frequency and frequency offset when using thedirectional keys for stepping.
Changing the center frequency value with a fixed step can achieve the goal of quickly andcontinuously switching measurement channels.



There are two modes for frequency stepping: automatic and manual. When the frequency step isin automatic mode, if it is not zero sweep width, the frequency step will change with the changeof sweep width, and its value is sweep width/10. If it is zero sweep width, the frequency step isthe value of RBW. The manual mode allows for arbitrary setting of frequency step values.

220

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement][:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement]?

Instruction

Specifies the center frequency step size.
Gets the center frequency step.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range

1 Hz ~ 28 GHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP 2 MHz

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO?

Instruction

Specifies whether the step size is set automatically based on the span.
Gets center frequency step mode.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF

int.siglent.com

221

SSA5000A Series User Manual

9.2

BW

9.2.1

Resolution Bandwidth

Set Resolution BandWidth (RBW) to distinguish two signals with similar frequencies. Pay attention to
the following points during use:

Reducing RBW can achieve higher frequency resolution, but it will lead to longer scanning time;When the scanning time is in automatic mode, it is affected by both RBW and VBW;When RBW is in automatic mode, it will decrease as the scanning width decreases.
Command Format[:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution]?

Instruction

Set/Gets the resolution bandwidth.

Parameter Type

Discrete

Parameter Range

1Hz , 3Hz , 10 Hz , 30 Hz , 100 Hz , 300 Hz , 1 kHz , 3 kHz , 10 kHz , 30 kHz ,100 kHz , 300 kHz , 1 MHz , 3 MHz , 10 MHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:BWIDth 1 kHz

Command Format[:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO?

Instruction

Turn on/off auto resolution bandwidth state.
Gets the resolution bandwidth auto state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:BWID:AUTO On

9.2.2

Video Bandwidth

Set the video bandwidth in order to filter out the noise outside the video band.


Reducing the VBW will smooth the trace and helps to highlight small signals from noise, but it
will also increase the sweep time (Sweep Time is affected by a combination of RBW and VBWwhen it is in Auto mode).



VBW varies with RBW when it is in Auto mode. While in Manual mode, VBW is not affected by
RBW.
Command Format[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo?

Instruction

Set/Gets the video bandwidth.

Parameter Type

Discrete

Parameter Range

1Hz , 3Hz , 10 Hz , 30 Hz , 100 Hz , 300 Hz , 1 kHz , 3 kHz , 10 kHz , 30 kHz ,100 kHz , 300 kHz , 1 MHz , 3 MHz , 10 MHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:BWIDth:VIDeo 10 kHz

222

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command Format[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO?

Instruction

This command turns on/off auto video bandwidth state.
Gets the video bandwidth state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

ExampleBWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO OFF

9.2.3

V/R Ratio

Set the ratio of VBW to RBW. This value is different while measuring different kinds of signals:
Sine/Continuous Wave (CW) signals: Use 1 to 3 (for faster sweeps)



Pulsed/transient signals: Use 10 (to reduce the influence on the amplitude of transient signals)



Noise signals: Generally use 0.1 (to obtain the average of noises)

Command Format[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio?

Instruction

Specifies the ratio of the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth.
Gets the ratio of the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth.

Parameter Type

Discrete, Float

Parameter Range

0.001, 0.003, 0.01, 0.03, 0.1, 0.3, 1.0, 3.0, 10.0, 30.0, 100.0, 300.0, 1000.0

Return

Float

Example:BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio 30

int.siglent.com

223

SSA5000A Series User Manual

9.3

Sweep

9.3.1

Sweep Points

The number of sweep points represents the number of sweep and trace displayed points(201~10001).
More sweep points will improve the resolution of waveform, but also affect the minimum sweep time,and increase the time of data processing and remote access to data, and reduce the response rate.

Command Format[:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts[:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts?

Instruction

Sets sweep points.
Gets sweep points.

Parameter TypeintegerParameter Range

201-10001

Example:SWEep:POINts 250:SWEep:POINts?

9.3.2

Sweep Time

When the sweep type is normal swept, you can change the sweep time (SWT) to control the timerequired to sweep the current frequency range. The sweep time supports automatic mode andmanual mode:
Auto SWT refers to the appropriate sweep time of the analyzer according to the relevant
configuration line operation, which satisfies the following calculation logic:

AutoSWT  max[ minSWT ，
Points * ResTimeper Point];
minSWT  1 us

Users can also manually set the sweep time based on actual requirements.But it needs to besatisfied:

1us  SWT  6ks
In general, the manual sweep time should not be longer than the automatic sweep time in thiscondition. Otherwise, unforeseeable anomalies may be caused and may be marked (UNCAL).
It should be pointed out in particular that under the influence of the scheme, when the sweep type is
FFT, the sweep time can only be calculated by the instrument itself, and any modification related tothe sweep time cannot take effect.

Command Format[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO?

Instruction

This command turns on/off auto sweep time state.

224

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON

Command Format[:SENSe]:SWEep:SPEed NORMal|ACCUracy[:SENSe]:SWEep:SPEed?

Instruction

Toggles the sweep speed between normal and accuracy.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

ACCUracy|NORMal

Example:SWEep: SPEed NORMal

9.3.3

Sweep/Measure

Sweep/Measure
Single/Continue controls analyzer to perform single or continuous sweep/measure

RestartRestart the current sweep or measure. In particular, if the sweep parameters are modified, a restart
will be performed.

Command format:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF|ON|0|1:INITiate:CONTinuous?

Instructions

Sets continuous sweep mode on-off.
Gets continuous sweep mode state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF

Command Format:INITiate[:IMMediate]

Instruction

Restarts the current sweep.

Example:INITiate:IMMediate

Command Format:INITiate:RESTart

Instruction

Restarts the current sweep.

Example:INITiate:RESTart

int.siglent.com

225

SSA5000A Series User Manual

9.4

Amplitude

Set the amplitude parameters of the analyzer. Through modifying these parameters, signals undermeasurement can be displayed in a proper mode for easier observation and minimum error. Anychange of Ref Level, Attenuator Value, Preamp mode and Ref Offset will restart sweep.

9.4.1

Ref Level

Set the maximum power or voltage that can be currently displayed in the trace window. The value isdisplayed at the upper left corner of the screen grid.
The maximum reference (Ref) level available is affected by the maximum mixing level; input
attenuation is adjusted under a constant maximum mixing level in order to fulfill the following
condition:

Note: the maximum reference level of different machine models may be different, please refer to thedata manual specifically.

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel?

Instruction

This command sets the reference level for the Y-axis.
Gets reference level.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: dBm, dBmV, dBuV, dBuA, V, W

Parameter Range

Unit is dBm: -170 dBm ~ 23 dBm
Unit is dBmV: -123.01 dBmV ~ 69.99 dBmV;
Unit is dBuV: -63.01 dBuV ~ 129.99 dBuV;
Unit is dBuA: -96.99 dBuA ~ 96.01 dBuA;
Unit is Volts: 707.11pV ~ 3.16 V;
Unit is Watts: 0W ~ 199.53m W.

ReturnFloat, unit: dBm

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:RLEVel 20 DBM

Command format[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation?

Instructions

Sets/gets the attenuation value

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

0 dB ~ 50 dB

ReturnInteger , unit dB

Example:POWer:ATTenuation 10

Command format[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO?

Instructions

Sets/gets the auto attenuation value switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

226

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Return0|1

Example:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO ON

Command format[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe]?

Instructions

Sets/gets the preset amplifier inside the switch spectrometer

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:POWer:GAIN ON

9.4.2

Ref Offset

Assign an offset to the reference level to compensate for gains or losses generated between thedevice under measurement and the analyzer.
The change of this value changes both the reference level readout and the amplitude readout of themarker; but does not impact the position of traces on the screen.

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:RLEVel:OFFSet:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:RLEVel:OFFSet?

Instructions

Sets/gets the frequency offset

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-100 dB~100 dB

ReturnFloat , unitdB

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:RLEVel:OFFSet 2

9.4.3

Y Axis Scale

9.4.3.1

Scale TypeSet the scale type of the Y-axis to Lin or Log. The default is Log.
In Lin mode, the vertical Scale value cannot be changed. The Display area is set for reference
level of 0%.



In Log scale type, the Y-axis denotes the logarithmic coordinate. The value shown at the top of
the grid is the reference level and each grid represent the scale value. The unit of Y-axis willautomatically switch to the default unit (dBm) in Log scale type when the scale type is changed
from Lin to Log.

In Lin scale type, the Y-axis denotes the liner coordinate; the values shown at the top of the gridand the bottom of the grid are the reference level and 0 V. The scale setting function is invalid.
The unit of Y-axis will automatically switch to the default unit (Volts) in Lin scale type when thescale type is charged from Log to Lin.

The scale type does not affect the setting of Y-axis unit.

int.siglent.com

227

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Set the unit of the Y-axis to dBm, dBmV, dBuV, dBuA, Volts (RMS) or Watts. Default is dBm.
The conversion relationships between units are as follows.

Where, R denotes the reference impedance. The default value is 50Ω and can be adjusted bypressing “Correction -> RF input”. The “75 Ω” impedance is just a numeric value, not a real
impedance. Setting the RF input to 75 Ω will not change the actual input impedance. A 75 Ω
feed-through adapter is required to match 75 Ω circuits to the 50 Ω input of the analyzer.

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision?

Instructions

Sets/gets the scale on which trace logarithms are displayed

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

0.1 dB ~ 20 dB

ReturnFloat , unit dB

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:PDIVision 10 dB

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing LINear|LOGarithmic:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the scale display type

Parameter Type

Enumeration: LINear |LOGarithmic

ReturnEnumeration: LIN|LOG

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SPACing LINear

9.4.3.2

Unit

Units can be selected as dBm, dBmV, dBuV, dBuA, Volts, and Watts. Default dBm.
The conversion relationship between units is as follows:
Among them, R represents the input impedance, with a default of 50 Ω. You can choose the input
impedance of 75 Ω or 50 Ω in the correction.
dBm = 10lg (228

Volts 2
1
×
)
R
1mW

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Volts
dBμV = 20lg (
)
1μV
Volts
dBmV = 20lg ()
1mV
Volts2
1
dBμA = 10 lg (×
) − 10 lg(R) +10lg109
R
1mW

Watts =

Volts 2R

The impedance selection here only represents numerical calculation and does not represent theswitching of actual impedance. After switching the input impedance, the display of power units will
not change, while amplitude and energy units will change accordingly.

Command format:UNIT:POWer DBM|DBMV|DBUV|V|W:UNIT:POWer?

Instructions

Sets/gets the display unit of magnitude

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

DBM|DBMV|DBUV|DBUA|V|W

ReturnEnumeration: DBM|DBMV|DBUV|V|W

Example:UNIT:POWer DBMV

int.siglent.com

229

SSA5000A Series User Manual

9.5

Correction

Measured value can be corrected in specific x-axis and y-axis. Now, there are eight corrections, witch
enter into force at the same time.
Select Correction
Select a correction (1-8) to operating.

Correct Switch
If the selected switch enter into force.

Command Format[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET#[:STATe][:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET#[:STATe]?

Illustration

Set Correction Switch Status

Parameter Type

Boolean

Menu

Input/Output>Correction

Return Value

0|1

example:CORRection:CSET1 0:CORRection:CSET2 1Edit Correction
Editing, preserving, loading the selected correction.

Command Format[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]2|3|...|8:DATA {x1,y1 }[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET#:DATA?

Illustration

Get/Set correction points

Parameter Type

Character String of Correction Data {Freq 1Hz, Amp 1dBm, Freq 2Hz, Amp
2dBm, ……}

Parameter Range
Menu

Input/Output>Correction>Edit Correction

example:CORRection:CSET1:DATA 10000000,-15, 15000000, -15:CORRection:CSET1:DATA 10000000,-15

Command Format[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]2|3|...|8:ADD {x1,y1 }Illustration

Add Correction Point

Parameter Type

Character String of Correction Data {Freq 1Hz, Amp 1dBm, Freq 2Hz, Amp
2dBm, ……}

Parameter Range
Menu

Input/Output>Correction>Edit Correction

example:CORRection:CSET1:ADD 10000000,-15, 15000000, -15:CORRection:CSET1:ADD10000000,15

Command Format[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]2|3|...|8:POINt:DELete

Illustration

Delete a special correction point.

Parameter Type

Serial Number

230

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Menu

Input/Output>Correction>Edit Correction

example:CORRection:CSET1:POINt:DELete 0

Close All the Correction
All the correction is not effective.

Delet One/All the Correction
Empty all the points of a specail/all correction(s).

Command Format[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]2|3|...|8:DELete

Illustration

Delete all points of a special correction.

Return Value
exampleCORRection:CSET1:DELete

Command Format[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET:ALL:DELete

Illustration

Delete all the corrections

Return Value
exampleint.siglent.com:CORRection:CSET:ALL:DELete231

SSA5000A Series User Manual

9.6

Trigger

The analyzer provides a variety of trigger functions, users can choose from the trigger menu.

9.6.1

Trigger Source

The analyzer provides a variety of trigger sources to suit different trigger requirements.
Free Run
Free trigger is the default mode of the analyzer, in which the spectrum analyzer sweeps circularly
and continuously.

Video
When the user wants to capture an instantaneous signal that appears for a very short time, the video
trigger mode can be adopted . In this working mode, only when the rising edge or falling edge of asignal touches the Trigger Level, the signal will be triggered and displayed on the screen.

External
External trigger provides users with richer trigger functions. If users want to realize the periodic
trigger and delay trigger spectrum analyzer, they can choose the external trigger mode. In this mode,
it is triggered by the rising or falling edge of the external input signal. The square wave signal with acertain frequencycan be periodically triggered, and the delay time can be adjusted by setting the
Trigger Delay option.

Periodic
When Periodic is selected, the analyzer uses the built-in period timer signal as the trigger. The trigger
event is set by the periodic timer parameter, which is modified by offset and periodic synchronization
Src.
You can synchronize periodic signals with external events (using periodic synchronization Src) to getcloser to a reliable trigger signal.
If the synchronization source is not selected (off state), the internal timer will not synchronize with any
external timed events.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce?

Instructions

sets the trigger source.
gets the trigger source.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range"IMMediate ", "VIDeo ", "EXTernal ","FRAMe"

Return"IMM", "VID", "EXT" ,"FRAMe"

Example:TRIGger:SOURce VID

232

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

9.6.2

Trigger Level

Sets the amplitude level for the video trigger (absolute level only supported). When the video signal
crosses the voltage level with the selected slope, it is triggered.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]: {type}:LEVel:TRIGger[:SEQuence]: {type}:LEVel?

Instructions

sets the trigger level.
gets the trigger level.
{type}: "VIDeo", "EXTernal"

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-300~50dBm

Return

Float

Example:TRIGger:VIDeo:LEVel -20

9.6.3

Trigger Slope

Set the trigger polarity for external trigger, video trigger. The options are rising edge trigger and fallingedge trigger.
The same trigger source uses the same trigger edge for both gating and triggering.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]: {type}:SLOPe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]: {type}:SLOPe?

Instructions

sets the trigger edge.
gets the trigger edge.
{type}: " VIDeo ", " EXTernal "Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range"POS", "NEG"

Return"POS", "NEG"

Example:TRIGger: EXTernal:SLOPe:TRIGger: VIDeo:SLOPe?

9.6.4

Trigger Delay

When scanning is at zero span, negative delay can be set . The time range of negative delay isrelated to the number of sweep points and sweep time:
Maximum negative delay time = [ 496M / ( sweep points * 64 ) - 5] * sweep time
Maximum positive delay time =500ms

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay?

Instructions

sets the trigger delay
gets the trigger delay{type}:" VIDeo ", " EXTernal " ,"FRAMe"

int.siglent.com

233

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Parameter Type

Float

Return

Float

Example:TRIGger:EXTernal:DELay 5e-3
:TRIGger:FRAMe:DELay?

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay:STATe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay:STATe?

Instructions

sets the trigger delay state.
gets the trigger delay state.
{type}:" VIDeo ", " EXTernal " ,"FRAMe"

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:TRIGger:EXTernal: DELay:STATe 1

9.6.5

Zero Span Trigger Delay Compensation (external trigger only)

In normal cases, after the trigger is generated, the data is displayed and the data is triggered at thesame time. However, the processing time of the trigger path and the data path is different. As a result,the data displayed at the trigger time is the previous data. This does not affect the integrity of the data
and does not cause data loss at the trigger point. However, in some cases, it is necessary to display
the zero point of screen coordinate as the input signal information of trigger point, so the function ofzero span delay compensation is needed.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal:DELay:COMPensation OFF|ON|0|1:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal:DELay:COMPensation?

Instructions

Enable /disable the external trigger zero sweep delay compensation

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:TRIGger:EXTernal:DELay:COMPensation OFF

9.6.6

Period (periodic trigger only)

Set the trigger period. For gating and triggering, the same trigger source uses the same trigger cycle.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:PERiod:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:PERiod?

Instructions

Set/Query Period Trigger period

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

100ns~10s

Return

Float

Example:TRIGger:FRAMe:PERiod 1s

234

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

9.6.7

Offset Time

Adjust the cumulative offset between the periodic trigger clock and trigger events. The periodic
trigger clock cannot be viewed on the software, only the trigger event can be seen. Therefore, inorder to adjust the trigger event time, only the offset between the periodic triggering clock and thetriggering event can be adjusted. However, the absolute value of the internal offset is unknown, andeach modification of the offset is cumulative on the previous basis.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet?

Instructions

Set/Query Period Trigger period offset

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

0s~10sReturn

Float

Example:TRIGger:FRAMe:OFFSet 1s

9.6.8

Reset Time Offset Display

Reset the display of cycle trigger time offset.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet:DISPlay:RESet

Instructions

Reset Period trigger offset return to zero

Example:TRIGger:FRAMe:OFFSet:DISPlay:RESet

int.siglent.com

235

SSA5000A Series User Manual

9.6.9

Sync Source (periodic trigger only)

Figure 9-1 Trigger of synchronization source

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:SYNC:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:SYNC?

Instructions

Set/Query the type of periodic synchronization

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range"OFF", "EXT"

Return"OFF", "EXT"Example:TRIGger:FRAMe:SYNC EXT

9.6.10Gate Source

Select a gate source for gate measurement. The optional sources are external source and periodic
source.

External
Set the trigger source of the gate to be an external source. Similar to trigger, when configuringexternal sources, you can choose whether to trigger on the rising edge or the falling edge, andconfigure zero span delay compensation. The configuration of the gating source affects theconfiguration of the trigger source.

Period236

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Set the trigger source of the gate to a periodic source. Similar to trigger, you can configure trigger
period, trigger offset, and trigger period synchronization sources when configuring periodic sources.
The configuration of the gating source affects the configuration of the trigger source.

Command format[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:SOURce[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:SOURce?

Instructions

Set or query the gate source type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range" EXTernal ","FRAMe"

Return"EXT","FRAMe"

Example:SWEep:EGATe:SOURce EXT

int.siglent.com

237

SSA5000A Series User Manual

9.7

Trace

The waveform trace is obtained by connecting a set of discrete points to represent the scanned
signal. The connection method is shown in the following figure:

Figure 9-2 Selection of trace lines

The x value of the trace point represents frequency or time (in the case of zero sweep width), and they value represents the signal amplitude of the current frequency (or time). This point (the point before
the trace operation) is obtained by the detector, and in most cases, its number should be consistent
with the number of points (scan control related parameters) configured by the user. When using amarker to mark points on a trace, its resolution is also determined by that number of points.
When it is necessary to operate on a trace, the first step is to specify and only one Select Trace canbe specified at the same time. The selected trace will have a selected status (with a white border) in
the status bar.

9.7.1

Trace TypeSet the type of the current trace or disable it. The system calculates the sampled data using a
specific operation method according to the trace type selected and displays the result. Trace types
include Clear Write, Max Hold, Min Hold, View, Average and Blank. The corresponding icon of the
trace type will be displayed in the status bar at the left of the screen, as shown in the figure below.
Clear Write
Erases any data previously stored in the selected trace, and display the data sampled in real-time ofeach point on the trace.

238

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Max Hold
Retain the maximum level for each point of the selected trace. Update the data if a new maximum
level is detected in successive sweeps. Max Hold is very effective when measuring events that may
take successive scans to measure accurately. Some common applications include FM Deviation, AM
NRSC, and frequency hopping or drift.
Min Hold
Display the minimum value from multiple sweeps for each point of the trace and update the data if a
new minimum is generated in successive sweeps.

View
Freezes and holds the amplitude data of the selected trace. The trace data is not updated as theanalyzer sweeps.

Blank
Disable the trace display and all measurements of this trace.

Average
Set the averages times of the selected trace.
More averages can reduce the noise and the influence of other random signals; thus highlighting thestable signal characteristics. The larger the averages times is, the smoother the trace will be.
Enabling averaging will take more time to collect the full spectral information because the analyzer
needs to sweep the set average count. The displayed data is averaged in a first-in-first-out fashion.

Command format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE WRITe|MAXHold|MINHold| AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE?

Instructions

Sets/gets the display type of trace

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

WRITe: Trace is in normal mode. Update data
MAXHold: Displays the maximum value of traces
MINHold: Displays the minimum value of trace
AVERage: Displays the average value of trace

ReturnEnumeration: WRITE|MAXH|MINH| AVER

Example:TRAC1:TYPE MINH

9.7.2

Trace State

There are four trace states: active, view, blank, and background. Different trace states indicate therefresh and display states of traces:
ActiveRefreshed and displayed trace data.
int.siglent.com

239

SSA5000A Series User Manual

View
The trace data will not be refreshed, and the current latest trace will be displayed in a fixed frame.
Blank
Trace data is no longer refreshed or displayed
Background
Refreshed trace data but no display.

Command format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DISPlay[:STATe]:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DISPlay[:STATe]?

Instructions

Sets/gets the display status of the trace

Parameter Type

Enumeration: ACTI|VIEW|BLAN| BACKParameter Range

ACTIve: Trace is in normal mode. Update data
VIEW: Stops updating trace to display current trace data
BLANk: Clear trace data
BACKground: Set as background

ReturnEnumeration: ACTI|VIEW|BLAN| BACKExample:TRACe2:DISPlay BLANK:TRACe2:DISPlay?

9.7.3

Detect

The analyzer displays the sweep signal on the screen in the form of a trace. For each trace point, theanalyzer always captures all the data within a specific time interval and processes (Peak, Average,etc.) the data using the detector currently selected, then it displays the processed data (a single data
point) on the screen.
Select an appropriate detector type according to the actual application in order to ensure theaccuracy of the measurement.
The available types are Pos Peak, Neg Peak, Sample, Normal, Average and Quasi Peak. The
default is Pos peak.

Positive PeakFor each trace point, Positive Peak detector displays the maximum value of data sampled within thecorresponding time interval.
Negative PeakFor each trace point, Negative Peak detector displays the minimum value of data sampled within thecorresponding time interval.
SampleFor each trace point, Sample detector displays the transient level corresponding to the central time
point of the corresponding time interval. This detector type is applicable to noise or noise-like signal.
NormalNormal detector (also called ROSENFELL Detector) displays the maximum value and the minimum

240

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

value of the sample data segment in turn: Odd-numbered data points display the maximum value
and even-numbered data points display the minimum value. In this way, the amplitude variation
range of the signal is clearly shown.
Average
For each trace point, Average detector displays the average value of data sampled within thecorresponding time interval.

Command format[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6[:FUNCtion][:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6[:FUNCtion]?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the trace detection type

Parameter Type

Enumeration NEG|POS|SAMP|AVER|NORMAL

Parameter Range

NORMAL: standard
NEGative: Negative peak
POSitive: positive peak
SAMPle: The sampling
AVERage: average,

ReturnEnumeration:NEG|POS|SAMP|AVER|NORMAL

Example:DETector:TRAC1 AVERage

Command format[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AUTO 0|1[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AUTO?
[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe:AUTO:ALL

Instructions

Set/get trace automatic detection switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

Example:DETector:TRACe3:AUTO 1:DETector:TRACe:AUTO:ALL

int.siglent.com

241

SSA5000A Series User Manual

9.8

Marker & Peak

The marker appears as a rhombic sign (as shown below) for identifying points on a trace. You caneasily read the amplitude, frequency and sweep time of the marked point on the trace.
The analyzer allows for up to eight/four pairs of markers to be displayed at one time, but only
one pair or a single marker is active every time.

You can use the numeric keys, knob or direction keys to modify the desired frequency or time aswell as view the readouts of different points on the trace.

9.8.1

Select Marker

Select one of the eight markers. The default is Marker1. When a marker is selected, you can set its
type, trace to be marked, readout type and other related parameters. The enabled marker will appear
on the trace selected through the Select Trace option and the readouts of this marker are also
displayed in the active function area and at the upper right corner of the screen.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:SELEct:CALCulate:MARKer:SELEct?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the current marker

Parameter Type

Enumeration1-8

ReturnEnumeration: 1-8

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:SELEct 5

9.8.2

Select Trace

Select the trace to be marked by the current marker. Valid selections includeTrace1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:TRACe 1|2|3|4|5|6:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:TRACe?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the marker trace

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

1|2|3|4|5|6

ReturnEnumeration

ExampleCALCulate:MARK:TRAC 1

9.8.3

Marker Type9.8.3.1

NormalOne of the marker types. It is used to measure the X (Frequency or Time) and Y (Amplitude) valuesof a certain point on the trace. When selected, a marker with the number of the current marker (suchas “ 1 ”) appears on the trace.
242

If no active marker exists currently, a marker will be enabled automatically at the center
int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manualfrequency of the current trace.
You can use the numeric keys, knob or direction keys to move the marker. The readouts of themarker will be displayed at the upper right corner of the screen.

The readout resolution of the X-axis (frequency or time) is related to the span. For higher
readout resolution, reduce the span.

9.8.3.2

Delta

One of the marker types. It is used to measure the delta values of X (Frequency or Time) and Y(Amplitude) between the reference point and a certain point on the trace. When selected, a pair ofmarkers appears on the trace: Fixed Related Marker (marked by a combination of the marker
number and letter “ + ”, such as “ 2+ ”) and the Delta Marker (marked by the “∆”, such as “ 1∆2 ”).


After the marker selects “Delta”, the original marker will become the delta measurement marker,
and the related marker of the incrementing sequence number will become the reference “fixed”
marker.



The delta marker is in the "relative to" state, and its X-axis position can be changed; the related
marker is in the "fixed" state by default (the X-axis and Y-axis positions are fixed), but the X-axis
can be adjusted by changing to the "normal" state.

The first row in the upper right corner of the trace area shows the frequency (or time) difference
and amplitude difference between the two markers; the second row in the upper right corner of
the trace area shows the X axis and amplitude value of the related marker.



Delta reset. It is only valid when the current marker is a differential marker. If the marker type ofthe relative marker of the current marker is normal or differential, change the horizontal positionof the relative marker to the horizontal position of the current marker; if the marker type of therelative marker is fixed, change the horizontal position and vertical position of the relative marker
to the current one. The horizontal and vertical position of the marker.

9.8.3.3

Fixed

One of the marker types. When “Fixed” is selected, the X-axis and Y-axis of the marker will notchange by the trace and can only be changed through the menu. The fixed marker is marked with"+".
After the marker selects “Delta”, the original marker will become the delta measurement marker, andthe related marker of the incrementing sequence number will become the reference “fixed” marker

9.8.3.4

Off

Turn off the marker currently selected. The marker information displayed on the screen and functions
based on the marker will also be turned off.

int.siglent.com

243

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE POSition|DELTa|FIXed|OFF:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MODE?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the marker mode

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

POSition
DELTa
FIXed
OFF

ReturnEnumeration: POS|DELT|FIX|OFF

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:MODE POSition

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe OFF|ON|0|1:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe?

Instructions

Sets/gets the marker switch status

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:STATe ON

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF

Instructions

Close all markers

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8 [:SET]:RESEt:DELTa

Instructions

Difference marker resets to 0
Only valid when the current cursor is a differential marker

Example:CALCulate:MARKer2:RESEt:DELTa

9.8.4

Marker Postion

Displays and sets the position of the marker. Only the x-axis position can be set.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X?

Instructions

Sets/gets the value of the marker point X axis
This command takes effect only when the marker mode is not OFF：:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE
If the marker readout type is frequency, the parameter is frequency.
When the marker readout type is time, the value is time. Reference
commands::CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:READout

Parameter Typefrequency , Float , unitHz , kHz , MHz , GHz , default Hzor time , Float , unitus , ms , s , ks , default s

Parameter Range

0 Hz ~ max span or 10 ms ~ 1000 s

ReturnWhen the marker readout type is frequency, the reading is frequency, floating point
type, in Hz;
When the marker readout type is time, the reading is time, floating point type, in s;
When the marker readout type is cycle, the reading is cycle, floating point type, unit s;

244

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual
Example:CALCulate:MARKer4:X 0.4 GHz:CALCulate:MARKer4:X 200 ms:CALCulate:MARKer4:X?

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:Y:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:Y?

Instructions

Read the value of the Y-axis of the marker point, which can also be used to read themarker noise in the marker function.
To execute this command, ensure that the marker is in the
onstate.:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

None

ReturnFloat , unitdBm

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:Y?
Return: -25

9.8.5

Readout Type

Select a desired readout type for the X-axis for the marker. Different markers can use different
readout types. This setting will change the readout type and affect the marker readings in the activefunction area and at the upper right corner of the screen, but will not change the actual value.

Frequency
In this type, Normal marker shows the absolute frequency. Delta markers and Delta Pair markers
show the frequency difference between the delta marker and reference marker. The default readout
mode in non-zero span is “Frequency”.
Note: This type is invalid in Zero span.
PeriodIn this type, the Normal marker shows the reciprocal of frequency; while Delta marker and Delta Pairmarker show the reciprocal of frequency difference. When the frequency difference is zero, thereciprocal is infinite and 100 Ts is displayed.
Note: This type is invalid in Zero span.

Time
In this type, the Normal marker shows the time difference between the marker and the start of thesweep; while Delta marker and Delta Pair marker show the sweep time difference between the deltamarker and reference marker.
The default readout mode in Zero span is Time.

Inverse TimeIn this type, the Normal marker Inverse Time = 1 / Time; while Delta marker and Delta Pair marker s
int.siglent.com

245

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Inverse Time = 1 / Δ Time.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:READout
FREQuency | TIME | PERiod | INTIme:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:READout?

Instructions

Sets/gets the marker in X-axis reading mode

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

FREQuency: frequency
TIME
PERiodINVERSE_TIME

ReturnEnumeration: FREQ|TIME|PER| INTIme

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:X:READout FREQuency

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:READout:AUTO 0|1:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:READout:AUTO?

Instructions

Sets/gets the marker in X-axis reading mode auto

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:X:READout:AUTO 1

9.8.6

Marker Couple

When Marker Couple is on, Markers are set up and moved in coupled operation on all traces.
When Marker Couple is off, Markers are set up and moved independently for each trace.

Command format:CALCulate[:SELected]:MARKer:COUPle:CALCulate[:SELected]:MARKer:COUPle?

Instructions

Set/query the marker coupling switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:COUPle 1:CALCulate:MARKer:COUPle?

9.8.7

Marker Lines

Mark the marker with the intersection of horizontal and vertical lines, which is more convenient toquery the marker position in the waveform area.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:LINE:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:LINE:STATe?

Instructions

Sets/gets the marker line switch

Parameter Type

Boolean246

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Parameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer2:X:LINE:STATe 1:CALCulate:MARKer2:X:LINE:STATe?

9.8.8

Marker Table

Enable or disable the Marker Table.
Display all the markers enabled on the lower portion of the screen, including marker number, trace
number, marker readout type, X-axis readout and amplitude. Through this table you can view themeasurement values of multiple points. The table allows for up to eight markers to be displayed at
one time.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:TABLe ON|OFF|0|1:CALCulate:MARKer:TABLe?

Instructions

Sets/gets the marker table stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:TABLe ON

9.8.9

Marker Funtion

Special marker functions including Noise Marker, N dB BW and Freq Counter.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:FUNCtion OFF|FCOunt|NOISe|NDB:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:FUNCtion?

Instructions

Set/Get marker function

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

OFF: normal
NOISe: noisy marker
NDB: N dB marker

ReturnEnumeration: OFF|NOISe|NDB

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:FUNCtion NOISe

9.8.9.1

N dB BW

Enable the N dB BW measurement or set the value of N dB. The N dB BW denotes the frequency
difference between two points that are located on both sides of the current marker and with N dB fall
(N Less than or equal to 0) or rise (N>0) in amplitude as shown in the figure on the next page.

When the measurement starts, the analyzer will search for the two points which are located at bothsides of the current point with N dB fall or rise in amplitude and display the frequency difference

int.siglent.com

247

SSA5000A Series User Manual

between the two points in the active function area. "----" would be displayed if the search fails.
The parameters in the figure are shown as:

Figure 9-3 N dB parameter

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:BANDwidth:NDB:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:BANDwidth:NDB?

Instructions

Set/Obtain the N dB bandwidth reference value

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-100 dB ~ 100 dB

Return

Float

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:BANDwidth:NDB 10 DB

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:BANDwidth:RESult?

Instructions

Result of setting/reading N dB bandwidth

Return

Float

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:BANDwidth:RESult?

9.8.9.2

Freq Counter

Turn on or off the frequency counter. The frequency readout is accuracy is up to 0.01 Hz.


The function is valid only when selecting marker 1.



If marker 1 is selected but not active, turning on the frequency counter will open marker 1
Normal marker automatically.

The frequency counter measures the frequency near the center frequency in Zero span.

Command format

248:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:FCOunt:[:STATe] ON|OFF|0|1:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:FCOunt:[:STATe]?

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Instructions

Sets/gets the marker frequency counter stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:FCOunt 1

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:FCOunt:X?

Instructions

Read the marker frequency counter reading

Return

Float

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:FCOunt:X?

9.8.9.3

Noise Marker

Execute the Noise marker function for the selected marker and read the normalized noise power
spectral density.


If the current marker is “ Off ” in the Marker menu, pressing Noise Marker will first set it toNormal type automatically; then measure the average noise level at the marked point andnormalize this value to 1 Hz bandwidth. During this process, certain compensation is always
made based on the detection and trace types. The measurement will be more precise if RMS
Avg or Sample detection type is used.

This function can be used for measuring the C/N ratio.

9.8.9.4

Off

Turn off the noise marker, N dB BW measurement or Frequency Counter, but not the marker itself.

9.8.10Peak Search

Open the peak search setting menu and execute peak search.
9.8.10.1

Peak Search

Next Search
Execute peak search and mark the peak.

Minium PeakExecute minimum search and mark the minium peak.

Next Peak
Search for and mark the peak whose amplitude is closest to that of the current peak and which meetsthe peak search condition.

Next Left Peakint.siglent.com

249

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Search for and mark the nearest peak which is located at the left side of the current peak and meetsthe peak search condition.

Next Right Peak
Search for and mark the nearest peak which is located at the right side of the current peak and meetsthe peak search condition.

Peak PeakExecute peak search and minimum search at the same time and mark the results with delta pairmarkers. Wherein, the result of peak search is marked with the delta marker and the result of
minimum search is marked with the reference marker.

Peak -> CF
Execute peak search and set the center frequency of the analyzer to the frequency of the peak. The
function is invalid in Zero Span.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum

Instructions

Marker searches for peaks and marks them with the specified marker(If peak-to-peak value is on, peak-to-peak value search is carried out; otherwise,
single peak value search is carried out, refer to thecommand:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:PTPeak:STATe
Search criteria include peak type, absolute threshold, and relative offset:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:MODE:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion)

Example:CALCulate:MARKer4:MAXimum

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MINimum

Instructions

Marker searches for the minimum peak and marks it with the specified marker

Example:CALCulate:MARKer4:MINimum

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:NEXT

Instructions

Marker searches for the next peak and marks it with the specified marker(Based on the set search criteria, including peak type, absolute threshold, andrelative offset, see the following
command:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:MODE:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion)

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:MAXimum:NEXT

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:LEFT:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:RIGHt

Instructions

Marker searches for left/right peaks and marks with the specified marker(Based on the set search criteria, including peak type, absolute threshold, andrelative offset, see the following command250

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:MODE:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion)
Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:MAXimum:LEFT

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:PTPeak

Instructions

Performs a peak-to-peak search, marking with the specified marker

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:PTPeak

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum[:SET]:CENTer

Instructions

Execute peak search and set the center frequency of the analyzer to the frequency ofthe peakExample:CALCulate:MARKer1:MAXimum:CENTer

9.8.10.2

Peak Config

Define the conditions of peak search for various peak searches. A real peak should meet therequirements of both the “Peak Threshold” and “Peak Excursion”.

Peak Threshold
Assign a minimum for the peak amplitude. Peaks whose amplitudes are greater than the specified
peak threshold are treated as real peaks.The actual minimal peak threshold is -200dBm when shut
down the Peak Threshold.
Peak Excursion
Set the excursion between the peak and the minimum amplitude on both sides of it. Peaks whose
excursions are beyond the specified excursion are treated as real peaks.The actual minimal peakexcursion is 0dBm when shut down the Peak Excursion.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold?

Instructions

Sets/gets the absolute threshold for the peak search criteria

Parameter Type

Float , unitdBm

Parameter Range-200.0 dBm~ 200.0 dBm

ReturnFloat , unitdBm

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:STATe?

Instructions

Set or obtain the absolute threshold switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:CPSEarch ON

int.siglent.com

-50

251

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion?

Instructions

Sets/gets a relative threshold for the peak search criteria

Parameter Type

Float , unitdB

Parameter Range

0 ~ 200.0 dB

ReturnFloat , unitdB

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion 10

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion:STATe?

Instructions

Set and obtain the relative threshold switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion:STATe ON

9.8.10.3

Count Peak

Enable or disable continuous peak search. The default is Off. When enabled, the system will always
execute a peak search automatically after each sweep in order to track the signal undermeasurement.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:CPSearch[:STATe]:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:CPSearch[:STATe]?

Instructions

Enable the continuous peak search function
Gets the status of the continuous peak search function switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:CPSEarch ON

9.8.10.4

Peak Table

Open the peak table (in the lower window) which lists the peaks (with frequency and amplitude) thatmeet the peak search condition. Up to 30 peaks can be displayed in the table.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe?

Instructions

Set/Query the switch of the peak value table

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe ON

252

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format:CALCulate:PEAK:TABLe?

Instructions

Get peak table data

ReturnStringExample:CALCulate:PEAK:TABLe?

9.8.10.5

Sort Order

Sort all signals in the peak table by the specific order.
Sort order based on the frequency / time(zero span) , ampt or delta to limit.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT?

Instructions

Sets/gets the peak sorting basis

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range
Return

AMPT|FREQ|DELTa
AMPT|FREQ|DELTa

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT FREQ:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT?

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT:ORDEr:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT:ORDEr?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the peak sort type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range
ReturnASC|DEC
ASC|DEC

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT:ORDEr DEC:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT:ORDEr?

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:DTLimit:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:DTLimit?

Instructions

Peak sorting based on limit selection

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

1-6

Return

1-6

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:DTLimit 5:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:DTLimit?

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:DTLimit:STATe 0|1:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:DTLimit:STATe?

Instructions

Set/Query the switch of the peak value table

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:DTLimit:STATe ON

int.siglent.com

253

SSA5000A Series User Manual

9.9

Meas & Meas Setup

Provide optional measurement functions. When activated, the screen will be divided into two parts.
The above part is the measure screen which displays traces, and the other part is used to display
measurement results.

9.9.1

Swept SAThe Swept SA measurement lets you perform “traditional” Spectrum Analysis, that is, Swept andZero Span measurements, as well as “Swept FFT” analysis (FFT analysis presented as though it
were swept).
9.9.1.1

Average TypeChoose one of the following averaging types: log power (video), power (RMS), or voltage averaging.
When trace average is on, the average type is shown on the left side of the display.

Figure 9-4 Average Type

Log Power
Select the logarithmic (decibel) scale for all filtering and averaging processes. This scale is"Video" because it is the most common display and analysis scale for the video signal within
analyzer. This scale is excellent for finding Sine/CW signals near noise.

Power Average
In this average type, all filtering and averaging processes work on the power (the square of themagnitude) of the signal, instead of its log or envelope voltage. This scale is best for real-time
power measurement of complex signals.



Voltage Average
In this Average type, all filtering and averaging processes work on the voltage of the envelope ofthe signal. This scale is suitable for observing rise and fall behavior of AM or pulse-modulated
signals such as radar and TDMA transmitters.

254

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE LOGPower|POWer|VOLTage[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE?

Instructions

Set/Query the average type

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

LOGPower
POWer
VOLTage

ReturnEnumeration: LOGP|POW|VOLT

ExampleAVERage:TYPE VOLTage

Command format[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE:AUTO 0|1|ON|OFF[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE:AUTO?

Instructions

Set/query the average type automatically

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:AVERage:TYPE:AUTO 1

9.9.1.2

Average/Hold Number

Sets the terminal count number N for Average, Max Hold and Min Hold trace types. This number isan integral part of how the average trace is calculated. Basically, increasing N results in a smootheraverage trace.

Command format[:SENSe]:AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:COUNt[:SENSe]:AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:COUNt?

Instructions

Sets/gets the average number of traces

Parameter type

IntegerParameter Range

1 ~ 999

ReturnInteger

Example:AVERage:TRACe1:COUNt 10

Command format[:SENSe]:AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6?
[:SENSe]:AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:CLEar

Instructions

The current average number of times the trace has been obtained
Restart average

Example:AVERage:TRACe2 ?
:AVERage:TRACe2:CLEar

9.9.1.3

Pulse Setting and Display

Pulse: Mainly refers to the process in which a physical quantity quickly returns to its initial state after
a sudden change in duration. Pulse is a signal that occurs in a short period of time relative to acontinuous signal throughout the entire signal cycle. Pulse generally includes main characteristic
parameters such as pulse amplitude, pulse width, pulse rise time, pulse fall time, pulse period, pulse

int.siglent.com

255

SSA5000A Series User Manualfrequency, etc.

Trace average
The sum of all amplitudes of the entire trace divided by the number of scan points (dBm).
Determine the top (TOP) and bottom (BASE) of the pulse, positive peak (PosPeak), negative peak
(NegPeak), and pulse properties

The entire pulse trace will first calculate the maximum and minimum amplitude values, and thengenerate a pulse table by counting the amplitude histogram of the entire trace. The pulse table issorted by amplitude size. The highest level (dBm) in the current statistical table is denoted as(PosPeak), and the lowest level (dBm) is denoted as (NegPeak),Intermediate level: Amptmid = (PosPeak - NegPeak) / 2 + NegPeak ,The intermediate level divides the pulse meter into upper and lower parts according to the rules ofAmptmid above/below the intermediate level. In automatic mode, the pulse top (TOP) is the mode of
the upper sub pulse table, and the pulse bottom (BASE) is the mode of the lower sub pulse table.
Count and compare the total number of pulse points in the upper and lower parts of the pulse table.
The pulse with more points in the upper part is a positive pulse, while the pulse with more points inthe lower part is a negative pulse.
Determine the edge of the pulse
When a trace continuously passes through the pulse low reference (RefLow, 10%), pulse continuous
reference (RefDuration, 50%), pulse high reference (RefHigh, 90%) (referred to as the rising edge),or when it passes through these three reference amplitudes in the opposite direction (referred to as
the falling edge), mark this trace as the edge of the pulse. To fully measure the parameters of a pulse,
at least 3 edges are required. When there are less than 3 edges, most pulse measurement results
will be displayed as "NAN".

Determine the pulse edge to be measured
When the pulse is a positive pulse, if the first edge is the rising edge, then the measured rising edge
is the first edge, and the falling edge is the second edge; If the first edge is a falling edge, then themeasured rising edge is the second edge, and the falling edge is the third edge.
When the pulse is negative, if the first edge is the rising edge, then the measured falling edge is thesecond edge, and the rising edge is the third edge; If the first edge is a falling edge, then themeasured falling edge is the first edge and the rising edge is the second edge.

Pulse period
The period of a pulse is the average period of all complete cycle traces.

256

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Pulse duration and pulse center
The pulse duration is the time difference between a positive pulse (negative pulse) passing throughthe pulse duration reference (RefDuration, 50%) on the rising edge (falling edge) and a falling edge
(rising edge) passing through the pulse duration reference (RefDuration, 50%).
The pulse center is the center point where the rising edge (falling edge) of a positive pulse (negative
pulse) passes through the pulse duration reference (RefDuration, 50%) and the falling edge (risingedge) passes through the pulse duration reference (RefDuration, 50%).

Pulse closing time
Pulse off time=pulse period - pulse duration

Pulse rise time and fall time
The pulse rise time is the time it takes for the first rising edge of a pulse to pass between the low
reference (RefLow, 10%) and the high reference (RefHigh, 90%).
The pulse descent time is the time it takes for the first descending edge of the pulse to pass between
the high reference (RefHigh, 90%) and the low reference (RefLow, 10%).
Upward overshoot, ascending overshoot, descending overshoot, descending overshootRising forward excitation is the difference between the minimum amplitude of the first rising edge
along the trace and the pulse base at the time of the last passing through the pulse base, and thedifference between the minimum amplitude of the previous passing through the pulse base and thepulse base.
Rising overshoot is the difference between the maximum amplitude of the first rising edge of a trace
passing through the pulse top (TOP) for the first time and the pulse top (TOP) for the second time.
Descending pre excitation is the difference between the maximum amplitude and the pulse top (TOP)of the first descending edge along the trace at the time point of the last passing through the top of thepulse.
Descending overshoot is the difference between the minimum amplitude of the first falling edge of a
trace passing through the pulse base for the first time and the pulse base for the second time.

Waveform average
The waveform average is the average power of all points within the complete cycle of the trace. If
there is not at least one complete cycle, the waveform average will return "NAN".
Pulse average value
The pulse average is the average amplitude of all points above the high reference (RefHigh, 90%) ofa positive pulse. If there is no positive pulse, return "NAN".

Command format

int.siglent.com[:SENSe]:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATe[:SENSe] :DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATe?

257

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Instructions

Set/Get Amplitude Line Switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATe 1

Command format[:SENSe] :DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe[:SENSe] :DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe?

Instructions

Setting/Get amplitude line values

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range
ReturnExample:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLIN 20

Command format[:SENSe] :DISPlaX:WINDow:TRACe:X:FLINe:STATe[:SENSe] :DISPlaX:WINDow:TRACe:X:FLINe:STATe?

Instructions

Set/Get Timeline Switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:DISPlaX:WINDow:TRACe:X:FLINe:STATe 1

Command format[:SENSe] :DISPlaX:WINDow:TRACe:X:FLINe[:SENSe] :DISPlaX:WINDow:TRACe:X:FLINe?

Instructions

Set/Get Timeline Values

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range
ReturnEnumeration: LOGP|POW|VOLT

Example:DISPlaX:WINDow:TRACe:X:FLINe 5

Command format[:SENSe]:PULSe:LABel:ALL:OFF

Instructions

Set ALL OFF Switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range
ReturnExample:PULSe:LABel:ALL:OFF

Command format[:SENSe]:PULSe:LABel:INSTant:REFerence:DURation[:SENSe]:PULSe:LABel:INSTant:REFerence:DURation?

Instructions

Set/Get Duration Instant Intersection Switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:PULSe:LABel:INSTant:REFerence:DURation 1

258

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual
Command format[:SENSe]:PULSe:LABel:LEVel:REFerence:DURation[:SENSe]:PULSe:LABel:LEVel:REFerence:DURation?

Instructions

Set/Get Duration Ref line Switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:PULSe:LABel:LEVel:REFerence:DURation 1

Command format[:SENSe]:PULSe:REFerence:DURation[:SENSe]:PULSe:REFerence:DURation?

Instructions

Sets/gets Duration Ref line Position percentage

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range
ReturnExample:PULSe:REFerence:DURation 50

Command format[:SENSe]:PULSe:LEVel:TYPE:AUTO[:SENSe]:PULSe:LEVel:TYPE:AUTO?

Instructions

Sets/gets Auto Ref Switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:PULSe:LEVel:TYPE:AUTO 1

Command format[:SENSe]:PULSe:LABel:LEVel:REFerence:HIGH[:SENSe]:PULSe:LABel:LEVel:REFerence:HIGH?

Instructions

Sets/gets High Ref line Switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:PULSe:LABel:LEVel:REFerence:HIGH 1

Command format[:SENSe]:PULSe:LEVel:USER:TOP[:SENSe]:PULSe:LEVel:USER:TOP?

Instructions

Sets/gets Pulse Top value

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:PULSe:LEVel:USER:TOP 20

Command format[:SENSe]:PULSe:LABel:LEVel:REFerence:LOW[:SENSe]:PULSe:LABel:LEVel:REFerence:LOW?

Instructions

Sets/getsLow Ref line Switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:PULSe:LABel:LEVel:REFerence:LOW 1

int.siglent.com

259

SSA5000A Series User Manual
Command format[:SENSe] :PULSe:LEVel:USER:BOTTom[:SENSe] :PULSe:LEVel:USER:BOTTom?

Instructions

Sets/getsPulse Base value

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range
ReturnExample:PULSe:LEVel:USER:BOTTom 12

Command format[:SENSe]:PULSe:LABel:INSTant:CENTer[:SENSe]:PULSe:LABel:INSTant:CENTer?

Instructions

Sets/gets Center line Switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:PULSe:LABel:INSTant:CENTer 1

Command format[:SENSe]:PULSe:REFerence:HIGH[:SENSe]:PULSe:REFerence:HIGH?

Instructions

Sets/gets High Ref line Position percentage

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range
ReturnExample:PULSe:REFerence:HIGH 90

Command format[:SENSe]:PULSe:LABel:INSTant:REFerence:HIGH[:SENSe]:PULSe:LABel:INSTant:REFerence:HIGH?

Instructions

Sets/gets High Instant Intersection switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:PULSe:LABel:INSTant:REFerence:HIGH 1

Command format[:SENSe]:PULSe:LABel:LEVel:REFerence:HIGH[:SENSe]:PULSe:LABel:LEVel:REFerence:HIGH?

Instructions

Sets/gets High Ref line Switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:PULSe:LABel:LEVel:REFerence:HIGH 1

Command format[:SENSe]:PULSe:REFerence:LOW[:SENSe]:PULSe:REFerence:LOW?

Instructions

Sets/gets Low Ref line Position percentage

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range
ReturnExample260:PULSe:REFerence:LOW 10

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format[:SENSe]:PULSe:LABel:INSTant:REFerence:LOW[:SENSe]:PULSe:LABel:INSTant:REFerence:LOW?

Instructions

Sets/gets Low Instant Intersection switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:AVERage:TYPE:AUTO 1

Command format[:SENSe]:PULSe:LABel:LEVel:REFerence:LOW[:SENSe]:PULSe:LABel:LEVel:REFerence:LOW?

Instructions

Sets/getsLow Ref line Switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:PULSe:LABel:INSTant:REFerence:LOW 1

Command format[:SENSe]:FUNCtion:FALLtime?

Instructions

Gets descent time

Parameter Type

Boolean

Example:FUNCtion:FALLtime?

Command format[:SENSe]:FUNCtion:RISetime?

Instructions

Gets rise time

Parameter Type

Boolean

Example:FUNCtion:RISetime?

Command format[:SENSe]:FUNCtion:DURAtiontime?

Instructions

Gets duration

Parameter Type

Boolean

Example:FUNCtion:DURAtiontime?

Command format[:SENSe]:FUNCtion:PERIodtime?

Instructions

Gets period

Parameter Type

Boolean

Example:FUNCtion:PERIodtime?

int.siglent.com

261

SSA5000A Series User Manual

10

Phase Noise Measurement Mode

The phase noise mode is mainly used for measuring single sideband phase noise testing analysis,
jitter analysis, etc.

10.1 Frequency & Span
10.1.1

Carrier Frequency

Specify the center frequency of the carrier wave.

Command format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CARRier[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CARRier?

Instruction

Sets/gets the center frequency

Parameter Type

Float, unit:Hz , kHz , MHz , GHz

Parameter Range

50Hz~28GHz

ReturnFloat, unit:Hz

Example:FREQuency:CARRier 0.2 GHz:SENSe:FREQuency:CARRier 0.2 GHz

10.1.2Start Offset

Specify the center frequency of the carrier wave. Set the starting frequency offset of the logarithmic
plot, which refers to the offset frequency of the upper sideband from the carrier frequency.

262

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format[:SENSe]:LPLot:FREQuency:OFFSet:STARt[:SENSe]:LPLot:FREQuency:OFFSet:STARt?

Instruction

Sets/gets Start offset of scanned upper sideband

Parameter Type

Float, unit:Hz , kHz , MHz , GHz

Parameter Range

1Hz~2.8GHz

ReturnFloat, unit:Hz

Example:LPLot:FREQuency:OFFSet:STARt 100 Hz:SENSe:LPLot:FREQuency:OFFSet:STARt 0.2 GHz

10.1.3

Stop Offset

Set the end frequency offset of the logarithmic plot, which refers to the offset frequency of the upper
sideband from the carrier frequency.

Command format[:SENSe]:LPLot:FREQuency:OFFSet:STOP[:SENSe]:LPLot:FREQuency:OFFSet:STOP?

Instruction

Sets/gets End offset of scanned upper sideband

Parameter Type

Float, unit:Hz , kHz , MHz , GHz

Parameter Range

100Hz~28GHz

ReturnFloat, unitHz

Example:LPLot:FREQuency:OFFSet:STOP 100 Hz:SENSe:LPLot:FREQuency:OFFSet:STOP 0.2 GHz

10.1.4

Auto Tune

Automatically search for carrier signals throughout the entire frequency range, adjust frequency andamplitude parameters to the optimal state, and achieve signal search and parameter automatic
setting with just one click.
When this function is executed, "Auto Tune" is displayed in the screen status bar. After the automatic
search is completed, the "Auto Tune" flag in the screen status bar disappears.
The automatic search process will modify parameters such as scanning range, reference level, scalesize, input attenuation, etc.

Command format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CARRier:SEARch

Instruction

Search for carrier signal

Example:FREQuency:CARRier:SEARch:SENSe:FREQuency:CARRier:SEARch

10.1.5Singal Tracking

Used to track signals with unstable measurement frequency and instantaneous amplitude changes
less than 3 dB. When signal tracking is turned off, the analyzer measures at a fixed carrier frequency.
When signal tracking is turned on, the analyzer repeatedly measures the center frequency of theint.siglent.com

263

SSA5000A Series User Manual

carrier signal during each acquisition and returns a new carrier frequency if necessary.

Command format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CARRier:TRACk[:STATe][:SENSe]:FREQuency:CARRier:TRACk[:STATe]?

Instruction

Sets/gets Signal tracking status

Parameter Type

bool

Parameter Range

0|1|OFF|ON

Return0|1

Example:FREQuency:CARRier:TRACk ON:SENSe:FREQuency:CARRier:TRACk:STATe OFF

Command format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CARRier:TRACk:SPAN[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CARRier:TRACk:SPAN?

Instruction

Sets/gets Frequency range of signal tracking

Parameter Type

Float, unit:Hz , kHz , MHz , GHz

Parameter Range

10kHz~50kHz

ReturnFloat, unit:Hz

Example:FREQuency:CARRier:TRACk ON:SENSe:FREQuency:CARRier:TRACk:STATe OFF

264

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

10.2 Sweep
10.2.1

Sweep Points

Sweep Points characterized the number of scanning and trace display points (601~10001).
More scanning points will improve the resolution of the waveform, while also affecting the minimum
scanning time, increasing data processing time and remote access time, and reducing response
rate.

Command format[:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts[:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts?

Instruction

Sets sweep points.
Gets sweep points.

Parameter TypeintegerParameter Range

601-10001

Return601-10001

Example:SWEep:POINts 2001
:SWEep:POINts?

10.2.2

Sweep/Measure

Single/Continue controls analyzer to perform single or continuous sweep/measure,
RestartRestart the current sweep or measure. In particular, if the sweep parameters are modified, a restart
will be performed.

Command format:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF|ON|0|1:INITiate:CONTinuous?

Instruction

Sets continuous sweep mode on-off.
Gets continuous sweep mode state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF

Command format:INITiate[:IMMediate]

Instruction

Restarts the current sweep.

Example:INITiate:IMMediate

Command format:INITiate:RESTart

Instruction

Restarts the current sweep.

Example:INITiate:RESTart

int.siglent.com

265

SSA5000A Series User Manual

10.3 Amplitude
10.3.1

Ref Level

Set absolute power reference value. The position of the reference level can be set to top, middle, or
bottom.

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel?

Instruction

Sets/gets reference level.

Parameter Type

Float, unitdBc

Parameter Range-200dBc~20dBc

ReturnFloat, unitdBc

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:RLEVel -20:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:RLEVel?

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition?

Instruction

Sets/gets the reference level for the Y-axis.

Parameter Type

Enumeration value

Parameter Range

TOP|CENTer|BOTTom

ReturnEnumeration value

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:RPOSition TOP:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:RPOSition?

10.3.2Y Axis Scale TypeSet the scale size of each grid on the vertical axis to adjust the current range of displayed amplitudes.
Pay attention to the following points during use:
Adjust the current displayed amplitude range by setting different scales.

The current signal amplitude range that can be displayed:
Minimum value: Reference level – 10 * Current scale;

The maximum value is: reference level.

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision?

Instruction

Sets/gets the scale

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

0.1dB ~ 20dB

ReturnFloat , unit dB

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision 5dB

266

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

10.4 Marker
10.4.1

Select Marker

Select one of the eight markers. The default is Marker1. When a marker is selected, you can set its
type, trace to be marked, readout type and other related parameters. The enabled marker will appear
on the trace selected through the Select Trace option and the readouts of this marker are also
displayed in the active function area and at the upper right corner of the screen.

Command format:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer:SELEct:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer:SELEct?

Instruction

Sets/Gets the current marker

Parameter Type

Enumeration1-8

ReturnEnumeration: 1-8

Example:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer:SELEct 5

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:TABLe[:STATe]:CALCulate:MARKer:TABLe[:STATe]?

Instruction

Sets/Gets the marker stateParameter Typebool, 0|1|ON|OFF

Returnbool, 0|1|ON|OFF

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:TABLe ON

10.4.2

Select Trace

Select the trace to be marked by the current marker.1, 2, 3.

Command format:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3:TRACe 1|2|3:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3:TRACe?

Instruction

Sets/Gets the marker trace

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

1|2|3

ReturnEnumeration

ExampleCALCulate:LPLot:MARK:TRAC 1

10.4.3Marker Type10.4.3.1

NormalOne of the marker types. It is used to measure the X (Frequency or Time) and Y (Amplitude) valuesof a certain point on the trace. When selected, a marker with the number of the current marker (suchas “ 1 ”) appears on the trace.


If no active marker exists currently, a marker will be enabled automatically at the center
frequency of the current trace.

int.siglent.com

267

SSA5000A Series User Manual

You can use the numeric keys, knob or direction keys to move the marker. The readouts of themarker will be displayed at the upper right corner of the screen.

The readout resolution of the X-axis (frequency or time) is related to the span. For higher
readout resolution, reduce the span.

10.4.3.2

Delta

One of the marker types. It is used to measure the delta values of X (Frequency or Time) and Y(Amplitude) between the reference point and a certain point on the trace. When selected, a pair ofmarkers appears on the trace: Fixed Related Marker (marked by a combination of the marker
number and letter “ + ”, such as “ 2+ ”) and the Delta Marker (marked by the “∆”, such as “ 1∆2 ”).
After the marker selects “Delta”, the original marker will become the delta measurement marker,

and the related marker of the incrementing sequence number will become the reference “fixed”
marker

The delta marker is in the "relative to" state, and its X-axis position can be changed; the related
marker is in the "fixed" state by default (the X-axis and Y-axis positions are fixed), but the X-axis
can be adjusted by changing to the "normal" state.

The first row in the upper right corner of the trace area shows the frequency (or time) difference
and amplitude difference between the two markers; the second row in the upper right corner of
the trace area shows the X axis and amplitude value of the related marker.



Delta reset. It is only valid when the current marker is a differential marker. If the marker type ofthe relative marker of the current marker is normal or differential, change the horizontal positionof the relative marker to the horizontal position of the current marker; if the marker type of therelative marker is fixed, change the horizontal position and vertical position of the relative marker
to the current one. The horizontal and vertical position of the marker.

10.4.3.3

Off

Turn off the marker currently selected. The marker information displayed on the screen and functions
based on the marker will also be turned off.

Command format:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE POSition|DELTa|OFF:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MODE?

Instruction

Sets/Gets the marker mode

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

POSition
DELTa
OFF

ReturnEnumeration: POS|DELT|OFF

Example:CALCulate:LPLot:MARK1:MODE POSition268

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe OFF|ON|0|1:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe?

Instruction

Sets/gets the marker switch status

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:STATe ON

Command format:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:REFerence 1|2|3|4:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:REFerence?

Instruction

Sets/Gets the marker relative toParameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8

ReturnEnumeration

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:REFerence 3

Command format:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer#[:SET]:RESEt:DELTa

Instruction

Difference marker resets to 0
Only valid when the current cursor is a differential marker

Example:CALCulate:MARKer2:RESEt:DELTa

Command format:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer:AOFF

Instruction

Close all markers

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF

10.4.4Marker Postion

Manually set the position of the cursor.

Command format:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X?
:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:POSition:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:POSition?

Instruction

Sets/gets the value of the marker point X axis
This command takes effect only when the marker mode is not OFF:

Parameter Typefrequency , Float , unitHz , kHz , MHz , GHz , default Hz

Parameter Range

0 Hz ~ max frequency

ReturnFloat, unit:Hz;

Example:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer4:X 0.4 GHz:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer4:X?

10.4.5Marker Fn

The cursor function provides a method for further processing the current cursor data to achieve
specific results or make measurement results more accurate.

int.siglent.com

269

SSA5000A Series User Manual

When the cursor function is turned on, if the current cursor is not open, the cursor type of the current
cursor will be automatically changed to [Normal]. When the cursor is turned off, its cursor function willautomatically turn off.

Command format:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:FUNCtion OFF|RMSNoise:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:FUNCtion?

Instruction

Set/Get marker function

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

OFF|RMSNoise

ReturnEnumeration

Example:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer1:FUNCtion OFF:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer1:FUNCtion?

Integrated noise
Calculate the integral of noise density within the specified frequency range. The calculation results
can be displayed in degrees, radians, RMS jitter, or total noise power

Command format:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:RMSNoise:MODE
DEGRee|RADian|JITTerDBC:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:RMSNoise:MODE?

Instruction

Set/Get Result Type for Integral NoiseParameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

DEGRee|RADian|JITTer|DBC

ReturnEnumeration

Example:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer1:RMSNoise:MODE DBC:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer1:RMSNoise:MODE?

Command format:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:BAND:SPAN:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:BAND:SPAN?

Instruction

Set/Get the Result Type of Integral Noise Integral Bandwidth of Integral NoiseParameter Typefreq , Float, unitHz , kHz , MHz , GHz , default Hz

Parameter Range

Scan start offset ~ Scan end offset

ReturnFloat, unitHz , kHz , MHz , GHz ,default Hz

Example:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer1:BAND:SPAN 1000Hz:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer1:BAND:SPAN?

Command format:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:BAND:LEFT:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:BAND:LEFT?
:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:BAND:RIGHt:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:BAND:RIGHt?

Instruction

Set/Get the left/right offset frequency of the integral noise.

Parameter Typefreq , Float, unitHz , kHz , MHz , GHz ,default Hz

Parameter Range

Scan start offset ~ Scan end offset

ReturnFloat, unitHz , kHz , MHz , GHz , default Hz

Example:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer1:BAND:LEFT 1000Hz:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer1:BAND:RIGHt?

270

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:RMSNoise: RESult?

Instruction

Set/Get the measurement results of integrated noise

Parameter Type

Float, unit depending on the set result type

ReturnFloat, unit depending on the set result type

Example:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer1:RMSNoise:RESult?

10.4.6

Spurious search

Search for stray signals on the original trace. The spurious search algorithm is as follows:
For each frequency point displayed on the screen, calculate its standard deviation:

Set the threshold for this frequency point during spurious searchthreshold = max(10, 𝛔),At this frequency point, if:
Ampl Original trace – Ampl Smooth trace > threshold, so consider that frequency point as spurious.

Command format:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:SPURious:MAXimum[:PEAK]

Instruction

Search for clutter and mark with the specified cursor

Example:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer1:SPURious:MAXimum

Command format:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:SPURious:MAXimum:NEXT

Instruction

Next spurious

Example:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer1:SPURious:MAXimum:NEXT

Command format:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:SPURious:MAXimum:RIGHt

Instruction

Next spurious on the right side

Example:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer1:SPURious:MAXimum:RIGHt

Command format:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:SPURious:MAXimum:LEFT

Instruction

Next spurious on the left side

Example:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer1:SPURious:MAXimum:LEFT

Command format:CALCulate:PEAK:TABLe?

Instruction

Get spurious list

Example:CALCulate:PEAK:TABLe?

int.siglent.com

271

SSA5000A Series User Manual

10.5 Trace
10.5.1

Select Trace

The analyzer allows for up to four traces to be displayed at the same time. Each trace has its own
color (Trace A - Yellow, Trace B - Purple, Trace C - Light blue).
All traces can be set parameter independently. As a default, analyzer will choose Trace A and set thetype of the trace as Clear Write.

Command format:TRACe[1]|2|3 [:DATA]?

Instruction

Gets the data of trace

Returncharacter string

Example:TRACe:DATA?

Command format:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA]ASCii|REAL32| REAL:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA]?

Instruction

Set/Get Read Trace Data Format

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

ASCii
REAL32REAL Floating 64 bit

ReturnEnumeration: ASCii|REAL| REAL32

Example:FORMat ASCii

Command format

TRACe:SELEct
TRACe:SELEct?

Instruction

Sets/gets the current trace

Parameter Type

EnumerationTRACE1-3

ReturnEnumeration: TRACE1-3

ExampleTRACe:SELEct TRACE3

10.5.2

Trace TypeRaw data
Display real-time scanned data for each point on the trace.

Smoothing
Each point on the trace is taken as the average of all points within the set smoothing window size
centered on the current point.
View
Stop updating trace data for observation and reading purposes. Traces from storage devices orremotely loaded into the system, with the default type being View.

272

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

BLANK
Turn off the display of the trace and all measurement functions based on that trace. The trace in theclosed state is not displayed, and the data is in the previous state.

Command format:TRACe[1]|2|3:LPLot:MODE RAW|SMOothed|VIEW|BLANk:TRACe[1]|2|3:LPLot:MODE?
:TRACe[1]|2|3:LPLot:TYPE:TRACe[1]|2|3:LPLot:TYPE?

Instruction

Sets/gets the type of trace

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter RangeRAW
SMOothVIEW
BLANk

ReturnEnumeration: RAW|SMOothed|VIEW|BLANk

Example:TRAC1: LPLot:TYPE BLANk

Command format[:SENSe]:LPLot:DETector[:FUNCtion]

Instruction

Sets/Gets the trace detection type

ReturnEnumeration

Example:LPLot:DETector

10.5.3

Trace Function

Copy
Copy the data from the source trace to the target trace. After copying, the trace status of the target
trace will automatically change to View.

Command format:TRACe:LPLot:COPY

Instruction

Copy the trace

Example:TRACe:LPLot:COPY 1,2

Exchange
Exchange the data of the source trace with the data of the target trace. After the exchange, the trace
status of the source trace and the target trace will be automatically changed to view.

Command format:TRACe:LPLot::EXCHange

Instruction

Exchange of trace

Example:TRACe:LPLot::EXCHange 1,2

Preset All Traces
Set trace 1 as raw data and activate it; Close all other traces.

int.siglent.com

273

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format:TRACe:PRESet:ALL

Instruction

Reset all traces

Example:TRACe:PRESet:ALL

Clear All Traces
Clear all traces without affecting the state of any functions or variables in the instrument.

Command format:TRACe:CLEar:ALL

Instruction

Change all trace data to default minimum values

Example:TRACe:CLEar:ALL

274

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

10.6 Meas
10.6.1

Average

Command format[:SENSe]:LPLot:AVERage:STATe 0|1|OFF|ON[:SENSe]:LPLot:AVERage:STATe?

Instruction

Set/Get the average type

Parameter Type

bool

Parameter Range

0|1|OFF|ON

Returnbool

Example:LPLot:AVERage:STATe ON

10.6.1.1

Average/Hold Number

Sets the terminal count number N for Average, Max Hold and Min Hold trace types. This number isan integral part of how the average trace is calculated. Basically, increasing N results in a smootheraverage trace.

Command format[:SENSe]:LPLot:AVERage:COUNt[:SENSe]:LPLot:AVERage:COUNt?

Instruction

Sets/gets the average number

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

1 ~ 100

ReturnInteger

Example:LPLot:AVERage:COUNt 10

10.6.1.2

Averaging Mode

Allow selection of control types for average functionality. This will determine the average operation
after reaching the specified number of data collection attempts (average count). The options include:

Exponential (Exp): Measure the average operation by continuously calculating the weighted
average of each index using a specified number of averages. The average value is displayed at
the end of each scan.



Repeat: Every time the specified average is reached, the measurement will reset the averagecounter.

Command format[:SENSe]:LPLot:AVERage:TCONtrol EXPOnentialr|REPEat[:SENSe]:LPLot:AVERage:TCONtrol?

Instruction

Sets/gets the average mode

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

EXPOnentialr|REPEat

ReturnEnumerationEXPOnentialr|REPEat

Example:CHPower:AVERage:TCONtrol REPEat

int.siglent.com

275

SSA5000A Series User Manual

10.6.2View

The view menu allows for the selection of display views: Normal, decade, spurious.

Command format:DISPlay:LPLot:VIEW NORMal|DECade|SPURious:DISPlay:LPLot:VIEW?

Instruction

Sets/gets the view mode

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

NORMal|DECade|SPURious

ReturnEnumerationNORMal|DECade|SPURious

Example:DISP:LPLot:VIEW NORMal

Command format:CALCulate:LPLot:SPURious:TABLe 0|1|OFF|ON:CALCulate:LPLot:SPURious:TABLe?

Instruction

Sets/gets the spurious mode

Parameter Type

bool

Parameter Range

0|1|OFF|ON

Returnbool

Example:CALC:LPL:SPUR:TABL ON

Command format:CALCulate:LPLot:DECade:TABLe 0|1|OFF|ON:CALCulate:LPLot:DECade:TABLe?

Instruction

Sets/gets the decade mode

Parameter Type

bool

Parameter Range

0|1|OFF|ON

Returnbool

Example:CALC:LPL:DEC:TABL ON

10.6.3

Meas TypeMeas Type allow users to switch between phase noise measurement and DANL Floor.

Command format[:SENSe]:LPLot:METHod DANL|PN[:SENSe]:LPLot:METHod?

Instruction

Sets/gets the meas type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

DANL|PN

ReturnEnumerationDANL|PN

Example:LPLot:METHod PN

10.6.4

Smoothing

The smoothing window allows users to set the smoothing window size for smoothing traces. Unlike
average, smoothing refers to the average amplitude of different frequency points in the same frame

276

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manualof data, while average refers to the average amplitude of the same frequency point in different
frames.
The smooth window setting requires an average number of points. For a trace, the amplitude value ofeach frequency point on the trace is centered on the current frequency point, and the number is thenumber of scan points multiplied by the smoothing window/100, which is the average amplitude
value of the original data of these points. The larger the smoothing window, the smoother the trace;
When the smoothing window is set to zero, smoothing is turned off.
The larger the smoothing window, the smoother the trace.

Command format[:SENSe]:LPLot:SMOoth[:SENSe]:LPLot:SMOoth?

Instruction

Sets/gets the value of smooth

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

0~16

Return

Float

Example:LPLot:SMOoth 12.5

10.6.5Carrier amplitude limit

The carrier amplitude limit allows users to set the minimum power value of the carrier. When the
carrier power is lower than this power, both carrier search and scanning will stop.

Command format[SENSe]:CARRier:THReshold:MINimum[SENSe]:CARRier:THReshold:MINimum?

Instruction

Sets/gets the size of smooth window

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-200dBm~30dBm

Return

Float

Example:CARRier:THReshold:MINimum -13.0

10.6.6

Limit

Select trace

Select restriction effective trace

Frequency
reference

Choose whether to represent the limit line frequency point as an absolutevalue or as an offset in the intermediate frequency.

Frequency
difference

Set interpolation between frequency points, with options for linear andlogarithmic interpolation.

Amplitudereference

Choose whether the amplitude point of the limit line is represented as an
absolute value or as an offset of the reference level

Amplitudedifference

The amplitude difference sets the interpolation of the specified limit point
to linear or logarithmic

int.siglent.com

277

SSA5000A Series User Manual

X OffsetSet offsets of X axis.

Y OffsetSet offsets of Y axis

X-scaleMatch the X-axis with the selected constraints as much as possible

adjustment

For linear frequency scaling, the range between the starting and ending
frequencies is 12.5% higher than the range between the minimum andmaximum frequencies.

Add point

Add a new point for editing.

Del Point

Delete the point whose number is selected in Mode.

Save/Load

Save or load the limit file.

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:X:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:X?

Instructions

Set the limit point template frequency offset
Gets the limit point template frequency offset

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

0 ~ 26.5G

Return

Float

Example:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:X 1MHz

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:Y:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:Y?

Instructions

Sets the limit point template amplitude offset
Gets the limiter template amplitude offset

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-350 dB~380 dB

Return

Float

Example:CALCulate:LLINe5:Offset:Y -10

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DATA val1,val2:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DATA?

Instructions

Sets/gets restricted data
(Clears previous data)

Parameter Type

val1: frequency : Float,
val2: Ampl : Float

Parameter Range

val1: related with Spanval2: -400 dBm~330 dBm

Returnval1: frequency : Float,
val2: Ampl: Float

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:DATA 100,-20,200,-25 (Add two points (100, -20) and (200, -25)):CALC:LLINe1:DATA?

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:ADD val1,val2:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:POINt:DELete

278

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Instructions

Add limit point
Delete limit points

Parameter Type

val1: frequency : Float,
val2: Ampl: Float

Parameter Range

val1: related with Spanval2: -400 dBm~330 dBm

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:ADD 100,-20:CALCulate:LLINe2:POINt:DELete 2

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe:ALL:DELete

Instructions

Delete specified restrictions
Delete all restrictions

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe:ALL:DELete

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TRACe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TRACe?

Instructions

Select the limit trace

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

1~6

Return

1~6

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:TRACe 3

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:INTerpolate:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:INTerpolate:TYPE?

Instructions

Set/Query the frequency difference type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

LOG|LIN

Return

LOG|LIN

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:FREQuency:INTerpolate:TYPE LOG

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:CMODe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:CMODe?

Instructions

Set or query the frequency reference type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

FIXed|RELAtive

ReturnFIXed|RELAtive

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:FREQuency:CMODe FIX

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE?

Instructions

Set or query the range difference type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

LOG|LIN

Return

LOG|LIN

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1: AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE LOG

int.siglent.com

279

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6: AMPLitude:CMODe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6: AMPLitude:CMODe?

Instructions

Set or query the amplitude reference type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

FIXed|RELAtive

ReturnFIXed|RELAtive

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2: AMPLitude:CMODe FIX

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:COPY:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:COPY?

Instructions

Copy the limit

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

1~6

Return

1~6

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:COPY 5

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:BUILd:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:BUILd?

Instructions

Fitting a trace

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

1~6

Return

1~6

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2: BUILd 1:CALCulate:LLINe2: BUILd?

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe:TEST:CALCulate:LLINe:TEST?

Instructions

Sets/gets the status of the test switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe:TEST 1

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FAIL?

Instructions

Query limit test results.

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:FAIL1

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:BEEP:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:BEEP?

Instructions

Sets/gets the restricted buzzer

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:BEEP OFF

280

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe:FAIL:STOP:CALCulate:LLINe:FAIL:STOP?

Instructions

The set/query limit test stops if it fails

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe:FAIL:STOP OFF

int.siglent.com

281

SSA5000A Series User Manual

11

Noise Figure Measurement Mode

Noise Figure Mode is used to measure Noise Figure, Thermal Noise, Equivalent Noise Temperature,etc. Different measurement results can be selected to display under Trace menu.
Calibration is required before measurement. Calibration requires entering the ENR provided by thenoise source provider. The analyzer controls the noise source through a USB connection, and theoutput of the noise source is directly connected to the analyzer's RF signal input port. Thencalibration can begin. During the calibration process, each point is measured once with the noise
source turned off and once with the noise source turned on.
After calibration, keep the analyzer controlling the noise source, connect the output of the noise
source to the input of the DUT, and connect the output of the DUT to the RF signal input port of theanalyzer. When the DUT is a frequency converting device, the DUT also requires an external LO
signal. If this LO signal is Fixed, it can be manually set or controlled by the analyzer to control the
output of the external LO signal source. If this LO signal is Swept, it needs to be controlled by the
analyzer to control the output of the external LO signal source. The measurement process is thesame as the calibration process, and each frequency point will be measured once in the noise source
off and noise source on states.

The NSD28 noise source driver is used to drive the noise source with the required input power
supply of + 28V pulse power supply to cooperate with the spectrum analyzer to measure the noise
figure , Y factor and equivalent noise temperature.
Interfaces description:282

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual-- USB Type-B: Power and control signal input for connecting to the spectrum analyzer.
-- BNC: + 28V pulse power supply output for connecting the noise source to provide input bias.

Connection:
The NSD28 noise source driver is connected to the USB interface of the spectrum analyzer using theattached USB connection line. If the connection is successfully identified, the spectrum analyzer will
display the prompt “INFO_NSD_PLUG_IN”, and then the + 28V pulse power output interface of the
NSD28 noise source driver is connected to the input bias interface of the adapted noise source using
the attached BNC connection line.

int.siglent.com

283

SSA5000A Series User Manual

11.1 Frequency & Span
11.1.1

Freq Context

It is necessary to set or view the RF/IF/LO frequencies when measuring a frequency converting
device. Freq Context defines the way frequencies are shown in the result window and the menu.
RF: Frequencies are displayed as they are before they enter the DUT without any frequency
conversion. If Sideband is DSB, the RF frequencies represented are only that of the LSB range.
When measuring a frequency converting device, note that the RF frequencies is not equal to thefrequencies measured by the analyzer’s RF input port.
IF: Frequencies are displayed as they leave the DUT after conversion. They are the frequencies thatthe analyzer is physically measuring.
LO: Frequencies are displayed as the DUT’s external LO, note that they are not the frequencies thatthe analyzer is physically measuring. This context lets you review the LO frequencies required toprogram the external LO or those set by the instrument. The LO context is only selectable when the
DUT’s external LO frequency mode is swept.

Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:FREQuency:CONText[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:FREQuency:CONText?

Instruction

Sets/Gets the frequency context

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

RF | IF | LO

ReturnEnumeration: RF | IF | LO

Example:NFIGure:MODE:FREQuency:CONText 0.2 GHz:NFIGure:MODE:FREQuency:CONText?

11.1.2

Freq Mode

Determines how the list of frequencies to be measured is calculated. When Layout in the Trace Menu
is Auto, Layout varies with Freq Mode.

Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:FREQuency:MODE[:SENSe]:NFIGure:FREQuency:MODE?

Instruction

Sets/Gets the frequency mode

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

SWEPt: Swept frequencies
FIXed: Fixed frequency
LIST: Frequency list

ReturnEnumeration: SWEP | FIX | LIST

Example:NFIGure:FREQuency:MODE LIST:NFIGure:FREQuency:MODE?

284

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

11.1.2.1

Swept

Set the Center Frequency, Span, Start Frequency, Stop Frequency and Points. Measurement
frequencies are linearly distributed Start Frequency and Stop Frequency. In this mode, Fixed Freq
and Edit Freq List are invisible.
When Layout is Auto, changes to Graph layout.
Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:FREQuency:CENTer[:SENSe]:NFIGure:FREQuency:CENTer?

Instruction

Sets/Gets the center frequency.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range

1 Hz ~ 28 GHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:NFIGure:FREQuency:CENTer 0.2 GHz

Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:FREQuency:STARt[:SENSe]:NFIGure:FREQuency:STARt?

Instruction

Sets/Gets the start frequency.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range

0 Hz ~ 27.999999999 GHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:NFIGure:FREQuency:STARt 0.2 GHz

Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:FREQuency:STOP[:SENSe]:NFIGure:FREQuency:STOP?

Instruction

Sets/Gets the stop frequency.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range

1 Hz ~ 28 GHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:NFIGure:FREQuency:STOP 0.2 GHz

Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:FREQuency:SPAN[:SENSe]:NFIGure:FREQuency:SPAN?

Instruction

Sets/Gets the frequency span.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range

1 Hz ~ 28 GHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:NFIGure:FREQuency:SPAN 10MHZ

Command Format[:SENSe] :NFIGure:SWEep:POINts[:SENSe] :NFIGure:SWEep:POINts?

Instruction

Sets/Gets sweep points.

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

2 ~ 10001

ReturnInteger

Example:NFIGure:SWEep:POINts 2500

int.siglent.com

285

SSA5000A Series User Manual

11.1.2.2

Fixed

Set the Fixed Frequency that will be measured. In this mode, Center Freq, Span, Start Freq, Stop
Freq and Edit Freq List are invisible. Points are fixed at 1 and cannot be edited (be grey out).
When Layout is Auto, changes to Mete layout.

Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:FREQuency:FIXed[:SENSe]:NFIGure:FREQuency:FIXed?

Instruction

Sets/Gets the fixed frequency.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range

0 Hz ~ 28 GHz

Return

Float

Example:NFIGure:FREQuency:FIXed 10MHz

11.1.2.3

Edit Freq List

Customize the measured frequencies. In this mode, Center Freq, Span, Start Freq, Stop Freq and
Fixed Freq are invisible.
When Layout is Auto, changes to Table layout.

Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:FREQuency:LIST:COPY:SWEPt

Instruction

Populate the frequency list by copying from Swept

Example:NFIGure:FREQuency:LIST:COPY:SWEPt

Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:FREQuency:LIST:DATA:DELete

Instruction

Clear frequency list

Example:NFIGure:FREQuency:LIST:DATA:DELete

286

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

11.2 BW
11.2.1

Resolution Bandwidth

Set the resolution bandwidth in order to distinguish between signals which have frequency
components that are near one another.
Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:NFIGure:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:RESolution]?

Instruction

Specifies the resolution bandwidth. For numeric entries, all RBW types choose thenearest (arithmetically, on a linear scale, rounding up) available RBW to the value
entered.
Gets the resolution bandwidth.

Parameter Type

Discrete

Parameter Range

1Hz, 3Hz, 10 Hz, 30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, 10 kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz,
300 kHz, 1 MHz, 3 MHz, 10 MHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:NFIGure:BWIDth 1e6

Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:NFIGure:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO?

Instruction

Turn on/off auto resolution bandwidth state.
Gets the resolution bandwidth auto state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:NFIGure:BWIDth:AUTO On

11.3 Sweep
11.3.1

Avg Time/Pt

The measurement of each frequency point requires 2 states (noise source on and noise source off).
Avg Time/Pt is the measurement duration for each state. Therefore, the total time for a trace result is
Avg Time/Pt multiplied by Points multiplied by 2 times.
Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:SWEep:TIME[:SENSe]:NFIGure:SWEep:TIME?

Instruction

Sets/Gets Avg Time/Pt.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: ks, s, ms, us

Parameter Range

1us ~ 1ks

ReturnFloat, unit: s

Example:NFIGure:SWEep:TIME 5s

Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:SWEep:TIME:AUTO[:SENSe]:NFIGure:SWEep:TIME:AUTO?

Instruction

Sets/Gets sweep mode auto state.

Parameter Type

Booleanint.siglent.com

287

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Parameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:NFIGure:SWEep:TIME:AUTO 1

11.3.2

PointsCommand Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:SWEep:POINts[:SENSe]:NFIGure:SWEep:POINts?

Instruction

Sets/Gets sweep points.

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

2~10001

ReturnInteger

Example:NFIGure:SWEep:POINts 2500

11.3.3

Sweep/Measure

Sweep/Measure
Single/Continue controls analyzer to perform single or continuous sweep/measure,

RestartRestart the current sweep or measure. In particular, if the sweep parameters are modified, a restart
will be performed.

Command format:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF|ON|0|1:INITiate:CONTinuous?

Instructions

Sets continuous sweep mode on-off.
Gets continuous sweep mode state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF

Command Format:INITiate[:IMMediate]

Instruction

Restarts the current sweep.

Example:INITiate:IMMediate

Command Format:INITiate:RESTart

Instruction

Restarts the current sweep.

Example:INITiate:RESTart

288

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

11.4 Amplitude
11.4.1

Attenuator & Preamp & Ref Level

Set the amplitude parameters of the analyzer. Through modifying these parameters, signals undermeasurement can be displayed in a proper mode for easier observation and minimum error. Anychange of Ref Level, Attenuator Value, and Preamp mode will restart sweep.
Input attenuation can be set up to auto or manual mode:Auto mode: the attenuation value is fixed at 0 to achieve the best measurement results.

Ref Level determined the maximum power or voltage that can be currently displayed in the trace
window. The value is displayed at the upper left corner of the screen grid.
Command Format:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:{window}:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:{window}:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel?

Instruction

Sets/Gets Ref Level for different windows.
{window}: NFIGure | NFACtor | GAIN | YFACtor | TEFFective | PHOT | PCOLd

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

NFIGure: -100 ~ 100
NFACtor: 0 ~ 1e9
GAIN: -100 ~ 100
YFACtor: -100 ~ 100
TEFFective: -100e6 ~ 100e6
PHOT: -100 ~ 100
PCOLd: -100 ~ 100

Return

Float

Example:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:NFIGure:Y:RLEVel 5dB

Command Format:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:{window}:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:{window}:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition?

Instruction

Sets/Gets Ref Position for different windows.
{window}: NFIGure | NFACtor | GAIN | YFACtor | TEFFective | PHOT | PCOLd

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

TOP | CENTer | BOTTom

ReturnEnumeration: TOP | CENT | BOTT

Example:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:NFIGure:Y:RPOSition TOP

Command format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation[:SENSe]:NFIGure:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation?

Instructions

Sets/gets the attenuation value

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

0 dB ~ 50 dB (Even gears only)

ReturnInteger, unit dB

Example:POWer:ATTenuation 10

Command format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO[:SENSe]:NFIGure:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO?

int.siglent.com

289

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Instructions

Sets/gets the auto attenuation value switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO ON

Command format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe][:SENSe]:NFIGure:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe]?

Instructions

Sets/gets the preamplifier inside the switch spectrometer

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:NFIGure:POWer:GAIN ON

11.4.2Y Axis Scale

Set the logarithmic units per vertical grid division on the display.


By changing the scale, the displayed amplitude range is adjusted.

Current signal amplitude range that can be displayed:
The Minimum range: Reference level –10 × current scale value.
The Maximum range: The reference level.

Command Format:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:{window}:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:{window}:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision?

Instructions

Sets/gets the scale for different windows{window}: NFIGure | NFACtor | GAIN | YFACtor | TEFFective | PHOT | PCOLd

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range

NFIGure: 0.001 ~ 20
NFACtor: 0.001 ~ 20
GAIN: 0.001 ~ 20
YFACtor: 0.001 ~ 20
TEFFective: 0.1 ~ 20e6
PHOT: 0.001 ~ 20
PCOLd: 0.001 ~ 20

ReturnFloat, unit: dB

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:PDIVision 10 dB

11.4.3Y Scale Unit

The display units vary depending on the trace display results290

Display Result

Y Scale Unit

Noise Figure (Log)dB

Noise Factor (Lin)1

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

11.4.4GaindB

Y FactordB

T effective

K (Kelvin)

P hot

dB or dBm/Hz

P colddB or dBm/Hz

Auto Scale

Auto Scale can be used to adjust the scale of the current and all windows adaptively to the waveform
data.
Command format:DISPlay:NFIGure:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]|2:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:COUPle:DISPlay:NFIGure:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]|2:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:COUPle?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the auto scale switch state when using Graph Layout.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:DISPlay:NFIGure:VIEW1:WINDow1:TRACe:Y:COUPle 1:DISPlay:NFIGure:VIEW:WINDow1:TRACe:Y:COUPle?

Command format:DISPlay:NFIGure:VIEW3:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:COUPle:DISPlay:NFIGure:VIEW3:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:COUPle?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the auto scale switch state when using Meter Layout.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:DISPlay:NFIGure:VIEW3:WINDow1:TRACe:Y:COUPle 1:DISPlay:NFIGure:VIEW3:WINDow1:TRACe:Y:COUPle?

11.5 Trace
11.5.1

LayoutDetermined how the measurement results be displayed on screen.
Graph: There are two traces showing two measurement results, Trace 1 in window 1 (top) and Trace
2 in window 2 (bottom) respectively on default. When Overlay/Combined turns On, both two traces
display in one window, where the Y axis on the left side represents the Y axis of Trace 1, and the Yaxis on the right side represents the Y axis of Trace 2.
Meter: Display a graph and a meter for showing one measurement result. The data in the meter on
the right is the current measurement results, and the data in the graph shows the historicalmeasurement changes of the same frequency point. Layout Meter usually used to measure a fixed

int.siglent.com

291

SSA5000A Series User Manualfrequency point. More results can be displayed in a one-row table when using Result Table menu toturn on other results.
Table: Displays discrete results for each frequency point in a tabular form.

Command Format:DISPlay:NFIGure:FORMat:DISPlay:NFIGure:FORMat?

Instruction

Sets/Gets layout type.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

GRAPh | METer | TABLe

ReturnEnumeration: GRAPh | METer | TABLe

Example:DISPlay:NFIGure:FORMat METer:DISPlay:NFIGure:FORMat?

Command format:DISP:NFIG:FORM:AUTO:DISP:NFIG:FORM:AUTO?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the layout auto state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:DISP:NFIG:FORM:AUTO 1:DISP:NFIG:FORM:AUTO?

Command format:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:COMBined[:STATe]:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:COMBined[:STATe]?

Instructions

Sets/Gets Overlay / Combined switch state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:COMBined 1:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:COMBined?

11.5.2

Trace Type

Command Format:TRACe[1]|2:NFIGure:TYPE:TRACe[1]|2:NFIGure:TYPE?

Instruction

Sets/Gets trace type in Graph layout.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

WRITe: Trace is in normal mode. Update data
MAXHold: Displays the maximum value of traces
MINHold: Displays the minimum value of trace
AVERage: Displays the average value of trace

ReturnWRITE | MAXH | MINH | AVER

Example:TRAC1:NFIGure:TYPE MINH

292

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

11.5.3

Trace State

Command format:TRACe[1]|2:NFIGure:DISPlay[:STATe]:TRACe[1]|2:NFIGure:DISPlay[:STATe]?

Instructions

Sets/gets the display status of the trace in Graph layout

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

ACTive: Trace is in normal mode. Update data
VIEW: Stops updating trace to display current trace data
BLANk: Clear trace data
BACKground: Set as background

ReturnACT | VIEW | BLAN | BACKExample:TRACe2:NFIGure:DISPlay ACTive:TRACe1:NFIGure:DISPlay?

11.5.4

Disp Result

This measurement supports seven result types.
Noise Figure: The ratio of the input signal-to-noise ratio and the output signal-to-noise ratio of the
DUT characterizes the degree of deterioration of the signal-to-noise ratio after passing through the
DUT. Noise Figure is usually expressed in decibels (dB).
Noise Factor: The same as Noise Figure, but expressed using linear units rather than dB.
Gain: The amplification factor.
Y-Factor: The ratio of two noise power levels, one measured with the noise source ON, and theother with the noise source OFF. The Y-Factor measurement is the most common method of
measuring the quantities required to calculate Noise Figure and Gain.
T effective: Another way to measure the deterioration of signal-to-noise ratio, especially for one-port
devices such as antennas. All white noise can be replaced by a thermal noise source generated by aresistor at an equivalent temperature, that is T effective.
P hot/P cold: The power density of the power measurement normalized to a 1 Hz bandwidth. P hot
is measured when the noise source is turned ON, while P cold is measured when the noise source isturned OFF. P hot/P cold usually expressed in dB, which is referenced to natural noise. It can be
expressed in dBm/Hz, which is the absolute power density.

Command Format:DISPlay:NFIGure:DATA:TRACe[1]|2:DISPlay:NFIGure:DATA:TRACe[1]|2?

Instruction

Sets/Gets display result in Graph layout.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

NFIGure | NFACtor | GAIN | YFACtor | TEEFective | PHOT | PCOLd

ReturnNFIGure | NFACtor | GAIN | YFACtor | TEEFective | PHOT | PCOLd

Example:DISPlay:NFIGure:DATA:TRACe1 GAIN:DISPlay:NFIGure:DATA:TRACe1?

Command Format:DISPlay:NFIGure:DATA:TRACe3:DISPlay:NFIGure:DATA:TRACe3?

int.siglent.com

293

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Instruction

Sets/Gets display result in Meter layout.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

NFIGure | NFACtor | GAIN | YFACtor | TEEFective | PHOT | PCOLd

ReturnNFIGure | NFACtor | GAIN | YFACtor | TEEFective | PHOT | PCOLd

Example:DISPlay:NFIGure:DATA:TRACe3 PHOT:DISPlay:NFIGure:DATA:TRACe3?

11.6 Marker
Marker is only supported when Layout is Graph. With Layout Meter or Table, Marker is notsupported.

11.6.1

Select Marker & Select Trace

Command Format:CALCulate:NFIGure:MARKer[1]|2|…|8:X:CALCulate:NFIGure:MARKer[1]|2|…|8:X?

Instruction

Sets/Gets marker frequency.

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

0Hz ~ 28GHz

ReturnFloat. Unit: Hz

Example:CALCulate:NFIGure:MARKer1:X:CALCulate:NFIGure:MARKer2:X?

Command Format:CALCulate:NFIGure:MARKer[1]|2|…|8:Y?

Instruction

Sets/Gets marker y value.

ReturnFloat. Unit reference to Y Unit

Example:CALCulate:NFIGure:MARKer2:Y?

Command Format:CALCulate:NFIGure:MARKer[1]|2|…|8:TRACe:CALCulate:NFIGure:MARKer[1]|2|…|8:TRACe?

Instruction

Sets/Gets the marker trace.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

TRACe1 | TRACe2 | 1 | 2

Return

1|2

Example:CALCulate:NFIGure:MARKer8:TRACe 2

11.6.2Marker Type

Command format:CALCulate:NFIGure:MARKer[1]|2|…|8:MODE:CALCulate:NFIGure:MARKer[1]|2|…|8:MODE?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the marker mode

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

POSition | DELTa | FIXed | OFF

ReturnEnumeration: POS | DELT | FIX | OFF

Example:CALCulate:NFIGure:MARKer1:MODE POS:CALCulate:NFIGure:MARKer2:MODE?

294

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

11.6.3Marker All Off

Command Format:CALCulate:NFIGure:MARKer:AOFF

Instruction

Sets all markers turn to Off.

Example:CALCulate:NFIGure:MARKer:AOFF

11.7 Meas Setup
11.7.1

Settings

Sets the terminal count number N for Average, Max Hold and Min Hold trace types. This number isan integral part of how the average trace is calculated. Basically, increasing N results in a smootheraverage trace.

Command format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:AVERage:COUNt[:SENSe]:NFIGure:AVERage:COUNt?

Instructions

Sets/gets the average number of traces

Parameter type

IntegerParameter Range

1 ~ 999

ReturnInteger

Example:AVERage:TRACe1:COUNt 10

11.7.2

P hot/P cold Unit

Command format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:PCHot:UNIT[:SENSe]:NFIGure:PCHot:UNIT?

Instructions

Sets/gets P hot/P cold unit

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

DB: dB
DBM_HZ: dBm/Hz

ReturnDB | DBM_HZ

Example:NFIGure:PCHot:UNIT DBM_HZ:NFIGure:PCHot:UNIT?

11.7.3

DUT Setup

Clicking the DUT Setup menu will display a connection diagram for easy and intuitive measurement
parameter settings.
11.7.3.1

DUT Type

Command format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:DUT[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:DUT?

Instructions

Sets/gets the DUT type.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

int.siglent.com

295

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Parameter Range

AMPLifier: amplifier
DOWNconv: downconverter
UPConv: upconverter

ReturnAMPL | DOWN | UPC

Example:NFIGure:MODE:DUT DOWNconv:NFIGure:MODE:DUT?

11.7.3.2

Sideband

Sets the LO offset of the DUT. When DSB is selected, only the frequencies of the LSB is displayed in
the menu and diagram.
DSB is selectable only when DUT is Downconv. If DSB is selected and the DUT changes to Upconv,
LSB is selected by default.
Command format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:DOWNconv:LOSCillator:OFFSet[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:UPConv:LOSCillator:OFFSet[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:DOWNconv:LOSCillator:OFFSet?
[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:UPConv:LOSCillator:OFFSet?

Instructions

Sets/gets the DUT type.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

LSB: Lower sideband
USB: Upper sideband
DSB: Double sideband

ReturnLSB | USB | DSB

Example:NFIGure:MODE:UPConv:LOSCillator:OFFSet DSB

11.7.3.3

LO TypeCommand format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:DUT:LOSCillator[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:DUT:LOSCillator?

Instructions

Sets/gets the DUT type.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

FIXed | SWEPt

Return

FIX | SWEP

Example:NFIGure:MODE:DUT:LOSCillator FIXed:NFIGure:MODE:DUT:LOSCillator?

11.7.3.4

Ext LO Control

When Ext LO Control turns On, the analyzer can control the specified generator to output the LO
signal required for measurement through SCPI commands.
Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:CONTrol[:STATe][:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:CONTrol[:STATe]?

Instructions

Sets/Gets external LO control state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:CONTrol 1:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:CONTrol?

296

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

11.7.3.5

Ext LO Power

Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:PARameter:POWer[:LEVel][:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:PARameter:POWer[:LEVel]?

Instruction

Sets/Gets the fixed power of external LO source.

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-100 dBm ~ 100 dBm

ReturnFloat. Unit: dBm

Example:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:PARameter:POWer -50

11.7.4

Ext LO Setup

11.7.4.1

Settling Time

Controls the grace period allocated for the LO to settle between the issuing of commands.
Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:PARameter:SETTling[:TIME][:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:PARameter:SETTling[:TIME]?

Instruction

Sets/Gets the settling time

Parameter Type

Float, unit: ks, s, ms, us

Parameter Range

0 ~ 1000 ms

ReturnFloat, unit: s

Example:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:PARameter:SETTling 100ms

11.7.4.2

Multiplier Numerator / Multiplier Denominator

Set the external LO frequency Multiplier Factor. If an external frequency divider is used in conjunction
with the external LO, then the values of the multiplier denominator should be set to the externalfrequency divider’s dividing factor. It can be considered that the frequency output set by the analyzer
multiplied by the Multiplier Factor results in the actual required LO frequency.
Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:PARameter:MULTiplier:NUMerator[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:PARameter:MULTiplier:NUMerator?

Instruction

Sets/Gets the multiplier numerator

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

1 ~ 20e9

ReturnInteger

Example:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:PARameter:MULTiplier:NUMerator 1e6

Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:PARameter:MULTiplier:DENominator[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:PARameter:MULTiplier:DENominator?

Instruction

Sets/Gets the multiplier denominator

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

1 ~ 20e9

ReturnInteger

Example:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:PARameter:MULTiplier:DENominator 1e6

int.siglent.com

297

SSA5000A Series User Manual

11.7.4.3

Min Freq / Max Freq

Specify the frequency range of the external LO source. Attempting to set the external LO source to avalue less than Min Freq will clip to Min Freq, and attempting to set a value greater than Max Freq willclip to Max Freq.
Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:PARameter:
MINimum[:FREQuency][:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:PARameter:
MINimum[:FREQuency]?

Instruction

Sets/Gets the min frequency of the external LO source.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range

1Hz ~ 324.999999999GHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:PARameter:MINimum 200

Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:PARameter: MAXimum[:FREQuency][:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:PARameter: MAXimum[:FREQuency]?

Instruction

Sets/Gets the max frequency of the external LO source.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range

2Hz ~ 325GHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:PARameter:MAXimum 200

11.7.4.4

LO Commands

Specify the custom SCPI commands used to control the external LO source, including Power Prefix,
Power Suffix, Freq Prefix, Freq Suffix and Auxiliary. Refer to the SCPI command of the external LO
source used for setting. If Power Prefix is empty, the command of controlling output LO power will not
be send. Similarly, if Freq Prefix is empty, the command of controlling output LO frequency will not be
send.
For example, the external LO source need to output a fixed 20 GHz signal with a power of 10 dBm. If
the SCPI commands are
POW 10DBM
andFREQ 20000000000HZ.
In this case, Power Prefix should be POW. Power Suffix should be DBM, Freq Prefix should be
FREQ. Freq Suffix should be HZ.
Note that the specified units sent by the analyzer are dBm and Hz, and are not converted based on
the command suffix. In the previous example, the signal frequency to be output is 20 GHz. If thefrequency suffix is modified to GHZ, the actual frequency command sent will be
FREQ 20000000000GHZ
In this situation, the actual demand can be achieved by using Multiplier Factor. Setting Multiplier298

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Denominator to 1e9, the command sent will be
FREQ 20GHZ
The auxiliary command is used to send commands between each setting of power and frequency inthe following order: auxiliary command > power command > frequency command > auxiliarycommand >... By default, the auxiliary command is used to ensure that the external signal source is
ON. If multiple auxiliary commands are required, use a";" separator between commands.

Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:COMMand:POWer:PREFix[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:COMMand:POWer:PREFix?

Instruction

Sets/Gets the power prefix.

Parameter Type

StringReturnStringExample:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:COMMand:POWer:PREFix “POW”:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:COMMand:POWer:PREFix?

Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:COMMand:POWer:SUFFix[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:COMMand:POWer:SUFFix?

Instruction

Sets/Gets the power suffix.

Parameter Type

StringReturnStringExample:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:COMMand:POWer:SUFFix “DBM”:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:COMMand:POWer:SUFFix?

Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:COMMand:FREQuency:PREFix[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:COMMand:FREQuency:PREFix?

Instruction

Sets/Gets the frequency prefix.

Parameter Type

StringReturnStringExample:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:COMMand:FREQuency:PREFix “POW”:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:COMMand:FREQuency:PREFix?

Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:COMMand:FREQuency:SUFFix[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:COMMand:FREQuency:SUFFix?

Instruction

Sets/Gets the frequency suffix.

Parameter Type

StringReturnStringExample:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:COMMand:FREQuency:SUFFix “DBM”:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:COMMand:FREQuency:SUFFix?

Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:COMMand:AUXiliary[:SENSe]:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:COMMand:AUXiliary?

Instruction

Sets/Gets the FREQuency suffix.

Parameter Type

StringReturnStringExample:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:COMMand:FREQuency:SUFFix “DBM”:NFIGure:MODE:LOSCillator:DUT:COMMand:FREQuency:SUFFix?

int.siglent.com

299

SSA5000A Series User Manual

11.7.4.5

Add Source to List

You can search, identify, connect, and control external LO devices to provide LO signal output
through USB or LAN. One or more successfully identified devices will appear in the list of Available
Source List, showing their manufacturer, model, and serial number information. Selecting one ofthem in Available Source List will highlight it, and you can click to specify the highlighted source
device as the DUT LO, or click the LO column of Available Source List. The device selected as the
DUT LO will have a check icon

11.7.5in the LO column.

ENR Setup

ENR is the ratio of the noise temperature difference between the noise source on and off states tothe reference temperature. It is a set of calibrated values provided by the noise source. Click Edit
ENR to see the currently populated list of ENR values, you can enter new ENR values, edit existing
ENR values, or delete existing ENR values. ENR values may vary for different frequencies, and theentered ENR is a series of frequencies and corresponding ENR values. There is only one ENR value
for each frequency.
The analyzer will automatically save the entered ENR value and will not be reset due to Preset.
If there is no ENR value, calibration cannot be performed. It will display

on the window.

If only one ENR value is entered, it will be used for all frequencies for calibration.
If the minimum frequency of the entered ENR value is less than or equal to the minimum frequencyof the measurement frequency point, and the maximum frequency of the ENR value is greater thanor equal to the maximum frequency of the measurement frequency point, it will display
otherwise, it will display.

Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:CORRection:ENR[:MEASurement]:TABLe:DATA:DELete

Instruction

Clear ENR list.

Example:NFIGure:CORRection:ENR:TABLe:DATA:DELete

Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:CORRection:ENR:MEASurement:TABLe:DATA[:SENSe]:NFIGure:CORRection:ENR:MEASurement:TABLe:DATA?

Instruction

Sets/Gets the ENR value.

Parameter Type

StringReturnStringExample:NFIG:CORR:ENR:MEAS:TABL:DATA “1000,-10,2000,-8,3000,-6,10000,5”

11.7.6;

Calibration

After entering the ENR value, click

ENTER

as prompted to start calibration. The analyzer willcalibrate the currently set frequency point. After calibration is complete, measurement willautomatically start.
The analyzer will automatically save the calibration data and will not be reset due to Preset .If the300

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

re-calibrated frequency point is inconsistent with the original calibration data frequency point, theoriginal calibration data will not be deleted.
If it has not been calibrated, it cannot be measured. It will display
After calibration, it will display

on the window.

.

If the currently measured frequency point does not match the calibration frequency point, it will
display.

Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:CALibration:INITiate

Instruction

Start calibration.

Example:NFIGure:CALibration:INITiate

Command Format[:SENSe]:NFIGure:CALibration:DELete

Instruction

Clear calibration.

Example:NFIGure:CALibration:DELete

int.siglent.com

301

SSA5000A Series User Manual

12Bluetooth Measurement Mode

The Bluetooth measurement function provides RF emission headphone testing that complies with
the Bluetooth Core Specification standards to assist users in testing, evaluating, and verifying
Bluetooth devices. It supports testing of low-power Bluetooth, basic speed, and enhanced data rate
Bluetooth.

12.1 Freq/Channel
12.1.1ChannelSelect the Bluetooth channel to be tested, Setting the channel will configure the center frequency at
the same time.
In Low Energy measurement, the relationship between center frequency and channel is below:
CF = 2.402GHz +Channel*2MHz

While in Basci Rate/Enhanced Data Rate measurement :CF = 2.402GHz + Channel *1MHz

Command format[:SENSe#]:FREQuency:CHANnel[:SENSe#]:FREQuency:CHANnel?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the currently set Bluetooth channel

Parameter TypeintegarParameter Range

0-78

Returnintegar

Example:FREQuency:CHANnel 22

12.1.2Center Frequency

Command format[:SENSe#]:FREQuency:CENTer[:SENSe#]:FREQuency:CENTer?

Instructions

Set/Get the current Bluetooth Center frequency setting

Parameter Type

float

Parameter Range

2.402GHz ~ 10GHz

Returnfloat

Example:FREQuency:CENTer 2.410 GHz

12.1.3

Center Frequency Step

Set the step size of the center frequency. After the setting is complete, the knob and button steps will
configure the center frequency according to this setting302

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

12.2 Amplitude
12.2.1

Scale

Set the vertical division value of the Cartesian coordinate display format, which is only valid for RF
envelope, Demod waveform, and RF spectrum waveform
Command format:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision?

Instructions

Set/get scale

Parameter Type

float

Parameter Range

RF Envelope: 0.1~30 dBm
Demod Waveform: 0~100MHz
RF Spectrum: 0.1 ~ 30dBm

Returnfloat

Example:DISPlay:WINDow1:TRACe1:Y:PDIVision 10

12.2.2

Ref Level

Set the value of the reference line in Cartesian coordinate format. Just like the scale, it is only
effective for RF envelope, demodulation waveform, and RF spectrum waveform.
Command format:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel?

Instructions

set/get reference level

Parameter Type

float

Parameter Range

RF Envelope: -100dBm ~ 30 dBm
Demod Waveform: -100 MHz ~ 100MHz
RF Spectrum: -100~ 30 dBm

Returnfloat

Example:DISPlay:WINDow1:TRACe1:Y:RLEVel 10

12.2.3

Attenuator

Set the attenuation amplitude of the input signal, with a range of 0-20dB. When the input signal
amplitude is too large, it is necessary to increase the attenuation. Attention: Increasing theattenuation amplitude will also reduce the signal-to-noise ratio during the demodulation process,thereby affecting the demodulation result.

int.siglent.com

303

SSA5000A Series User Manual

12.3 Marker/Peak12.3.1

Select Marker

Select one of the four markers. The default is Marker1. When a marker is selected, you can set its
type, trace to be marked, and other related parameters. The enabled marker will appear on the trace
selected through the Select Trace option and the readouts of this marker are also displayed in theactive function area and at the upper right corner of the screen.
Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:SELEct:CALCulate:MARKer:SELEct?

Instructions

Set/Get Current Markrer

Parameter Type

Enumeration 1-4

Parameter Range

Enumeration:1-4

Return:CALCulate:MARKer:SELEct 5

ExampleSet/Get Current Markrer

12.3.2

Select Trace

Select the trace where the makrer is currently being set.
It does not take effect in Result Sum format.
Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3:TRACe 1|2|3:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3:TRACe?

Instructions

Set/Get the trace that marker is on

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

1|2|3

ReturnEnumeration

ExampleCALCulate:MARK1:TRAC 1

12.3.3Marker Type12.3.3.1

NormalOne of the marker types. It is used to measure the X (Frequency or Time) and Y (Amplitude) valuesof a certain point on the trace. When selected, a marker with the number of the current marker (suchas “ 1 ”) appears on the trace.
If no active marker exists currently, a marker will be enabled automatically at the center position of
the current trace.
You can use the numeric keys, knob or direction keys to move the marker. The readouts of themarker will be displayed at the upper right corner of the screen.
The readout resolution of the X-axis (frequency or time) is related to the span. For higher readout
resolution, reduce the span.

304

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

12.3.3.2

Delta

One of the marker types. It is used to measure the delta values of X (Frequency or Time) and Y(Amplitude) between the reference point and a certain point on the trace. When selected, a pair ofmarkers appears on the trace: Fixed Related Marker (marked by a combination of the marker
number and letter “ + ”, such as “ 2+ ”) and the Delta Marker (marked by the “∆”, such as “ 1∆2 ”).


After the marker selects “Delta”, the original marker will become the delta measurement marker,
and the related marker of the incrementing sequence number will become the reference “fixed”
marker

The delta marker is in the "relative to" state, and its X-axis position can be changed; the related
marker is in the "fixed" state by default (the X-axis and Y-axis positions are fixed), but the X-axis
can be adjusted by changing to the "normal" state.

The first row in the upper right corner of the trace area shows the frequency (or time) difference
and amplitude difference between the two markers; the second row in the upper right corner of
the trace area shows the X axis and amplitude value of the related marker.



Delta reset. It is only valid when the current marker is a differential marker. If the marker type ofthe relative marker of the current marker is normal or differential, change the horizontal positionof the relative marker to the horizontal position of the current marker; if the marker type of therelative marker is fixed, change the horizontal position and vertical position of the relative marker
to the current one. The horizontal and vertical position of the marker.

12.3.3.3

Off

Turn off the marker currently selected. The marker information displayed on the screen and functions
based on the marker will also be turned off
Command Format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:ENABle OFF|ON|0|1:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:ENABle?

Instruction

Sets marker state.
Gets marker state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:TRACe1:MARKer1:ENABle ON

Command Format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:TYPE POSition|DELTa|OFF:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:TYPE?

Instruction

Sets marker mode.
Gets marker mode.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

POSition
DELTa
OFF

int.siglent.com

305

SSA5000A Series User Manual

ReturnEnumeration: POS|DELT|OFF

Example:TRACe:MARKer:TYPE POSition

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer#[:SET]:RESEt:DELTa

Instruction

Difference marker resets to 0
Only valid when the current cursor is a differential marker

Example:CALCulate:MARKer2:RESEt:DELTa

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF

Instruction

Close all markers

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF

12.3.4Marker X

Displays and sets the position of the marker.

Command Format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X?

Instruction

Sets marker X value.
Gets marker X value.
This command only works when marker is not off.

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

According to marker trace

Return

Float

Example:TRACe:MARKer:X 200:TRACe:MARKer:X?

Command Format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:Y?

Instruction

Gets marker Y value.

Parameter Type

None

Parameter Range

None

Return

Float

Example:TRACe:MARKer:Y?

12.3.5

Relative To“Relative to” is used to measure the delta values of X (Frequency or Time) and Y (Amplitude)
between two markers which can mark on different traces.
After the marker selects “Delta”, the original marker will become the delta measurement marker, andthe related marker of the incrementing sequence number will become the reference “fixed” marker

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:REFerence 1|2|3|4:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:REFerence?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the marker relative to306

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8

ReturnEnumeration

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:REFerence 3

12.3.6Peak

Set the current cursor position to the position of the peak with the maximum or minimum amplitude of
the trace.


Peak: Set the current marker position to the position with the maximum amplitude on the trace.

Valley: Set the current marker position to the position with the smallest amplitude on the trace.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum

Instruction

Marker searches for peaks on the selected trace and marks them with, the current
selected marker

Example:CALCulate:MARKer4:MAXimum

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MINimum

Instruction

Marker searches for valleys on the selected trace and marks them with, the current
selected marker

Example:CALCulate:MARKer4:MINimum

int.siglent.com

307

SSA5000A Series User Manual

12.4 Trace
12.4.1

Trace Num & Layout

The screen can display up to 4 windows and arrange them according to the layout settings.
The layout methods include：Single

Stacked 2Grid 1,2

Grid 2x2

Windows will be displayed in Grid 2x2 by default.

Command Format:CALCulate:PARameter:COUNt:CALCulate:PARameter:COUNt?

Instruction

Sets trace number.
Gets trace number.

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

1~4

ReturnInteger

Example:CALCulate:PARameter:COUNt 4

Command Format:DISPlay:LAYout

Instruction

Sets trace layout on screen.
Currently, one row, two columns are not supported (1, 2)

Parameter Type

Integer (rows, columns)

Parameter Rangerows 1 ~ 2columns 1 ~ 2ReturnExample12.4.2:DISPlay:LAYout

2,2

Select Trace

Select the trace you want to configure currently. After selecting a certain trace, the reference leveland other parameters of the trace can be adjusted. You can also touch the screen and click on thewindow where the trace is located to select the trace
After selecting the trace, the symbol ">" will be displayed at the left side of the trace symbol.

12.4.3

Trace Format

1.RF Envelope
The RF envelope format displays the amplitude envelope information obtained at the current
acquisition time.

308

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

2.Demod Waveform
Displays Demodulation Results.

3.RF spectrum
int.siglent.com

309

SSA5000A Series User Manual

By performing FFT on the collected data, it displays the frequency domain characteristics of thesignal.

4.Result Sum
Summary of measurement results that comply with Bluetooth core specifications.

310

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

5. Measured Polar
Constellation diagram reflecting signal modulation performance (only valid when the result isEnhanced data rate type)Command Format:TRACe#:FORMat[:Y]:TRACe#:FORMat[:Y]?

Instruction

Set/get the format of the select trace

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

RFENV| DEMODWV| RFSPEC| SUMMARY| POLAr

ReturnEnumeration

Example:TRACe1:FORMat RFENV

int.siglent.com

311

SSA5000A Series User Manual

12.5 Sweep
Set the time for the instrument to capture a single data packet.

Command Format[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME?

Instruction

Set/get the sweep time

Parameter Type

Float with unit:ks,s,ms,usParameter Range

1us ~ 1s

ReturnFloat, Unit s

ExampleSWEep:TIME 5ms

12.5.1

Sweep/Measure control

Single/Continuous, controlling the analyzer to perform a single scan/measurement or a continuous
scan/measurement. It will be set to Continuous initially.
Restart:Restart the current scan or measurement. It should be noted that if the scanning parameters are
modified, it will effectively perform a restart.
Scanning parameters include sweep time, Center frequency or channel.

Command format:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF|ON|0|1:INITiate:CONTinuous?

Instructions

Sets continuous sweep mode on-off.
Gets continuous sweep mode state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF

Command Format:INITiate[:IMMediate]

Instruction

Restarts the current sweep.

Example:INITiate:IMMediate

Command Format:INITiate:RESTart

Instruction

Restarts the current sweep.

Example:INITiate:RESTart

312

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

12.6 Measurement
Bluetooth Measurement provides support for Bluetooth measurement of three specifications:1.

Basic Rate

2.

Enhanced Data Rate

3.

Low Energy

According to the Bluetooth protocol, BR/EDR are both classic Bluetooth, and are used in the samemeasurement that can automatically recognizes signal. Compared to Classical Bluetooth, Low
Energy Bluetooth has differences in channel usage, data rate, and data transmission methods.

12.6.1Low Energy

According to the modulation scheme, Low Enerygy Bluetooth can be divided into three types:
LE1M, LE2M and LE Coded
The Payload that supports measurement results calculating include : 0XF0, 0xAA, 0xFF,
0x00,0x0F,0x55
When The Packet Type is LE1M or LE2M:
0xF0 or 0x0F

0XAA or 0x55

OthersPower Average

Yes

Yes

Yes

Power Peak

Yes

Yes

Yes

Δf1 AverageYes

Δf2 Average
Δf1 Max

Yes
Yes

Δf2 Max

Yes

Δf2>185KHz

Yes

Freq DriftYes

Max Drift Rate

Yes

Freq Offset

Yes

Initial Freq Offset

Yes

When The Packet Type is LECoded
0xFF or 0x00

OthersPower Average

Yes

Yes

Power Peak

Yes

Yes

int.siglent.com

313

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Δf1 AverageYes

Δf2 Average
Δf1 Max

Yes

Δf2 Max
Δf2>185KHz
Freq DriftYes

Max Drift Rate

Yes

Freq Offset

Yes

Yes

Initial Freq Offset

Yes

Yes

12.6.1.1

Basic Rate & Enhanced Data Rate

The main difference between Basic Rate and Enhanced Data Rate lies in transmission speed andtransmission quality, while Enhanced Rate is an improvement on Basic Rate Bluetooth. When using
BR/EDR measurement, the connected Bluetooth signal will be automatically recognized and thecorresponding measurement results will be calculated and displayed.
Basic Rate supports the demodulation from signals list below:
ID,POLL, FHS, DM1,
SCO_HV1,SCO_HV2,SCO_HV3,SCO_DV,
ACL_DH1, ACL_AUX, ACL_DM3, ACL_DH3, ACL_DM5, ACL_DH5
ESCO_EV3, ESCO_EV4, ESCO_EV5
Supported Measurement results calculation from payload type:
0xAA,0x55,0x0F,0xF0
The measurement results table is as follows:
When packet type is ACL_DH1/ACL_DH3/ACL_DH5:
0xF0 or 0x0F

0xAA or 0x55

OthersPower Average

Yes

Yes

Yes

Power Peak

Yes

Yes

Yes

Δf1 AverageYes

Δf2 Average
Δf1 Max

Yes
Yes

Δf2 Max

Yes

Δf2>115KHz

Yes

314

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Freq DriftYes

Max Drift Rate

Yes

ICFT

Yes

Yes

Other signals only support demodulation and power calculation.

12.6.1.2

Enhanced Data Rate

Enhanced data rate measurement supports the following types of signal demodulation:
ESCO_2-EV3, ESCO_3-EV3, ESCO_2-EV5, ESCO_3-EV5
ACL_2-DH1, ACL_3-DH1, ACL_AUX, ACL_2-DH3, ACL_3-DH3, ACL_2-DH5, ACL_3-DH5
The packet formats that support recognition include:
0xAA,0x55,0x0F,0xF0,PRBS9Support the following measurement results:
Freq Offset ωi, Freq Offset ω0, ωi + ω0, devm rms, devm peak, GFSK Average Power, DPSK Average
Power, Real Average Power, BER, Bit Error, Guard Interval.

12.6.2AverageTurn on or off the option to calculate the average measurement results, and you can set the numberof participants in the average calculation. When the average option is turned off, the "Avg" column ofthe measurement results becomes "Current". The larger the average number, the more stable the"Avg" value is.
Command format[:SENSe#]:AVERage[:STATe][:SENSe#]:AVERage[:STATe]?

Instructions

Set/Get the average on|off stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example: Average 1

Command format[:SENSe#]:AVERage:COUNt[:SENSe#]:AVERage:COUNt?

Instructions

Set/Get the average times

Parameter Type

IntegarParameter Range

1~999

ReturnIntegar

Example: Average:COUNt 25

int.siglent.com

315

SSA5000A Series User Manual

12.7 Trigger
The analyzer provides a variety of trigger functions, users can choose from the trigger menu.

12.7.1

Trigger Source

The analyzer provides a variety of trigger sources to suit different trigger requirements.
Free Run
Free trigger is the default mode of the analyzer, in which the spectrum analyzer sweeps circularly
and continuously.

Video
When the user wants to capture an instantaneous signal that appears for a very short time, the video
trigger mode can be adopted . In this working mode, only when the rising edge or falling edge of asignal touches the Trigger Level, the signal will be triggered and displayed on the screen.

External
External trigger provides users with richer trigger functions. If users want to realize the periodic
trigger and delay trigger spectrum analyzer, they can choose the external trigger mode. In this mode,
it is triggered by the rising or falling edge of the external input signal. The square wave signal with acertain frequencycan be periodically triggered, and the delay time can be adjusted by setting the
Trigger Delay option.

Periodic
When Periodic is selected, the analyzer uses the built-in period timer signal as the trigger. The trigger
event is set by the periodic timer parameter, which is modified by offset and periodic synchronization
Src.
You can synchronize periodic signals with external events (using periodic synchronization Src) to getcloser to a reliable trigger signal.
If the synchronization source is not selected (off state), the internal timer will not synchronize with any
external timed events.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce?

Instructions

sets the trigger source.
gets the trigger source.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range"IMMediate ", "VIDeo ", "EXTernal ","FRAMe"

Return"IMM", "VID", "EXT" ,"FRAMe"

Example:TRIGger:SOURce VID

316

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

12.7.2

Trigger Level

Sets the amplitude level for the video trigger (absolute level only supported). When the video signal
crosses the voltage level with the selected slope, it is triggered.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]: {type}:LEVel:TRIGger[:SEQuence]: {type}:LEVel?

Instructions

sets the trigger level.
gets the trigger level.
{type}: "VIDeo", "EXTernal"

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-300~50dBm

Return

Float

Example:TRIGger:VIDeo:LEVel -20

12.7.3

Trigger Slope

Set the trigger polarity for external trigger, video trigger. The options are rising edge trigger and fallingedge trigger.
The same trigger source uses the same trigger edge for both gating and triggering.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]: {type}:SLOPe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]: {type}:SLOPe?

Instructions

sets the trigger edge.
gets the trigger edge.
{type}: " VIDeo ", " EXTernal "Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range"POS", "NEG"

Return"POS", "NEG"

Example:TRIGger: EXTernal:SLOPe:TRIGger: VIDeo:SLOPe?

12.7.4

Trigger Delay

When scanning is at zero span, negative delay can be set . The time range of negative delay isrelated to the number of sweep points and sweep time:
Maximum negative delay time = [ 496M / ( sweep points * 64 ) - 5] * sweep time
Maximum positive delay time =500ms

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay?

Instructions

sets the trigger delay
gets the trigger delay{type}:" VIDeo ", " EXTernal " ,"FRAMe"

int.siglent.com

317

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Parameter Type

Float

Return

Float

Example:TRIGger:EXTernal:DELay 5e-3
:TRIGger:FRAMe:DELay?

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay:STATe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay:STATe?

Instructions

sets the trigger delay state.
gets the trigger delay state.
{type}:" VIDeo ", " EXTernal " ,"FRAMe"

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:TRIGger:EXTernal: DELay:STATe 1

12.7.5

Trigger Delay

When scanning is at zero span, negative delay can be set . The time range of negative delay isrelated to the number of sweep points and sweep time:
Maximum negative delay time = [ 496M / ( sweep points * 64 ) - 5] * sweep time
Maximum positive delay time =500ms

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay?

Instructions

sets the trigger delay
gets the trigger delay{type}:" VIDeo ", " EXTernal " ,"FRAMe"

Parameter Type

Float

Return

Float

Example:TRIGger:EXTernal:DELay 5e-3
:TRIGger:FRAMe:DELay?

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay:STATe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay:STATe?

Instructions

sets the trigger delay state.
gets the trigger delay state.
{type}:" VIDeo ", " EXTernal " ,"FRAMe"

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:TRIGger:EXTernal: DELay:STATe 1

12.7.6

Zero Span Trigger Delay Compensation (external trigger only)

In normal cases, after the trigger is generated, the data is displayed and the data is triggered at the318

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manualsame time. However, the processing time of the trigger path and the data path is different. As a result,the data displayed at the trigger time is the previous data. This does not affect the integrity of the data
and does not cause data loss at the trigger point. However, in some cases, it is necessary to display
the zero point of screen coordinate as the input signal information of trigger point, so the function ofzero span delay compensation is needed.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal:DELay:COMPensation OFF|ON|0|1:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal:DELay:COMPensation?

Instructions

Enable /disable the external trigger zero sweep delay compensation

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:TRIGger:EXTernal:DELay:COMPensation OFF

12.7.7

Period (periodic trigger only)

Set the trigger period. For gating and triggering, the same trigger source uses the same trigger cycle.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:PERiod:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:PERiod?

Instructions

Set/Query Period Trigger period

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

100ns~10s

Return

Float

Example:TRIGger:FRAMe:PERiod 1s

12.7.8

Offset Time

Adjust the cumulative offset between the periodic trigger clock and trigger events. The periodic
trigger clock cannot be viewed on the software, only the trigger event can be seen. Therefore, inorder to adjust the trigger event time, only the offset between the periodic triggering clock and thetriggering event can be adjusted. However, the absolute value of the internal offset is unknown, andeach modification of the offset is cumulative on the previous basis.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet?

Instructions

Set/Query Period Trigger period offset

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

0s~10sReturn

Float

Example:TRIGger:FRAMe:OFFSet 1s

int.siglent.com

319

SSA5000A Series User Manual

12.7.9Reset Time Offset Display

Reset the display of cycle trigger time offset.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet:DISPlay:RESet

Instructions

Reset Period trigger offset return to zero

Example:TRIGger:FRAMe:OFFSet:DISPlay:RESet

12.7.10

Sync Source (periodic trigger only)

Figure 12-1 Trigger of synchronization source

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:SYNC:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:SYNC?

Instructions

Set/Query the type of periodic synchronization

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range"OFF", "EXT"

Return"OFF", "EXT"Example:TRIGger:FRAMe:SYNC EXT

320

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

13

Input and Output

13.1 Freq Ref Input
Frequency Reference Source include inside reference source, external reference source andauto-selection reference source. When external reference source is not connected, the button of
external reference is not available. Defualt auto-selection reference source.

Command Format[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce:TYPE[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce:TYPE?

Illustration

Set Reference Source

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

INTE|EXT|SENS

example:ROSCillator:SOURce:TYPE INTE:ROSCillator:SOURce:TYPE EXT:ROSCillator:SOURce:TYPE SENS

13.2 Input Z Correction
Input Impedance include 50 Ohm and 75 Ohm, default 50 Ohm. A adaptor of 75 Ohm to 50 Ohm isrequired, when the input impedance select 75 Ohm.
The selection of input impedance will influence calculation result only. That influence include voltage
and electric current (dBmV, dBuV, dBuA, V, A), but power.

Command Format[:SENSe]:CORRection:IMPedance[:INPut][:MAGNitude][:SENSe]:CORRection:IMPedance[:INPut][:MAGNitude]?

Illustration

Set Input ImpedanceParameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter range

OHM50|OHM75

example:CORRection:IMPedance OHM50:CORRection:IMPedance OHM75

13.3 Correction
Measured value can be corrected in specific x-axis and y-axis. Now, there are eight corrections, witch
enter into force at the same time.
Select Correction
Select a correction (1-8) to operating.

Correct Switch
If the selected switch enter into force.

int.siglent.com

321

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command Format[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET#[:STATe][:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET#[:STATe]?

Illustration

Set Correction Switch Status

Parameter Type

Boolean

Menu

Input/Output>Correction

Return Value

0|1

example:CORRection:CSET1 0:CORRection:CSET2 1Edit Correction
Editing, preserving, loading the selected correction.

Command Format[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]2|3|...|8:DATA {x1,y1 }[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET#:DATA?

Illustration

Get/Set correction points

Parameter Type

Character String of Correction Data {Freq 1Hz, Amp 1dBm, Freq 2Hz, Amp
2dBm, ……}

Parameter Range
Menu

Input/Output>Correction>Edit Correction

example:CORRection:CSET1:DATA 10000000,-15, 15000000, -15:CORRection:CSET1:DATA 10000000,-15

Command Format[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]2|3|...|8:ADD {x1,y1 }Illustration

Add Correction Point

Parameter Type

Character String of Correction Data {Freq 1Hz, Amp 1dBm, Freq 2Hz, Amp
2dBm, ……}

Parameter Range
Menu

Input/Output>Correction>Edit Correction

example:CORRection:CSET1:ADD 10000000,-15, 15000000, -15:CORRection:CSET1:ADD10000000,15

Command Format[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]2|3|...|8:POINt:DELete

Illustration

Delete a special correction point.

Parameter Type

Serial Number

Menu

Input/Output>Correction>Edit Correction

example:CORRection:CSET1:POINt:DELete 0

Close All the Correction
All the correction is not effective.
Delet One/All the Correction
Empty all the points of a specail/all correction(s).

Command Format[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]2|3|...|8:DELete

Illustration

Delete all points of a special correction.

322

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Return Value
exampleCORRection:CSET1:DELete

Command Format[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET:ALL:DELete

Illustration

Delete all the corrections

Return Value
example:CORRection:CSET:ALL:DELete

13.4 IF Output
The intermediate frequency (IF) output signal can be used for external signal processing and can beobtained via the ‘IF Out’ output connector on the instrument's rear panel. Please note that the IF
output is only useful in Zero Span.
The IF Out signal, centered at approximately 120MHz, is simply a down-converted version of the RF
Input signal that is present at the tuned frequency. The bandwidth of the IF output signal isapproximately 40MHz. Requires Option SSA5000-IFO.

Operation Demonstration
1.

Input the RF signal to the RF port, and then output the IF signal through the IF Out connector on
the rear panel.

2.

Click

FREQ

, configure the center frequency corresponding to the RF signal and turn on the

Zero Span mode.

3.

Click Input/Output, turn on the IF Out function.

int.siglent.com

323

SSA5000A Series User Manual

4.

Use another spectrum analyzer to observe the IF signal. Configure the center frequency to120MHz and the span to 50MHz.

IF Output when input an 1GHz RF signal

324

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

IF Output when input a 3.5 GHz NR signal

int.siglent.com

325

SSA5000A Series User Manual

14

System14.1 System
14.1.1

About

Figure 14-1 about

Area 1 Displays product information, including product name, serial number, Host ID, and IP address.
Area 2 Displays firmware information including software version, FPGA version, CPLD version, andhardware version.
Area 3 displays information about installed options.

Command format:SYSTem:CONFigure:SYSTem?

Instructions

Query device system information

ReturnStringExample:SYSTem:CONFigure:SYSTem?

326

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

14.1.2

HardwareFigure 14-2 Hardware

Area 1 displays the current operating status of the analyzer, including the RF board temperature,
CPU temperature, and fan speed.
Area 2 displays automatic alignment (temperature drift compensation) information, including
calibration status, time of last calibration, temperature, and temperature difference.
Area 3 shows information about installed options.

14.1.3

Log Record

Display system alarms and warnings.

14.1.4

Language

The analyzer supports a multi-language menu, Chinese and English built-in help and popup
messages.

int.siglent.com

327

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Press this key to select the desired display language.

Command format:SYSTem:LANGuage CHINESE|ENGLISH:SYSTem:LANGuage?

Instructions

Setting languages
Acquire languages

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

CHINESEENGLISH

ReturnEnumeration: CHINESE|ENGLISH

Example:SYSTem:LANGuage CHINESE:SYSTem:LANGuage?

14.1.5Connect Setting

14.1.5.1

Network Configuration

Display the MAC address.
Dynamically obtain network IP information (DHCP) or manually set IP address, subnet mask, andgateway parameters.

Command format:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:TYPE:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:TYPE?

Instructions

Set/Obtain the DHCP switch

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

Example:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:TYPE 1:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:TYPE?

Command format:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPADdress {“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”}:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPADdress?

Instructions

Setting an IP Address
Obtaining an IP Address

Parameter type

StringParameter Range

The IP address Settings must comply with specifications (0-255:0-255:0-255:0-255)

ReturnIP address string

Example:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPADdress “192.168.1.12”:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPADdress?

Command format:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:GATeway {“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”}:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:GATeway?

Instructions

Set the gateway
Access gateway

Parameter type

StringParameter Range

The IP address must comply with the nic specifications (0-255:0-255:0-255:0-255)

328

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

ReturnGateway string

Example:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:GATeway “192.168.1.1”:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:GATeway?

Command format:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SMASk {“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”}:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SMASk?

Instructions

Set the subnet mask according to your computer network Settings
Obtain the subnet mask

Parameter type

StringParameter Range

The IP address must comply with the nic specifications (0-255:0-255:0-255:0-255)

ReturnstringExample:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SMASk “255.255.255.0”:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SMASk?

14.1.5.2

Web services

Analyzer supports web VNC remote access.The analyzer will display the content of the remote
projection to the web page, at the same time support mouse and keyboard remote input parameters.
VNC reset can be set to View only mode. In this case, the input on the web page is invalid.
When you log in to the VNC, enter the same password as the preset one.



To change the port or viewing mode, you need to restart VNC.

Command format:SYSTem:WEB:PSW:SYSTem:WEB:PSW?

Instructions

Set web password
Get web password

Parameter type

StringReturnStringxxxxxx

Example:SYSTem:WEB:PSW “123456”

14.1.5.3

GPIB

Set the GPIB port number. USB Host port on the front panel provides USB-GPIB connection. Use an
original board card.

Command format:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess {password}:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess?

Instructions

Set the GPIB
Get the GPIB

Parameter type

Integer

ReturnGPIB address (integer)

Example:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess 25

int.siglent.com

329

SSA5000A Series User Manual

14.1.6

Date and Time

Switch the time and date display status in the upper right corner of the screen.
Modify the system time display format, including YMD, MDY, and Dmy.

Command format:SYSTem:TIME:SYSTem:TIME?

Instructions

Setting the System Time
Obtaining system time

Parameter type

StringParameter Range

Hours (0~23), minutes (0~59), seconds (0~59)

ReturnStringxxxxxx

Example:SYSTem:TIME 182559:SYSTem:TIME?

Command format:SYSTem:DATE:SYSTem:DATE?

Instructions

Set the system date
Get system dateParameter type

StringParameter Range

Year (four lengths), month (1~12), day (1~31)

ReturnString:xxxxxxxx

Example:SYSTem:DATE 20220101:SYSTem:DATE?

14.1.7

OptionLoad the option by loading the purchased.lic option file

Command format:SYSTem:LKEY {”option”},{”license key”}

Instructions

Loading the specified option with the registration code, Restart to take effectParameter type

Enumeration , String

Parameter Range”option”: RTSA|DMA|AMA|AMK|RT40”license key”: DING YANG technology to provide authorization code, 16 - bit string

Example:SYSTem:LKEY “RESA”,”fjbdajffnklmgwno”

14.1.8UpgradeSelect from memory. The ADS file upgrades the firmware. After the firmware is upgraded, themachine will restart

14.1.9Help

Help documents are built-in manual documents, including function descriptions and remote

330

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manualcommand information.
To use the Help document, select a menu button, then press the Help button on the keyboard or
touch the “Help on this setting”.At this point, the analyzer will jump to the relevant chapter of thecorresponding button in the manual.

Figure 14-3

int.siglent.com

331

SSA5000A Series User Manual

14.2 Reset
14.2.1

PresetPerform a reset operation based on the reset type currently set.

Command format:SYSTem:PRESet

Note

Reset the device parameters based on the reset type

Example:SYSTem:PRESet

14.2.2Preset Type

Perform the reset operation based on the current reset type. Select a configuration type for the
spectrum analyzer to reset and load.Reset Settings Preset types include default, last time, and User.


Default: Reset the default loading parametersLast time: reset to the state before the user's last software shutdown.



User: Resets and loads the configuration file specified by the user. This file can be obtained bysaving the user Settings.

Command format:SYSTem:PRESet:TYPE DFT|LAST|USER:SYSTem:PRESet:TYPE?

Note

Set the reset configuration type
Gets the reset configuration type

Parameter

type enumeration

Parameter Range

DFT: default
LAST: last
USER: user

The return value

enumeration: DFT|LAST|USER

The default value

DFT

Example:SYSTem:PRESet:TYPE DFT

14.2.3

Save User Config

Saves the current system state as user-defined Settings to internal non-volatile storage.

Command format:SYSTem:PRESet:USER#:SAVE:SYSTem:PRESet:USER#:LOAD

LOAD

Save the user configuratio
Loading user Configuration

Example:SYSTem:PRESet:USER2:SAVE:SYSTem:PRESet:USER2:LOAD

332

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

14.2.4

Power On

Select the configuration to be loaded during power-on. Default configuration, last configuration, andUser configuration are available

Command format:SYSTem:PON:TYPE DFT|LAST|USER:SYSTem:PON:TYPE?

Note

Set the startup load configuration type
Get the startup load configuration type

Parameter typeenumeration

Parameter Range

DFT: Default
LAST: last
USER: user

The return value

enumeration : DFT|LAST|USER

Default Values

DFT

ExampleSYSTem:PON:TYPE DFT

14.2.5

Factory Reset

When Factory Reset is selected, the device will recall the initial config.

Command format:SYSTem:FDEFault

Note

Restore the factory default Settings

Parameter type

None

Parameter Range

None

The return value

None

Default Values

None

Example:SYSTem:FDEFault

14.2.6

Reset&Clear

Clear the current Settings and restore the default Settings.

Command format:SYSTem:CLEAr

Note

Clear system Settings/files

Parameter type

None

Parameter Range

None

The return value

None

Default Values

None

Example:SYSTem:FDEFault

int.siglent.com

333

SSA5000A Series User Manual

14.3 Alignments
The alignment function is used to calibrate errors caused by temperature drift.
Automatic alignment:
After automatic alignment is turned on, the analyzer determines and triggers temperature error
calibration logic based on temperature changes.
Calibrate now:
Perform a temperature error calibration immediately.

Command format:CALibration:STATe 0|1:CALibration:STATe?

Note

Sets/gets the automatic calibration switch

Parameter type

Boole

Parameter Range

0|1

The return value

0|1

Default Values

0

Example:CALibration:STATe 0

Command format:CALibration

Note

Perform a calibration immediately

Parameter type

None

Parameter Range

None

The return value

None

Example:CALibration334

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

14.4 File
Activate the analyzer file operation dialog box to perform file-related operations. Include: FileBrowser, File Browser, and Recall File.

Command format:MMEMory:STORe STA|TRC|COR|CSV|LIM|JPG|BMP|PNG, ”{file}”

Note

Different modes support different types of file formats

Parameter typecharacterstring

Example:MMEMory:STORe STA, ”ABC.sta”

Command format:MMEMory:LOAD STA|TRC|COR|LIM, ”{file}”

Note

Read the fileParameter typecharacterstring

Example:MMEMory:LOAD STA, ”ABC.sta” ( ”File name needs to be added”)

Command format:MMEMory:DELete ”{file}”

Note

Delete files or folders

Parameter typecharacter string

Example:MMEMory:DELete ”ABC.sta”

int.siglent.com

335

SSA5000A Series User Manual

14.5 Display
Set screen brightness.
Set grid brightness in waveform area.
Set buzzer state
Set buzzer volume

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID:BRIGhtness:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID:BRIGhtness?

Instructions

Set the grid brightness of the waveform area
Get waveform area grid brightness

Parameter type

IntegerParameter Range

0~100

ReturnInteger

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID:BRIGhtness 50

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:SCREen:BRIGhtness:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:SCREen:BRIGhtness?

Instructions

Set screen Brightness
Get screen brightness

Parameter type

IntegerParameter Range

0~100

ReturnInteger

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:SCREen:BRIGhtness 50

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:BEEP:VOLUme:DISPlay:WINDow:BEEP:VOLUme?

Instructions

Set the volume of the buzzer
Gets the buzzer volume

Parameter type

IntegerParameter Range

0~100

ReturnInteger

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:BEEP:VOLUme 50

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:BEEP:STATe:DISPlay:WINDow:BEEP:STATe?

Instructions

Set the buzzer switch
Obtain the buzzer switch

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

0/1

Return0/1

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:BEEP:STATe 1

336

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

14.6 PowerThis menu provides shutdown and restart operation buttons.
Analysis Provides energy saving options. You can set the analyzer to automatically turn off thedisplay if no operation is performed within a specified period of time.
When the power-on and power-on function is turned on, the analyzer is powered on and can beturned off.

Command format:SYSTem:POWer:OFF

Instructions

Close the device

Example:SYSTem:POWer:OFF

Command format:SYSTem:POWer:OFF

Instructions

Restart the device (some machines may not support restart and need to be manually
started after shutdown)

Example:SYSTem:RESTart

14.7 Self Test
14.7.1

Screen Test

Test whether the screen has any pixel defects by displaying five colors: White, Red, Green, Blue andBlack. Press ‘Preset’ key to switch the screen color and press ‘←’ key to exit the test.

14.7.2

Keyboard Test

Enter the keyboard test interface. Press the function keys at the front panel one-by-one and observe
whether the corresponding key is checked. If not, an error may have occurred in that key. To exit the
test, press ‘←’ four times.

14.7.3LCD Test

If the keys at the front panel are transparent, when the key is pressed, the corresponding backlightwill turn on when testing it.

14.7.4

Touch Test

Test whether the touch screen has any defects by touching the test button at specific spots onscreen.

int.siglent.com

337

SSA5000A Series User Manual

15

Remote Control

The analyzer features LAN, USB Device, and GPIB_USB module interfaces. By using a computerwith these interfaces, and a suitable programming language (and/or NI-VISA software), users canremotely control the analyzer based on SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments)
command set, LabView and IVI (Interchangeable Virtual Instrument), to interoperate with otherprogrammable instruments.
This chapter introduces how to build communication between the analyzer and a controller computerwith these interfaces.

15.1 Remotely Operating the Analyzer
The analyzer provides both the USB and LAN connection which allows you to set up a remote
operation environment with a controller computer. A controller computer could be a personal
computer (PC) or a minicomputer. Some intelligent instruments also function as controllers.

15.1.1

USB Device port

Refer to the following steps to finish the connection via USB-Device:1

Install NI-VISA on your PC for USB-TMC driver.

2

Connect the analyzer USB Device port to a PC with a USB A-B cable.

3

Switch on the analyzer.

The analyzer will be detected automatically as a new USB hardware.

338

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

15.1.2

LAN port

Figure 15-1 LAN config

Refer to the following steps to finish the connection via LAN:
1

Install NI-VISA on your PC for VXI driver. Or without NI-VISA, using socket or telnet in your PC’s
Operating System.

2

Connect the analyzer to PC or the local area network with a LAN cable.

3

Switch on the analyzer.

4

Press button on the front panel

System→ Interface → LAN to enter the LAN Config function

menu.
5

Select the IP Config between Static and DHCP.


DHCP: the DHCP server in the current network will assign the network parameters
automatically (IP address, subnet mask, gate way) for the analyzer.



Static: you can set the IP address, subnet mask, gate way manually. Press Apply.

The analyzer will be detected automatically or manually as a new LAN point.

int.siglent.com

339

SSA5000A Series User Manual

15.1.3

GPIB-USB Host port

Refer to the following steps to finish the connection via USB:
1

Install NI-VISA on your PC for GPIB driver.

2

Connect the analyzer USB Host port to a PC’s GPIB card port, with SIGLENT USB-GPIB
adaptor.

3

Switch on the analyzer

Figure 15-2 SIGLENT USB-GPIB Adaptor

4

Press button on the front panel

System→Interface→

GPIB

to enter the GPIB

number.

The analyzer will be detected automatically as a new GPIB point.

340

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

15.2 Build Communication
15.2.1

VISA

NI-VISA includes a Run-Time Engine version and a Full version. The Run-Time Engine version
provides NI device drivers such as USB-TMC, VXI, GPIB, etc. The full version includes the Run-TimeEngine and a software tool named NI MAX that provides a user interface to control the device.
You can get NI-VISA full version from:http://www.ni.com/download/.

After download you can follow the steps below to install it:
1

Double click the visa_full.exe, dialog shown as below:

Figure 15-3

2

Click Unzip, the installation process will automatically launch after unzipping files. If yourcomputer needs to install .NET Framework 4, its setup process will auto start.

Figure 15-4

3The NI-VISA installing dialog is shown above. Click Next to start the installation process.

int.siglent.com

341

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Figure 15-5

4

Set the install path, default path is “C:\Program Files\National Instruments\”, you can change it.
Click Next, dialog shown as above.

Figure 15-6

5

Click Next twice, in the License Agreement dialog, select the “I accept the above 2 License
Agreement(s).”, and click Next, dialog shown as below:

Figure 15-7342

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

6

Click Next to run installation.

Figure 15-8
Now the installation is complete, reboot your PC.

15.2.2

Sockets/Telnet

Through the LAN interface, VXI-11, Sockets and Telnet protocols can be used to communicate withthe analyzer. VXI-11 is provided in NI-VISA, while Sockets and Telnet are commonly included in PC’s
OS initially.
Socket LAN is a method used to communicate with the analyzer over the LAN interface using theTransmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP). A socket is a fundamental technology
used for computer networking and allows applications to communicate using standard mechanisms
built into network hardware and operating systems. The method accesses a port on the analyzer
from which bidirectional communication with a network computer can be established.
Before you can use sockets LAN, you must select the analyzer’s sockets port number to use:Standard mode: Available on port 5025. Use this port for programming.

Telnet mode: The telnet SCPI service is available on port 5024.

int.siglent.com

343

SSA5000A Series User Manual

15.3 Remote Control Capabilities
15.3.1

User-defined Programming

Users can use SCPI commands to program and control the analyzer. For details, refer to theintroductions in “Programming Examples”.

15.3.2NI MAX

Users can control the analyzer remotely by sending SCPI commands via NI-MAX software. NI_MAX
is National Instruments Measurement and Automation Explorer. It is an executable program thatenables easy communication to troubleshoot issues with instrumentation.
15.3.2.1

Using USBRun NI MAX software.
1

Click “Device and interface” at the upper left corner of the software;2

Find the “USBTMC” device symbol

Figure 15-9

3

Click “Open VISA Test Panel” option button, then the following interface will appear.

4

Click the “Input/Output” option button and click the “Query” option button in order to view theoperation information.

Figure 15-10344

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Note: The “*IDN?” command (known as the Identification Query) returns the instrument
manufacturer, instrument model, serial number, and other identification information.

15.3.2.2

Using LAN

Select “Add Network Device”, and select “VISA TCP/IP Resource” as shown:
Run NI MAX software.
1.

Click “Device and interface” at the upper left corner of the software;2.

Find the “Network Devices” symbol, click “Add Network Devices”;

Figure 15-11

3.

Select Manual Entry of LAN instrument, select Next, and enter the IP address as shown. Click
Finish to establish the connection:

Figure 15-12

Note: Leave the LAN Device Name BLANK or the connection will fail.

int.siglent.com

345

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Figure 15-13

4.

After a brief scan, the connection should be shown under Network Devices:

Figure 15-14

5.

Right-click on the product and select Open NI-VISA Test Panel:

Figure 15-15

6.

Click “Input/Output” option button and click “Query” option button. If everything is OK, you will
see the Read operation information returned as shown below.

346

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Figure 15-16

15.3.3Web browser

The analyzer can be remotely controlled through PC or web browser of mobile terminal installing any
driver. It mimics the touch screen/mouse clickable display function, just like a physical instrument.
The browser also supports screenshot and firmware update functions.

*It is recommended to use a web browser that supports HTML5, such as Chrome or Firefox.

int.siglent.com

347

SSA5000A Series User Manual

16

SCPI Overview

16.1 Command Format
SCPI commands present a hierarchical tree structure containing multiple subsystems, each of thesubsystems is made up of a root keyword and several subkeywords. The command string usually
starts with “:”, the keywords are separated by “:” and the followed parameter settings are separated
by space. Query commands add “?” at the end of the string.
For example::SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer <freq>:SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer?
SENSe is the root key of the command, FREQuency and CENTer are second and third keywords.
The command begins with “:”, and separates the keywords at the same time, <freq> separated by
space and represents the parameter available for setting; “?” represents a query.

16.2 Symbol Instruction
The following four symbols are not the content of SCPI commands and cannot be sent with thecommands, but are usually used in the commands.
1

Triangle Brackets < >The parameter in the triangle brackets must be replaced by an effective value. For example:
Send the “:DEMod:VOLume <value>” command in “:DEMod:VOLume 5”.

2

Square Brackets [ ]The content in the square brackets can be ignored. When the parameter is ignored, the instrument
will set the parameter to its default. For example,
In the “[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation?” command, sending any of the four commands below
can generate the same effect::POWer:ATTenuation?
:POWer:RF:ATTenuation?
:SENSe:POWer:ATTenuation?
:SENSe:POWer:RF:ATTenuation?
3

Vertical Bar |The vertical bar is used to separate multiple parameters and when sending the command, you canchoose one of the parameters. For example,
In the “[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1” command, the parameters
available are “OFF”, “ON”, “0” or “1”.

348

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

4

Braces { }The parameters in the braces are optional which can be ignored or set for one or more times. For
example::CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DATA <x-axis>,<ampl>{,<x-axis>, <ampl>}, in the command, the {,<x-axis>,<ampl>} parameters can be ignored or set for one or more times.

16.3 Parameter TypeThe parameters in the commands introduced in this manual include 6 types: boolean, enumeration,
integer, float, discrete and string.

1

Boolean

The parameters in the commands could be “OFF”, “ON”, “0” or “1”. For example:[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1

2

Enumeration

The parameter could be any of the values listed. For example:[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE LOGPower|POWer|VOLTage
The parameter is “OGPower”, “POWer” or “VOLTage”.

3

String

The parameter should be the combinations of ASCII characters. For example::SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPADdress <“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”>
The parameter can be set as “192.168.1.12” string.

4

Integer

Except other notes, the parameter can be any integer within the effective value range. For example:[:SENSe]:DEMod:VOLume <value>
The parameter < value > can be set to any integer between 0 and 10.

5

Float

The parameter could be any value within the effective value range according to the accuracy
requirement (the default accuracy contains up to 9 digits after the decimal points). For example::CALCulate:BANDwidth:NDB <value>
The parameter < value > can be set to any real number between -100 and 100.
6Discrete

The parameter could only be one of the specified values and these values are discontinuous. For

int.siglent.com

349

SSA5000A Series User Manualexample:[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio <number>
The parameter <number> could only be one of 0.001, 0.003, 0.01, 0.03, 0.1, 0.3, 1.0, 3.0, 10.0, 30.0,
100.0, 300.0, 1000.0.

16.4 Command Abbreviation
All of the commands are not case sensitive, so you can use any of them. But if abbreviation is used,
all the capital letters in the command must be written completely. For example::DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATe?

Can be abbreviated to::DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:DLIN:STAT?

350

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

16.5 IEEE Common Commands
*IDN
*RST
*CLS
*ESE
*ESR?
*OPC
*SRE
*STB?
*WAI
*TRG
*TST?

Command Format*IDN?

Instruction

Returns an instrument identification information string. The string will contain the
manufacturer, model number, serial number, software number, FPGA number and
CPLD number.

Menu

None

Example*IDN?
Return: Siglent,SVA1015,1234567890,100.01.01.06.01

Command Format*RST

Instruction

This command presets the instrument to a factory defined condition that is
appropriate for remote programming operation.

Menu

None

Example*RST

Command Format*CLS

Instruction

Clears the status byte register. It does this by emptying the error queue and clearing
all bits in all of the event registers. The status byte register summarizes the states ofthe other registers. It is also responsible for generating service requests.

Menu

None

Example*CLS

Command Format*ESE <number>*ESE?

Instruction

Set the bits in the standard event status enable register. This register monitors I/Oerrors and synchronization conditions such as operation complete, request control,
query error, device dependent error, execution error, command error and power on. A
summary bit is generated on execution of the command.
The query returns the state of the standard event status enable register.

Menu

None

Example*ESE 16

int.siglent.com

351

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Command Format*ESR?

Instruction

Queries and clears the standard event status event register. (This is a destructive
read.) The value returned reflects the current state (0/1) of all the bits in the register.

Menu

None

Example*ESR?

Command Format

*OPC
*OPC?

Instruction

Set bit 0 in the standard event status register to “1” when all pending operations havefinished.
The query stops any new commands from being processed until the current
processing is complete. Then it returns a “1”, and the program continues. This query
can be used to synchronize events of other instruments on the external bus.
Returns a “1” if the last processing is complete. Use this query when there’s a needto monitor the command execution status, such as a sweep execution.

Menu

None

Example*OPC?

Command Format*SRE <integer>*SRE?

Instruction

This command enables the desired bits of the service request enable register.
The query returns the value of the register, indicating which bits are currently
enabled. The default value is 255.

Menu

None

Example*SRE 1

Command Format*STB?

Instruction

This query is used by some instruments for a self test.

Menu

None

Example*STB?

Command Format*WAI

Instruction

This command causes the instrument to wait until all pending commands arecompleted before executing any additional commands.
There is no query form to the command.

Menu

None

Example*WAI

Command Format*TRG

Instruction

Restarts the current sweep.

Menu

None

Example*TRG

Command Format*TST?

Instruction

This query is used by some instruments for a self test.

Menu

None

Example

*TST?

352

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

16.6 SCPI LIST
16.6.1GPSA

Mode/Meas:INSTrument[:SELect]:INSTrument:MEASure

Freq[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement][:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO[:SENSe]:FREQuency:OFFSet[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:FULL[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:ZERO[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:PREVious[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:HALF[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:DOUBle[:SENSe]:FREQuency:TUNE:IMMediate:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:SPACing:CALCulate:MARKer:TRCKing[:STATe]BW[:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio[:SENSe]:FILTer:TYPE

Sweep[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO:INITiate:CONTinuous:INITiate[:IMMediate][:SENSe]:SWEep:MODE[:SENSe]:SWEep:MODE:AUTO[:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes[:SENSe]:SWEep:SPEed[:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts

Ampt

int.siglent.com:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel353

SSA5000A Series User Manual:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing:UNIT:POWer:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:RLEVel:OFFSet[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe]
Trigger:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:LEVel:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:SLOPe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal:DELay:COMPensation:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:PERiod:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet:DISPlay:RESet:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:SYNC[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:SOURce[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe[:STATe][:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:VIEW[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:DELay[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:LENGth[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:METHod[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:VIEW:STARt

Trace

TRACe:SELEct:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DISPlay[:STATe]:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6 [:DATA]?
:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA][:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6[:FUNCtion][:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AUTO[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe:AUTO:ALL:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MATH:X:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MATH:Y:CALCulate[:SELected]:MATH:FUNCtion:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MATH:OFFSet:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MATH:REFerence:CALCulate:NTData:STORE:REF

354

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual:CALCulate:NTData[:STATe]:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRLevel:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRPosition:DISPlay:WINDow:NTTRace[:STATe]:TRACe:COPY:TRACe:EXCHange:TRACe:PRESet:ALL:TRACe:CLEar:ALL
Marker:CALCulate:MARKer:SELEct:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:TRACe:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:Y?
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:REFerence:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF:CALCulate:MARKer:TABLe:CALCulate[:SELected]:MARKer:COUPle:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:READout:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:READout:AUTO:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:LINE:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:FUNCtion:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:BANDwidth[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:NDB?
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:BANDwidth:RESult?
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:FCOunt[:STATe]:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:FCOunt:X?
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:CENTer:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:STEP:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:START:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:STOP:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:RLEVel:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:DELTa[:SET]:SPAN:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:DELTa[:SET]:CENTer:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MINimum:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:NEXT:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:LEFT:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:RIGHt

int.siglent.com

355

SSA5000A Series User Manual:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:PTPeak:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:CPSearch[:STATe]:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:CALCulate:PEAK:TABLe?
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT:ORDER:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:DTLimit:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:DTLimit |1|2|3|4|5|6
Limit:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:STATe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MARGin:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MARGin:STATe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:X:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:Y:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DATA:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:ADD:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:POINt:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe:ALL:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TRACe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:INTerpolate:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:CMODe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AMPLitude:CMODe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:COPY:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:BUILd:CALCulate:LLINe:TEST:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:BEEP:CALCulate:LLINe:FAIL:STOP:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FAIL?

Settings[:SENSe]:AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:COUNt[:SENSe]:AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6?
[:SENSe]:AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:CLEar

356

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE:COUPle:ALL:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATe?
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X:FLINe:STATe?
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X:FLINe[:SENSe]:DEMod[:SENSe]:DEMod:EPHone[:SENSe]:DEMod:VOLume[:SENSe]:DEMod:TIME:INSTrument:COUPle:FREQuency:CENTer
Chp[:SENSe]:CHPower:BWIDth:INTegration[:SENSe]:CHPower:FREQuency:SPAN:POWer:UNIT:CHPower:POWer:PSD:CHPower:MEASure:CHPower?
:CHPower:MEASure:CHPower:CHPower?
:CHPower:MEASure:CHPower:DENSity?
[:SENSe]:CHPower:AVERage:TCONtrol[:SENSe]:CHPower:FREQuency:SPAN:POWer:UNIT:CHPower:POWer:PSD:CHPower:MEASure:CHPower?
:CHPower:MEASure:CHPower:CHPower?
:CHPower:MEASure:CHPower:DENSity?
[:SENSe]:CHPower:AVERage:TCONtrol

ACPR[:SENSe]:ACPRatio:BWIDth:INTegration[:SENSe]:ACPRatio:OFFSet:BWIDth[:INTegration][:SENSe]:ACPRatio:OFFSet[:FREQuency]:MEASure:ACPRatio:ACPower:MAIN?
:MEASure:ACPRatio:LOWer:POWer?
:MEASure:ACPRatio:UPPer:POWer?
:MEASure:ACPRatio:LOWer?
:MEASure:ACPRatio:UPPer?
[:SENSe]:ACPower:AVERage:TCONtrol

OBW[:SENSe]:OBWidth:PERCent[:SENSe]:OBWidth:XDB:MEASure:OBWidth?
:MEASure:OBWidth:OBWidth?

int.siglent.com

357

SSA5000A Series User Manual:MEASure:OBWidth:CENTroid?
[:SENSe]:OBWidth:PREFerence[:SENSe]:OBWidth:INTegration[:METHod]:MEASure:OBWidth:OBWidth:FERRor?
[:SENSe]:OBWidth:AVERage:TCONtrol
T-Power[:SENSe]:TPOWer:FREQuency:CENTer[:SENSe]:TPOWer:LLIMit[:SENSe]:TPOWer:RLIMit:MEASure:TPOWer?
[:SENSe]:TPOWer:AVERage:TCONtrol

TOI:MEASure:TOI?
:MEASure:TOI:IP3?
[:SENSe]:TOI:AVERage:TCONtrol

Sepctrum
Monitor[:SENSe]:SPECtrogram:STATe[:SENSe]:SPECtrogram:RESTart[:SENSe]:SPECtrogram:AVERage:TCONtrol

CNR[:SENSe]:CNRatio:BANDwidth:INTegration[:SENSe]:CNRatio:BANDwidth:NOISe[:SENSe]:CNRatio:OFFSet:CNRatio:MEASure:CNRatio?
:CNRatio:MEASure:CNRatio:CARRier?
:CNRatio:MEASure:CNRatio:NOISe?
[:SENSe]: CNRatio:AVERage:TCONtrol

Harmonics[:SENSe]:HARMonics:FREQuency:FUNDamental[:SENSe]:HARMonics:FREQuency:FUNDamental:AUTO[:SENSe]:HARMonics:FREQuency:STEP[:INCRement][:SENSe]:HARMonics:FREQuency:STEP[:INCRement]:AUTO[:SENSe]:HARMonics:NUMBer[:SENSe]:HARMonics:SELect358

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

16.6.2RTSA

Freq[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement][:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO[:SENSe]:FREQuency:OFFSet[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:FULL[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:ZERO[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:PREVious[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:HALF[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:DOUBle

BW[:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO[:SENSe]:FILTer:TYPE

Sweep:INITiate[:IMMediate]:INITiate:CONTinuous[:SENSe]:ACQuisition:TIME:DISPlay:PAUSe

Trigger:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:LEVel:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:DELay:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal:DELay:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal:SLOPe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FMT:STATe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FMT:ACTion

Ampt:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:UNIT:POWer[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe]

int.siglent.com

359

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Trace:TRACe[1]|2|3 [:DATA]?
:TRACe[:DATA]:SPECtrum?
:TRACe[:DATA]:PVT?
:TRACe[1]|2|3:TYPE:TRACe[1]|2|3DISPlay[:STATe][:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6[:FUNCtion][:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe:PVTime[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe:SPECtrogram

Marker:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:TRACe:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:Y?
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:REFerence:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:CENTer:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:START:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:STOP:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MINimum:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:NEXT:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:LEFT:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:RIGHt:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:PTPeak:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:CPSearch[:STATe]

Linit:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:STATe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MARGin:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MARGin:STATe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:X:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:Y:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DATA:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:ADD:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:POINt:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe:ALL:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TRACe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:INTerpolate:TYPE

360

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:CMODe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AMPLitude:CMODe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:COPY:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:BUILd
Meas:AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:COUNt:DISPlay:VIEW[:SELect]:DISPlay:VIEW:DENSity:PERSistence:DISPlay:VIEW:DENSity:PERSistence:INFinite:DISPlay:VIEW:SPECtrogram:TRAC:STOP:DISPlay:VIEW:SPECtrogram:TRAC:OFFSet

int.siglent.com

361

SSA5000A Series User Manual

16.6.3DMA

MA[:SENSe]:AVERage[:STATe][:SENSe]:AVERage:COUNt[:SENSe]:DDEMod:MODulation:DDEMod[:FORMat]:SRATe[:SENSe]:DDEMod[:FORMat]:SYMBol:POINts[:SENSe]:DDEMod[:FORMat]:RLENgth[:SENSe]:DDEMod:FILTer[:MEASurement][:SENSe]:DDEMod:FILTer:REFerence[:SENSe]:STATistic:STATe:CALCulate:RESTart:READ:DDEMod?
[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt[:STATe][:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:SLENgth[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt:THREshold[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt:MINLength[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt:MINGap[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:SWORd[:STATe][:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:SWORd:OFFSet[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:SWORd:PATTern[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SEGMent:BER:STATe[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SEGMent:BER:PATTern

AMA[:SENSe]:ADEMod:STYLe:CALCulate:IFBW:INDEx:CALCulate:EQLPf:INDEx:READ:ADEMod?

Freq[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement][:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN?

BW[:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:DDEMod:FFT:WINDow:TYPE

Sweep:INITiate[:IMMediate]:INITiate:CONTinuous

Trigger:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:LEVel:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay

362

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:SLOPe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:PERiod:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet:DISPlay:RESet:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:SYNC:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:ATRigger:STATe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:ATRigger:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff:STATe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff:TYPE
Ampt[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO:TRACe1|2|3|4:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:TRACe1|2|3|4:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:TRACe1|2|3|4[:Y]:AUToscale[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe]

Trace:CALCulate:PARameter:COUNt:DISPlay:LAYout:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:DATA:NAME:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:FORMat[:Y]:TRACe:DEMod:EYE:LENGth:TRACe:DEMod:TABLe:FORMat

Marker:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:ENABle:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:TYPE:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:Y?
:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:REFerence:CALCulate[:SELected]:MARKer:COUPle

int.siglent.com

363

SSA5000A Series User Manual

16.6.4Freq

EMI[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP[:SENSe] :FSCan:RANGe[:SENSe] :FREQuency:MIDSpan[:SENSe]:FREQuency:OFFSet:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:SPACing

BW[:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO[:SENSe]:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO[:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN:BWIDth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN:BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO

Sweep:INITiate:FSCan:CONTinuous:INITiate:METer:CONTinuous:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:SENSe]:SWEep:COUNt:SENSe]:QPD:DWELl:TIME:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN:PRBW:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN:PRBW:AUTO

Trigger:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal:SLOPe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal:DELay:STATe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal:DELay

Ampt:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe]:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing:UNIT:POWer

364

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Trace:TRACe:SELEct:TRACe:MODE:TRACe[1]|2|3:FSCan:TYPE:TRACe[1]|2|3:TYPE[:SENSe]:AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3:COUNt[:SENSe]:AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3:CLEar[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3[:FUNCtion][:SENSe]:FSCan:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3:AUTO[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe:AUTO:ALL[:SENSe]:AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3?
:TRACe[1]|2|3 [:DATA]?
:TRACe[1]|2|3:FSCan[:DATA]?
:TRACe[1]|2|3:MAXimum:X?
:TRACe[1]|2|3:MAXimum:Y?
:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA]:TRACe[1]|2|3:DISPlay[:STATe]:TRACe:COPY:TRACe:EXCHange:TRACe:PRESet:ALL

Marker:CALCulate:MARKer:SELEct:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE:CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe:CALCulate[:SELected]:MARKer:AOFF:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:TRACe:CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:TRACe:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:REFerence:CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:REFerence:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:RELative:TO:MARKer:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:RELative:TO:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:POSition:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:Y:CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:Y?
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8 [:SET]:RESEt:DELTa

int.siglent.com

365

SSA5000A Series User Manual:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:DELTa:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:REFerence:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:Y:DELTa?
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:Y:REFerence?
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8 [:SET]:CENTer:CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8 [:SET]:SLISt:CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8 [:SET]:METer:CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:TO:METer:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum[:SET]:CENTer:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:NEXT:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:LEFT:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:RIGHt:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:PTPeak:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MINimum:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:NUMber
Limit:CALCulate:LLINe:SEL:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:STATe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MARGin:STATe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MARGin:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:OFFSet:X:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:OFFSet:Y:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DATA:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:ADD:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TRACe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:INTerpolate:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:CONTrol:INTerpolate:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:CMODe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AMPLitude:CMODe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:COPY:CALCulate:LLINe:TEST:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:BUILd:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FAIL?

366

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Meas[:SENSe]:FSCan:SEQuence[:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN:POINts?
[:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN:TIME:DISPlay:METer[:STATe][:SENSe]:METer:DETector:DWELl[:SENSe]:METer:DETector:CALCulate:METer:LIMit[:DATA]:CALCulate:METer:LIMit:STATe:CALCulate:METer:LIMit:ULLine:CALCulate:METer:POWer[:CURRent]?
:SENSe]:METer:PHOLd:RESet:CALCulate:SLISt:MARK:SIGNal:CALCulate:SLISt:MARK:CLEar:SIGNal:CALCulate:SLISt:MARK:ALL:CALCulate:SLISt:MARK:CLEar:ALL:CALCulate:SLISt:DELete:SIGNal:CALCulate:SLISt:DELete:ALL:CALCulate:SLISt:DELete:MARKed:CALCulate:SLISt:SORT:TYPE:CALCulate:SLISt:SORT:DAMPlitude:CALCulate:SLISt:SORT:DLDelta:CALCulate:SLISt:SORT:ORDer[:SENSe]:FSCan:SEQuence:REStart[:SENSe]:FSCan:SEQuence:REMeasure[:SENSe]:FSCan:SEQuence:REMeter:CALCulate:SLISt:SET:METer:CALCulate:FSCan:SLISt:SET:METer:CALCulate:FSCan:SLISt:DATA?
:DISPlay:MEASure[:STATe][:SENSe]:FSCan:FINal:DETector#:DWELl[:SENSe]:FSCan:FINal:DETector#:LDELta

int.siglent.com

367

SSA5000A Series User Manual

16.6.5Freq

PULSE[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement][:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO[:SENSe]:FREQuency:OFFSet

BW[:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio:CONfig?
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:BANDwidth:VIDeo[:SENSe]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO[:SENSe]:BANDwidth:VIDeo:AUTO[:SENSe]:BANDwidth:VIDeo:RATio"[:SENSe]:BANDwidth:VIDeo:RATio:CONfig?

Sweep:INITiate:CONTinuous[:SENSe]:SWEep:POINtsTrigger:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:SLOPe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal:SLOPe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:DELay:STATe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:DELay:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal:DELay:STATe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal:DELay:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal:DELay:COMPensation:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:DELay:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:DELay:STATe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:PERiod:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet:DISPlay:RESet:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:SYNC

368

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Ampt:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel":DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe]:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing:UNIT:POWer:TRACe[:Y]:AUToscale

Trace:TRACe:MODE:TRACe:TYPE:SENSe]:AVERage:TRACe:CLEar[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe[:FUNCtion][:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe:AUTO[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe:AUTO:ALL[:SENSe]:AVERage:TRACe?
:TRACe[:DATA]?
:TRACe:MAXimum:X?
:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA]:TRACe:DISPlay[:STATe]:TRACe:PRESet:ALL:TRACe:CLEar:ALL

int.siglent.com

369

SSA5000A Series User Manual

16.6.6Freq

PN[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CARRier[:SENSe]:LPLot:FREQuency:OFFSet:STARt[:SENSe]:LPLot:FREQuency:OFFSet:STOP[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CARRier:SEARch[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CARRier:TRACk[:STATe][:SENSe]:FREQuency:CARRier:TRACk:SPAN[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CARRier:TRACk:SPAN:AUTO[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CARRier:TRACk:ACCuracy

BW[:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution]

Sweep:INITiate:CONTinuous[:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts

Ampt:DISPlay:LPLot:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:DISPlay:LPLot:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:DISPlay:LPLot:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition

Trace:TRACe:SELEct:TRACe:LPLot:MODE:TRACe:LPLot:TYPE:TRACe:LPLot:COPY:TRACe:LPLot:EXCHange:TRACe:PRESet:ALL:TRACe:CLEar:ALL[:SENSe]:LPLot:DETector[:FUNCtion][:SENSe]:AVERage:TRACe?
:TRACe[:DATA]?
:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA]

Marker:CALCulate:MARKer:TABLe[:STATe]:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer:SELEct:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer:AOFF:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:TRACe:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:REFerence:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:RELative:TO:MARKer:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:POSition370

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer:COUPle[:STATe]:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:RESEt:DELTa:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:FUNCtion:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:RMSNoise:MODE:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:BAND:SPAN:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:BAND:LEFT:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:BAND:RIGHt:CALCulate:LPLot:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:RMSNoise:RESult
Linit:CALCulate:LLINe:SEL:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:STATe:CALCulate:LPLot:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DISPlay:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MARGin:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MARGin:STATe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:X:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:Y:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe:ALL:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TRACe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DATA:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:INTerpolate:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:CONTrol:INTerpolate:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:CMODe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AMPLitude:CMODe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:ADD:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:POINt:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:COPY:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:BUILd:CALCulate:LLINe:TEST:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:BEEP:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FAIL?

Meas[:SENSe]:LPLot:AVERage:COUNt[:SENSe]:LPLot:AVERage:STATe[:SENSe]:LPLot:AVERage:TCONtrol[:SENSe]:LPLot:METHod[:SENSe]:LPLot:SMOoth

int.siglent.com

371

SSA5000A Series User Manual:DISPlay:LPLot:VIEW:CALCulate:LPLot:SPURious:TABLe:CALCulate:LPLot:DECade:TABLe[SENSe]:CARRier:THReshold:MINimum372

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

16.6.7NF

Freq:SENSe]:NFIGure:FREQuency:MODE[:SENSe]:NFIGure:FREQuency:CENTer[:SENSe]:NFIGure:FREQuency:STARt[:SENSe]:NFIGure:FREQuency:STOP[:SENSe]:NFIGure:FREQuency:SPAN[:SENSe]:NFIGure:FREQuency:FIXed[:SENSe]:NFIGure:FREQuency:LIST:DATA:DELete

BW[:SENSe]:NFIGure:BWIDth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:NFIGure:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:NFIGure:BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO[:SENSe]:NFIGure:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO

Sweep[:SENSe]:NFIGure:SWEep:POINts[:SENSe]:NFIGure:SWEep:TIME[:SENSe]:NFIGure:SWEep:TIME:AUTO:INITiate:CONTinuous

Ampt:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:NFIGure:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:NFACtor:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:GAIN:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:TEEFective:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:PHOT:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:PCOLd:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:NFIGure:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:NFACtor:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:GAIN:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:TEEFective:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:PHOT:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:PCOLd:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:NFIGure:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:GAIN:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:TEEFective:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:PHOT:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:PCOLd:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe#:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO:DISPlay:NFIGure:VIEW3:WINDow#:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO[:SENSe]:NFIGure:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation

int.siglent.com

373

SSA5000A Series User Manual[:SENSe]:NFIGure:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO[:SENSe]:NFIGure:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe]
Trace:DISPlay:NFIGure:FORMat:DISP:NFIG:FORM:AUTO:DISPlay:NFIGure:DATA:TRACe:DISPlay:NFIGure:TRACe:COMBined[:STATe]:TRACe:NFIGure:TYPE:TRACe:NFIGure:DISPlay[:STATe]

Marker:CALCulate:NFIGure:MARKe[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:CALCulate:NFIGure:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:Y:CALCulate:NFIGure:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE:CALCulate:NFIGure:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:TRACe:CALCulate:NFIGure:MARKer:AOFF

Meas[:SENSe]:NFIGure:CORRection:ENR[:MEASurement]:TABLe:DATA:DELete[:SENSe]:NFIGure:CORRection:ENR:MEASurement:TABLe:DATA[:SENSe]:NFIGure:CALibration:DELete374

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

16.6.8BT

Freq[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CHANnel

Sweep:INITiate:CONTinuous[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME

Ampt:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision

Trace:CALCulate:PARameter:SELect:CALCulate:PARameter:COUNt:TRACe:FORMat[:Y]Trigger:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:DELay:STATe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:DELay:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:SLOPe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal:DELay:STATe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal:DELay:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal:DELay:COMPensation:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal:SLOPe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFBurst:SLOPe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:DELay:STATe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:DELay:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:PERiod:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet:DISPlay:RESet:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:SYNC:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:ATRigger:STATe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:ATRigger:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff:STATe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff:TYPE

Meas[:SENSe#]:AVERage[:STATe][:SENSe#]:AVERage:COUNt:FILE:RAW:SAVE

int.siglent.com

375

SSA5000A Series User Manual

16.6.9Other

IO[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce:TYPE[:SENSe]:CORRection:IMPedance[:INPut][:MAGNitude]

Correction[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET#[:STATe][:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET#:ADD[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET:ALL:DELete[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET#:DATA?
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET#:DELete[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET:ALL:DELete

System:SYSTem:CONFigure:SYSTem?
:SYSTem:LANGuage:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:TYPE:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPADdress:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:GATeway:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SMASk:SYSTem:WEB:PSW:SYSTem:TIME:SYSTem:DATE:SYSTem:LKEY:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess

Reset:SYSTem:PRESet:SYSTem:PRESet:TYPE:SYSTem:PRESet:USER[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7:SAVE:SYSTem:PRESet:USER[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7:LOAD:SYSTem:PON:TYPE:SYSTem:FDEFault:SYSTem:CLEAr

Calibration:CALibration:STATe:CALibration

File:MMEMory:STORe:MMEMory:LOAD:MMEMory:DELete

Display:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID:BRIGhtness:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:SCREen:BRIGhtness

Power:SYSTem:POWer:OFF:SYSTem:RESTart

Buzzer:DISPlay:WINDow:BEEP:STATe:DISPlay:WINDow:BEEP:VOLUme

376

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

17 Service and Support
17.1 Service Summary
SIGLENT warrants that the products that it manufactures and sells will be free from defects inmaterials and workmanship for a period of three years (accessories for a period of one year) from thedate of shipment from an authorized Siglent distributor. If the product proves defective within therespective period, SIGLENT will provide repair or replacement as described in the complete warranty
statement.
To arrange for service or obtain a copy of the complete warranty statement, please contact yournearest Siglent sales and service office. Except as provided in this summary or the applicablewarranty statement, SIGLENT makes no warranty of any kind, express or implied, including without
limitation the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. In no event
shall SIGLENT be liable for indirect, special or consequential damages.

int.siglent.com

377

SSA5000A Series User Manual

17.2 Troubleshooting
Before calling SIGLENT, or returning an analyzer for service, perform the quick checks listed below.
This check may eliminate the problem.
If the problem remains still, please contact SIGLENT and provide your device information in the backof the analyzer.
1

The Power Switch

is still dark after power on:(1) Check that the power is correct / working.
(2) Check the power cord has been connected correctly(3) Check the power fuse. If a new fuse needs to be installed, please use a specified fuse.

2

The analyzer’s screen is still dark (no display) after power on:(1) Check whether the fan is running while the screen is dark, maybe the LCD cable is loose?
(2) Check whether the fan is not running while screen is dark, maybe it has failed to start up?
(3) Do not disassemble the instrument by yourself and contact SIGLENT.

3

The control panel is unresponsive or gives a wrong response:(1) Press all the keys at the front panel to check if all of them are normal after power on.
(2) Press

System> Self Test > Key Test to check if all the keys are working properly.

(3) If all the keys are not working, the numeric keyboard connection might be loose or thenumeric keyboard is broken.
(4) If the touch screen is not working, check if the Touch is ON in

Display> Touch Settingsmenu.
(5) Check whether the analyzer is locked in a remote control; if so, press

Esc

to unlock it.

(6) Do not disassemble the instrument by yourself and contact SIGLENT.

4

The traces on the screen do not update for a long period of time:(1) Check whether the traces are in View or other status; if so, change to Clear&Write toactiviate it.
(2) Verify whether all the trigger conditions have been met and whether there is a valid trigger
signal inputting.
(3) Check whether the analyzer is in a Limit test.
(4) Check whether the analyzer is in a single sweep.
(5) Check whether the current sweep time is too long.
(6) Check whether the analyzer is in a Demod listening and the Demod time is too long.
(7) Check whether the analyzer is in an EMI measurement mode, and the Sequance is not in a
Scan status.

5
378

Wrong measurement results or poor precision:
int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

To calculate the system errors and check the measurement results and precision, refer to theintroductions in “Specifications”. To reach these specifications, please:(1) Check whether all the external devices are successfully connected and are working
normally.
(2) Get some knowledge of the signal under measurement and set appropriate instrument
parameters.
(3) Make measurements under proper conditions, for example:(4) Warm-up the instrument appropriately and operate the instrument under the specified
environment temperature;(5) Check if the Correction is ON in SA or VNA mode.
(6) Calibrate the instrument regularly to reduce or avoid errors that might occur over time.
(7) If you need a specific calibration after the stated calibration period, contact SIGLENT or get
paid service from authorized measurement agencies.

6

System Message:

The instrument may display prompt messages, error messages or state messages according to thecurrent working status. These messages are displayed to help you to use the instrument correctly
and are not instrument failures.

int.siglent.com

379

SSA5000A Series User Manual

Table 17-1 System Message
User system message

Message on screen

System message description (1~199)
SWT_OOR (1)Sweep time out of range

RBW_OOR(2)RBW out of range

SWT_CCOFM(3)Can't change the sweep time in FFT mode

MRKT_UNDEF(4)Undefined marker type

MRKFT_UNDEF (5)Undefined marker function type

MRKDT_UNDEF (6)Undefined marker delta pair type

MRKRT_UNDEF (7)Undefined marker read out type

TRCT_UNDEF (8)Undefined trace type

DETT_UNDEF (9)Undefined detect type

SCA_CSWL (10)Can't set the Scale/Div with linear

MRKT_IOFF (11)The marker type is OFF, please open the current marker

MRK_NDELT (12)The marker type is not Delta

MRKRT_MBST (13)The marker read out type must be set time

MATHT_UNDEF (14)Undefined math type

XML_ANIE (15)Xml attribute node import error

XSCA_MBSLIZS (16)

X Scale must be set liner in zero span

TG_AXIS_XSCA (17)The Scale type must be logarithm when normalize

SCALE_TG_AXIS (18)

Scale type cannot be changed to linear while nomalize on

PEAK_UNFOUND (19)No peak found. Please change the search setting

IMD_FREQ_OOR (20)Frequency of intermodulation products out of range

AUTO_FAIL (21)Auto tune process failed

EXT_REF_PLUG_IN (22)

EXT ref plug in

EXT_REF_PLUG_OUT (23)

EXT ref plug out

REF_PLL_UNLOCK (24)

Ref pll unlock

SIG_NOT_STB (25)Signal is not stable enough to track380

int.siglent.com

SSA5000A Series User Manual

QP_RBW_OOR (26)

RBW out of range when do quasi peak scan

LAN_PLUG_IN (150)

Ethernet cable plug in

LAN_PLUG_OUT (151)

Ethernet cable plug out

IP_CONFLICT (152)

IP address conflict

IP_INVALID (153)

IP address invalid

NETM_INVALID (154)

Netmask address invalid

GWAY_INVALID (155)

Gateway address invalid

S21_NORMALIZE_DONE (183)

Normalization of S21 done

VNA_AUTO_CAL_DONE (184)Auto calibration of VNA done

Execution error (400~599)
LCF_DTFERR (400)

Load configurations failed, due to file error

Device error (600~799)
FUF_DTVERR (600)Firmware upgrade failed, due to the version error

FUF_DTRERR (601)

Firmware upgrade failed, due to the ram error

FUF_DTFERR (602)

Firmware upgrade failed, due to the file error

FUF_DTFVERR (603)

Firmware upgrade failed, due to verify the file error

FUF_DTUZFERR (604)

Firmware upgrade failed, due to unzip the file error

LIC_INVALID (605)

License is invalid!

ADC_ERROR (606)

Warning, ADC Overload!

int.siglent.com

381

SSA5000A Series User Manual

About SIGLENTSIGLENT is an international high-tech company, concentrating on R&D,
sales, production and services of electronic test & measurement instruments.

SIGLENT first began developing digital oscilloscopes independently in 2002.
After more than a decade of continuous development, SIGLENT has
extended its product line to include digital oscilloscopes, isolated handheld

oscilloscopes,
generators,

function/arbitrary
spectrumwaveform

analyzers,

vectorgenerators,
network

RF/MWsignalanalyzers,

digitalmultimeters, DC power supplies, electronic loads and other general purpose
test instrumentation. Since its first oscilloscope was launched in 2005,
SIGLENT has become the fastest growing manufacturer of digital
oscilloscopes. We firmly believe that today SIGLENT is the best value inelectronic test & measurement.

Headquarters:
SIGLENT Technologies Co., Ltd
Add: Bldg No.4 & No.5, Antongda Industrial

Zone, 3rd Liuxian Road, Bao'an District,
Shenzhen, 518101, China
Tel: + 86 755 3688 7876
Fax: + 86 755 3359 1582
Email: sales@siglent.com
Website: int.siglent.com

North America:
SIGLENT Technologies America, Inc
6557 Cochran Rd Solon, Ohio 44139
Tel: 440-398-5800
Toll Free: 877-515-5551

Fax: 440-399-1211
Email: info@siglentna.com
Website: www.siglentna.com

Europe:SIGLENT Technologies Germany GmbH

Follow us on
Facebook: SiglentTech

Add: Staetzlinger Str. 70
86165 Augsburg, Germany
Tel: +49(0)-821-666 0 111 0
Fax: +49(0)-821-666 0 111 22
Email: info-eu@siglent.com
Website: www.siglenteu.com

382

int.siglent.com